Ge Valve Software Tools Mn Valvue V2 8 Iom Technical Specifications 2.8 Instruc Man

Ge-Valve-Software-Tools-Mn-Valvue-V2-8-Iom-Technical-Specifications-656512 ge-valve-software-tools-mn-valvue-v2-8-iom-technical-specifications-656512

: Ge Ge-Valve-Software-Tools-Mn-Valvue-V2-8-Iom-Technical-Specifications-656512 ge-valve-software-tools-mn-valvue-v2-8-iom-technical-specifications-656512 ge pdf

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 660

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

GE 2LO	*DV
*

Masoneilan Products
ValVue* Software v2.8 (Rev &)
6RIWZDUH0anual
ValVue is a device management
software suite designed
exclusively for all
cts.
Masoneilan digital products.

1

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

About this Guide
The information in this manual is subject to change without prior notice.
The information contained in this manual, in whole or part, shall not be transcribed or copied
without GE Oil and Gas’ written permission.
In no case does this manual guarantee the suitability of the positioner or the software or its
adaptability to a specific customer's needs.
Please report any errors or questions about the information in this manual to your local
supplier or visit www.ge-energy/valves.com.

Copyright
All software is the intellectual property of GE Oil & Gas. The complete design and manufacture
is the intellectual property of GE Oil & Gas. Masoneilan*, FVP*, SVI, and ValVue are registered
trademarks of GE Oil & Gas. All information contained herein is believed to be accurate at the
time of publication and is subject to change without notice. All other trademarks and
copyrights are properties of their respective corporations.
Copyright 2014 by GE Oil & Gas. All rights reserved.
PN 055201-252 Rev. C
Document Changes
Version/Date
B/6-2012

Changes
Added HART 6 functionality.
Updated screen captures throughout.
Added Burst section.
Updated ValVue Options screen for ValVue 2.8 functionality.
Reconfigured book to include sections for all ValVue components
as opposed to just SVI1000 and SVI II AP.

C/3-2014

Added SVI, SVI2, HDLT and 12400 to the book.
Changed description of how to physically configure digital
switches.

2

Contents
Introduction .........................................................................................................................................................................................17
ValVue Lite and ValVue Trial ................................................................................................................................................17
Stand-Alone or Integrated ValVue.............................................................................................................................17
ValVue Tasks ........................................................................................................................................................................18
About this Manual......................................................................................................................................................................18
ValVue Software Installation and Administration .............................................................................................................19
Requirements...............................................................................................................................................................................19
Hardware and Software Requirements ..................................................................................................................19
Before Installing ValVue..........................................................................................................................................................19
HART Compliance..............................................................................................................................................................20
Failure to Communicate.................................................................................................................................................20
Installing ValVue.........................................................................................................................................................................21
Administration .............................................................................................................................................................................24
ValVue System Administration, Passwords, and Privilege Levels ...............................................................24
Starting Administration Program...............................................................................................................................25
Add Users ..............................................................................................................................................................................27
Editing User Accounts .....................................................................................................................................................28
Deleting a User Account.................................................................................................................................................28
Privilege Level......................................................................................................................................................................29
Starting ValVue ...........................................................................................................................................................................30
Registering ValVue ....................................................................................................................................................................30
Using Unregistered Software ...............................................................................................................................................37
Starting Unregistered Software ..................................................................................................................................37
Offline Mode .................................................................................................................................................................................37
Offline Operation................................................................................................................................................................38
ValVue Setup ......................................................................................................................................................................................41
Overview ........................................................................................................................................................................................41
Configure the Set Options......................................................................................................................................................41
Configure Multiplexor Setup and Operation .................................................................................................................45
Mux Setup .............................................................................................................................................................................46
Mux Reset..............................................................................................................................................................................48
Troubleshooting ValVue Mux .......................................................................................................................................50
Configuring Burst Mode..........................................................................................................................................................51
Connecting Devices ........................................................................................................................................................................53
Connected Devices ...................................................................................................................................................................53
Selecting a Device .....................................................................................................................................................................54
Find by Tag ...........................................................................................................................................................................54
Re-Scan ..................................................................................................................................................................................54
Advanced Setup with ValVue .....................................................................................................................................................57
Methods to Set Up the SVI II AP...........................................................................................................................................57

3

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Advanced Setup......................................................................................................................................................................... 57
Steps to Set Up SVI II AP................................................................................................................................................ 57
Configuration Parameters .................................................................................................................................................... 58
Calibration Steps ....................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Run Find Stops.................................................................................................................................................................... 58
Manual Find Stops............................................................................................................................................................ 59
Open Stop Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................... 61
Tri-Loop Configuration............................................................................................................................................................ 63
SVI II AP Software Manual ........................................................................................................................................................... 65
ValVue SVI II AP Work Environment ........................................................................................................................................ 67
Overview........................................................................................................................................................................................ 67
Working in ValVue..................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Toolbar ........................................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Tools Menu........................................................................................................................................................................... 68
Help Menu ............................................................................................................................................................................ 68
ValVue Help.................................................................................................................................................................................. 69
Exit.................................................................................................................................................................................................... 70
Change Mode.............................................................................................................................................................................. 70
Failsafe Mode...................................................................................................................................................................... 70
ValVue Screens........................................................................................................................................................................... 71
SVI II AP Monitor Screen ............................................................................................................................................................... 73
What You Can Do on the Monitor Screen...................................................................................................................... 73
Changing the Setpoint ............................................................................................................................................................ 76
Entering Setpoint Value ................................................................................................................................................. 76
Status on the Monitor Screen.............................................................................................................................................. 77
Tag Information ......................................................................................................................................................................... 78
Changing Tag Information on the Monitor Screen ........................................................................................... 78
Send Command ......................................................................................................................................................................... 79
List of Available HART Commands............................................................................................................................ 80
Setup Wizard ............................................................................................................................................................................... 82
Setup Wizard Selections ................................................................................................................................................ 83
Setting the Tag and Descriptor Data....................................................................................................................... 84
Setting the Air Action....................................................................................................................................................... 85
Calibrate Travel.................................................................................................................................................................. 85
Autotune................................................................................................................................................................................ 85
Setup Selections Made ................................................................................................................................................... 86
Progress Dialog.................................................................................................................................................................. 87
Monitor Context Menu ............................................................................................................................................................ 90
Restore SVI Data................................................................................................................................................................ 91
Reports................................................................................................................................................................................... 92
Configure Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................. 99
What You Can Do on the Configure Screen.................................................................................................................. 99
Tag Information .......................................................................................................................................................................100

4

Characterization...................................................................................................................................................................... 102
Custom Characterization............................................................................................................................................ 103
Button Lock................................................................................................................................................................................ 107
Bumpless Transfer.................................................................................................................................................................. 107
Near Closed ............................................................................................................................................................................... 107
Position Limit Stops................................................................................................................................................................ 108
Single/Double Acting............................................................................................................................................................. 108
Air-to-Open / Air-to-Close................................................................................................................................................... 108
Position Fault Limits............................................................................................................................................................... 108
Language.................................................................................................................................................................................... 108
Pressure Units........................................................................................................................................................................... 109
Configure I/O............................................................................................................................................................................. 109
Accessing Configure I/O ..............................................................................................................................................109
Output Switches (DO) .................................................................................................................................................... 110
Digital Input (DI) ............................................................................................................................................................... 111
Input Signal Range (AI) ................................................................................................................................................. 111
Position Retransmit (AO) ..............................................................................................................................................111
Burst Settings............................................................................................................................................................................ 112
Configure Context Menu...................................................................................................................................................... 113
Custom Linearization.................................................................................................................................................... 114
Applying Configuration Changes..................................................................................................................................... 116
Trend Screen ................................................................................................................................................................................... 117
What you can do on the Trend Screen......................................................................................................................... 117
Trend Graph Features........................................................................................................................................................... 118
Trend Context Menu .............................................................................................................................................................. 120
Calibrate Screen ............................................................................................................................................................................ 121
What you can do on the Calibrate Screen................................................................................................................. 121
Signal Calibration Procedure............................................................................................................................................. 122
Low Signal Value Calibration..................................................................................................................................... 122
High signal Value Calibration.................................................................................................................................... 124
Pressure Calibration Procedure ....................................................................................................................................... 125
Advanced Parameters.......................................................................................................................................................... 127
Calibrate Context Menu ....................................................................................................................................................... 129
Reset to Factory Cal ...................................................................................................................................................... 130
Live Tuning......................................................................................................................................................................... 131
Applying Calibration Screen Changes........................................................................................................................... 131
Diagnostics Screen ....................................................................................................................................................................... 133
What you can do on the Diagnostics Screen ............................................................................................................ 133
Tag Information............................................................................................................................................................... 134
Continuous Diagnostics............................................................................................................................................... 134

5

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Diagnostic Tests.......................................................................................................................................................................134
Performing Diagnostic Tests......................................................................................................................................134
Standard Actuator Signature (Std. Actuator Sig.).............................................................................................137
Step Test..............................................................................................................................................................................142
Ramp Test...........................................................................................................................................................................144
Extended Actuator Signature (Extended Act. Sig.)...........................................................................................146
Diagnostics Context Menu..................................................................................................................................................147
Reset Continuous Diagnostics ..................................................................................................................................148
Status Screen ..................................................................................................................................................................................149
What you can do on the SVI II AP Status Screen......................................................................................................149
Clear Current Faults.......................................................................................................................................................150
Clear All Faults..................................................................................................................................................................150
Status Code List ...............................................................................................................................................................150
Status Context Menu.....................................................................................................................................................161
Check Screen- Advanced Troubleshooting .......................................................................................................................163
What you can do on the Check Screen ........................................................................................................................163
Information Displayed ..........................................................................................................................................................164
Check Context Menu..............................................................................................................................................................164
Set I/P............................................................................................................................................................................................165
Changing HART Versions ...........................................................................................................................................................167
Changing SVI II AP to HART 6.............................................................................................................................................167
References ........................................................................................................................................................................................169
Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................169
Supported HART Modems ...................................................................................................................................................169
SVi1000 Software Manual .........................................................................................................................................................185
Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................................187
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................187
Conventions Used in This Manual ...........................................................................................................................187
ValVue Overview......................................................................................................................................................................188
System Requirements ...........................................................................................................................................................188
Hardware............................................................................................................................................................................188
Software..............................................................................................................................................................................188
ValVue SVi1000 Work Environment ......................................................................................................................................189
Overview......................................................................................................................................................................................189
Working in SVi1000 ................................................................................................................................................................190
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................190
Modes of Operation .......................................................................................................................................................190
Change Mode....................................................................................................................................................................190
Exit..........................................................................................................................................................................................190
SVi1000 Help .............................................................................................................................................................................191
Help Menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................191

6

SVi1000 Tabs............................................................................................................................................................................. 192
Monitor Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 192
Trend Tab............................................................................................................................................................................ 193
Configure Tab ................................................................................................................................................................... 194
Status Tab .......................................................................................................................................................................... 196
Check.................................................................................................................................................................................... 197
Monitor ............................................................................................................................................................................................... 199
What You Can Do on the Monitor Tab .......................................................................................................................... 199
Adjust Operations ................................................................................................................................................................... 200
1. Tag Information.......................................................................................................................................................... 200
2. Signal/Position Data................................................................................................................................................. 201
3. Status on the Monitor Tab ..................................................................................................................................... 202
4. Information Pane ....................................................................................................................................................... 204
Monitor Context Menu.......................................................................................................................................................... 205
Reports......................................................................................................................................................................................... 207
How to Create Reports................................................................................................................................................. 207
Creating Report Template Files................................................................................................................................ 207
Report Setup ..................................................................................................................................................................... 211
Generate Report.............................................................................................................................................................. 212
Setup Wizard............................................................................................................................................................................. 213
Setup Wizard Selections..............................................................................................................................................214
Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 225
What you can do on the Trend Tab................................................................................................................................ 225
Trend Graph Features........................................................................................................................................................... 226
Changing the Graph View........................................................................................................................................... 226
Capture to Clipboard..................................................................................................................................................... 226
Trend Context Menu...................................................................................................................................................... 227
Configure .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 229
What You Can Do on the Configure Tab...................................................................................................................... 229
Tag Information ....................................................................................................................................................................... 230
Position Fault Limits............................................................................................................................................................... 231
Characterization...................................................................................................................................................................... 232
Custom Characterization............................................................................................................................................ 233
Custom Linearization.................................................................................................................................................... 234
Air Action.....................................................................................................................................................................................235
Bumpless Transfer.................................................................................................................................................................. 236
Position Limits........................................................................................................................................................................... 236
DO Output Switches............................................................................................................................................................... 237
Configuring Output Switches .................................................................................................................................... 237
Configure Context Menu...................................................................................................................................................... 239
Calibrate ............................................................................................................................................................................................ 241
What you can do on the Calibrate Tab......................................................................................................................... 241
Calibration.................................................................................................................................................................................. 243

7

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

PID and Advanced Parameters ........................................................................................................................................244
Advanced Parameters..................................................................................................................................................245
Open Stop Adjustment..........................................................................................................................................................246
Calibrate Context Menu .......................................................................................................................................................247
Run Find Stops..................................................................................................................................................................248
Manual Find Stops..........................................................................................................................................................250
Auto Tune............................................................................................................................................................................251
Status ..................................................................................................................................................................................................253
What you can do on the Status Tab...............................................................................................................................253
Active Faults ..............................................................................................................................................................................254
General.........................................................................................................................................................................................255
Instrumentation .......................................................................................................................................................................256
Actuator.......................................................................................................................................................................................257
Pneumatics ................................................................................................................................................................................258
Critical...........................................................................................................................................................................................259
Electronics ..................................................................................................................................................................................260
Clear Current Faults ...............................................................................................................................................................261
Clear All Faults ..........................................................................................................................................................................262
Fault Matrix ................................................................................................................................................................................263
Status Context Menu .............................................................................................................................................................272
Check ..................................................................................................................................................................................................273
What you can do on the Check Tab ...............................................................................................................................273
Information Displayed on the Check Tab ....................................................................................................................274
Check Context Menu..............................................................................................................................................................275
Optional Switch Load Limits .....................................................................................................................................................277
Output Switches.......................................................................................................................................................................277
Introduction .......................................................................................................................................................................277
Checking Switch Operation ................................................................................................................................................279
ValVue Commands.........................................................................................................................................................279
ValVue 12400 Software ..............................................................................................................................................................281
ValVue 12400 Work Environment .........................................................................................................................................283
What is ValVue 12400?.........................................................................................................................................................283
Welcome to ValVue 12400 .........................................................................................................................................283
ValVue 12400's Work Environment ........................................................................................................................284
Working in ValVue 12400............................................................................................................................................285
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................285
Tools Menu.........................................................................................................................................................................286
Modes of Operation .......................................................................................................................................................287
Change Mode....................................................................................................................................................................288
Exit..........................................................................................................................................................................................291
Help .......................................................................................................................................................................................291

8

ValVue 12400 Help................................................................................................................................................................. 291
Types of Help Available................................................................................................................................................ 291
Toolbar Help...................................................................................................................................................................... 291
Context Sensitive Help ................................................................................................................................................. 292
ValVue 12400 Screens.......................................................................................................................................................... 292
12400 Monitor.................................................................................................................................................................. 292
Trend.....................................................................................................................................................................................293
Basic Setup ........................................................................................................................................................................ 295
Advanced Setup .............................................................................................................................................................. 296
Transmitter Diagnostics ..............................................................................................................................................297
Status ................................................................................................................................................................................... 298
Check.................................................................................................................................................................................... 299
Controller Monitor .......................................................................................................................................................... 300
What you can do on the 12400 Controller Setup Screen ............................................................................ 301
Controller Monitor ......................................................................................................................................................................... 303
What you can do with the 12400 Controller Monitor Screen ............................................................................ 303
Tag ................................................................................................................................................................................................. 304
Controller Monitor Controller Bargraphs ..................................................................................................................... 304
Controller Output ............................................................................................................................................................ 305
Level Measurement ....................................................................................................................................................... 306
Send Command....................................................................................................................................................................... 307
PID Controller Mode............................................................................................................................................................... 309
12400 Monitor Context Menu ........................................................................................................................................... 310
12400 Monitor Context Menu ................................................................................................................................... 310
Reset .....................................................................................................................................................................................311
Restore 12400 Data....................................................................................................................................................... 312
Save 12400 Data ............................................................................................................................................................ 313
Reports ................................................................................................................................................................................ 314
12400 Monitor ................................................................................................................................................................................ 323
What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen ...................................................................................................... 323
Level Indicator .......................................................................................................................................................................... 324
Status on the 12400 Monitor Screen ............................................................................................................................. 324
Changing Tag and Descriptor Information on the 12400 Monitor Screen .................................................. 325
Changing Message on 12400 Monitor Screen.......................................................................................................... 328
Send Command....................................................................................................................................................................... 330
Send Command............................................................................................................................................................... 330
Command Selection ...................................................................................................................................................... 332
Command Result Display............................................................................................................................................ 334
Update Configured Data ..................................................................................................................................................... 334
Controller Setup ............................................................................................................................................................................. 335
What you can do on the 12400 Controller Setup Screen .................................................................................... 335
PID Controller Alarms............................................................................................................................................................ 336
PID Parameters Settings...................................................................................................................................................... 337
PID Controller Configuration..............................................................................................................................................338
PID Controller Setpoint Range ..........................................................................................................................................339

9

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend ...................................................................................................................................................................................................341
What you can do on the Trend Screen .........................................................................................................................341
Trend Screen with Controller Activation ..............................................................................................................342
Graph Display............................................................................................................................................................................344
Changing the Graph View ...................................................................................................................................................345
Trend Context Menu ..............................................................................................................................................................346
Detach Trend.............................................................................................................................................................................347
Capture to Clipboard .............................................................................................................................................................347
Basic Setup .......................................................................................................................................................................................349
What you can do on the Basic Setup Screen.............................................................................................................349
Apply .....................................................................................................................................................................................350
Exiting in Setup Mode....................................................................................................................................................350
Changing Tag Information on the Basic Setup Screen .........................................................................................351
Transmitter.................................................................................................................................................................................353
Transmitter Mode ...........................................................................................................................................................353
Transmitter Mounting ...................................................................................................................................................354
Transmitter Action..........................................................................................................................................................355
Display Language ...........................................................................................................................................................356
Level Transmitter.....................................................................................................................................................................357
Level Transmitter ............................................................................................................................................................357
Record SG ...........................................................................................................................................................................357
Zero........................................................................................................................................................................................358
Span ......................................................................................................................................................................................359
Applying Basic Setup Changes .........................................................................................................................................361
Basic Setup Context Menu..................................................................................................................................................362
SG Service ...................................................................................................................................................................................363
Signal Range..............................................................................................................................................................................365
Advanced Setup .............................................................................................................................................................................367
What you can do on the Advanced Setup Screen...................................................................................................367
Local User Interface...............................................................................................................................................................368
Changing Configuration ..............................................................................................................................................369
SG Meter Calibration..............................................................................................................................................................370
SG Meter Calibration Zero...........................................................................................................................................370
Span ......................................................................................................................................................................................371
Reset to Factory...............................................................................................................................................................372
Set SIL2 Settings ......................................................................................................................................................................373
Alarm.............................................................................................................................................................................................374
Alarm Hysteresis .............................................................................................................................................................375
Range............................................................................................................................................................................................376
Change Level LRV or URV Setting............................................................................................................................376
Changing Level Units ....................................................................................................................................................377
Zero Shift.............................................................................................................................................................................378
Reduced Span ..................................................................................................................................................................378

10

DO Switches .............................................................................................................................................................................. 379
DO Switches ...................................................................................................................................................................... 379
Configuring DO Switches ............................................................................................................................................ 380
Database.....................................................................................................................................................................................382
Database ............................................................................................................................................................................ 382
Displacer ............................................................................................................................................................................. 382
Displacer Type.................................................................................................................................................................. 386
Torque Tube and Chamber ........................................................................................................................................ 387
Chamber Options............................................................................................................................................................ 392
Options ................................................................................................................................................................................ 393
Applying Database Changes..................................................................................................................................... 394
Filters and Tuning ................................................................................................................................................................... 395
Filters and Tuning ........................................................................................................................................................... 395
Smart Filter Enable......................................................................................................................................................... 396
Filter Parameters ............................................................................................................................................................ 397
Autotune ............................................................................................................................................................................. 400
Damping ............................................................................................................................................................................. 401
Applying Filters and Tuning Changes.................................................................................................................... 401
Calibration Filter .............................................................................................................................................................. 401
Calibration Tools...................................................................................................................................................................... 403
Calibration Tools ............................................................................................................................................................. 403
Signal Selection ............................................................................................................................................................... 404
4 - 20 mA Calibration .................................................................................................................................................... 405
Coupling .............................................................................................................................................................................. 410
Calibration Reset............................................................................................................................................................. 411
Advanced Setup Context Menu........................................................................................................................................ 415
Applying Advanced Setup Changes...............................................................................................................................416
Transmitter Diagnostics ............................................................................................................................................................. 417
What you can do on the Transmitter Diagnostics Screen................................................................................... 417
Continuous Diagnostic Data..............................................................................................................................................418
Reset Data.......................................................................................................................................................................... 418
Detail.....................................................................................................................................................................................419
Service Time .............................................................................................................................................................................. 420
Reset .....................................................................................................................................................................................420
Set Interval......................................................................................................................................................................... 421
AO1/AO0/Signal Trim in Raw Count...............................................................................................................................422
Calibration Raw Range......................................................................................................................................................... 423
Specific Gravity Meter........................................................................................................................................................... 424
Transmitter Diagnostics Context Menu........................................................................................................................ 426
Status .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 427
What you can do on the Status Screen........................................................................................................................ 427
Active Faults .............................................................................................................................................................................. 428
Log Only....................................................................................................................................................................................... 429
Annunciate.................................................................................................................................................................................430
User Faults 2.............................................................................................................................................................................. 431

11

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Failsafe .........................................................................................................................................................................................432
User Faults 1..............................................................................................................................................................................433
Clearing Faults..........................................................................................................................................................................434
Clearing Individual Fault..............................................................................................................................................434
Clear Current Faults.......................................................................................................................................................436
Clear All Faults..................................................................................................................................................................437
Set Fail High/Fail Low............................................................................................................................................................438
Status Context Menu .............................................................................................................................................................440
Check ..................................................................................................................................................................................................441
What you can do on the Check Screen ........................................................................................................................441
Check Context Menu..............................................................................................................................................................442
ValVue VECTOR Software ..........................................................................................................................................................443
Introduction .....................................................................................................................................................................................445
Introduction ...............................................................................................................................................................................445
ValVue VECTOR Software ....................................................................................................................................................446
About This Manual ..................................................................................................................................................................446
Conventions Used in This Manual ...........................................................................................................................446
Installation ........................................................................................................................................................................................447
Installation..................................................................................................................................................................................447
Requirements....................................................................................................................................................................447
HART Related Issues ......................................................................................................................................................447
ValVue VECTOR Operational Overview ...............................................................................................................................449
Operational Overview ...........................................................................................................................................................449
Overview Tab Tools Menu and Context Menu...................................................................................................451
Working in ValVue VECTOR.................................................................................................................................................456
Toolbar .................................................................................................................................................................................456
Modes of Operation .......................................................................................................................................................456
Exit..........................................................................................................................................................................................456
ValVue VECTOR Help..............................................................................................................................................................456
Help Menu ..........................................................................................................................................................................456
ValVue VECTOR Tabs .............................................................................................................................................................457
Overview Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................457
Trend Tab............................................................................................................................................................................458
Configure Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................459
Status Tab...........................................................................................................................................................................461
Communication Tab ......................................................................................................................................................462
Alerts Tab............................................................................................................................................................................463
Battery Tab.........................................................................................................................................................................464
Setup Wizard ...................................................................................................................................................................................465
Setup Wizard Screen .............................................................................................................................................................465
Run Setup Wizard ...........................................................................................................................................................467
Scan for Devices..............................................................................................................................................................468

12

Trend ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 469
Trend Tab.................................................................................................................................................................................... 469
Trend Graph Features........................................................................................................................................................... 470
Changing the Graph View........................................................................................................................................... 470
Capture to Clipboard..................................................................................................................................................... 470
Trend Right Click and Context Menu.............................................................................................................................. 471
Configure .......................................................................................................................................................................................... 473
Configure Screen: Overview............................................................................................................................................... 473
Configure Power Tab............................................................................................................................................................. 474
Configure Wireless Tab ........................................................................................................................................................ 477
Configure Wired Tab.............................................................................................................................................................. 479
Configure 4-20 mA Tab........................................................................................................................................................ 481
Create a PV Linearization Table...............................................................................................................................483
Configure Burst Settings Tab............................................................................................................................................. 484
Configure Auto Burst..................................................................................................................................................... 489
Configure Manual Burst............................................................................................................................................... 489
Configure Event Notification Tab..................................................................................................................................... 490
Configure Adapter Info Tab................................................................................................................................................ 495
Configure Time Screen ......................................................................................................................................................... 498
Configure Tab Tools and Context Menu....................................................................................................................... 499
Maintenance ................................................................................................................................................................................... 501
Maintenance Tab .................................................................................................................................................................... 501
Maintenance Tab Tools and Context Menu................................................................................................................ 502
Status .................................................................................................................................................................................................. 505
Status Screen: General ......................................................................................................................................................... 505
Active Faults...................................................................................................................................................................... 506
Device_Status................................................................................................................................................................... 507
IO_and_Subdevice_Status ......................................................................................................................................... 508
Ext_Device_Status.......................................................................................................................................................... 509
WirelessHART_Status.................................................................................................................................................... 510
Device_Diagnostic_Status_0 .................................................................................................................................... 511
Device_Specific_Status_0 ..........................................................................................................................................512
Device_Specific_Status_1 ..........................................................................................................................................513
Communication ............................................................................................................................................................................. 515
Communication Tab .............................................................................................................................................................. 515
Communication Tab Tools and Context Menu.......................................................................................................... 518
Alerts ................................................................................................................................................................................................... 519
Alerts Tab.................................................................................................................................................................................... 519
Alerts Tab Tools and Context Menu................................................................................................................................ 520
Battery ................................................................................................................................................................................................ 521
Battery Info Screen ................................................................................................................................................................ 521
Battery Tab Tools and Context Menu ............................................................................................................................ 523

13

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

ValVue HDLT Software ................................................................................................................................................................525
Monitor Tab................................................................................................................................................................................527
Tag Information ...............................................................................................................................................................527
Status....................................................................................................................................................................................528
Change Mode....................................................................................................................................................................532
Report...................................................................................................................................................................................533
Menu - Monitor.................................................................................................................................................................534
Trend Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................................535
Trend Graph.......................................................................................................................................................................535
Menu - Trend.....................................................................................................................................................................536
Configuration Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................536
Menu - Configure ............................................................................................................................................................539
Calibration Tab .........................................................................................................................................................................540
Level Transmitter Calibration ....................................................................................................................................541
Interface Transmitter Calibration............................................................................................................................541
Specific Gravity Meter Calibration...........................................................................................................................541
Menu - Calibrate..............................................................................................................................................................541
Calibration Parameters Tab ...............................................................................................................................................542
Menu - Calibrate..............................................................................................................................................................543
Calibration Tools Tab.............................................................................................................................................................544
4-20 mA Calibration .....................................................................................................................................................544
Coupling ..............................................................................................................................................................................545
Menu - Calibrate..............................................................................................................................................................545
Controller Parameters Tab..................................................................................................................................................546
Menu - Controller ............................................................................................................................................................548
Controller Tab ...........................................................................................................................................................................549
Menu - Controller ............................................................................................................................................................550
Configuration DataBase Tab .............................................................................................................................................551
Menu - Configure ............................................................................................................................................................552
Transmitter Diagnostics Tab..............................................................................................................................................553
Smart Filtering Coefficients........................................................................................................................................553
Menu - Diagnostics ........................................................................................................................................................554
Menu Bar and Footer Buttons...........................................................................................................................................555
ValVue SVI Software ....................................................................................................................................................................557
Monitor Tab................................................................................................................................................................................559
Mode .....................................................................................................................................................................................563
Command Result Display............................................................................................................................................564
Read Status........................................................................................................................................................................567
Menu - Monitor.................................................................................................................................................................567
Trend Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................................568
Menu- Trend......................................................................................................................................................................570
Configure Tab............................................................................................................................................................................571
Custom Characterization ............................................................................................................................................575
Custom Linearization ....................................................................................................................................................576
Menu -Configure .............................................................................................................................................................577

14

Controller Configure Tab ..................................................................................................................................................... 578
Menu -Controller Configuration...............................................................................................................................580
Calibrate Tab............................................................................................................................................................................. 581
Calibration Value............................................................................................................................................................. 583
Calibration Value- 2nd input Signal ....................................................................................................................... 583
Calibration Value- Pressure ....................................................................................................................................... 584
Open Stop Adjustment ................................................................................................................................................. 584
Pressure Calibration Procedure ...............................................................................................................................584
Signal Calibration Procedure..................................................................................................................................... 585
Auxiliary Signal Calibration Procedure ................................................................................................................. 586
Find Stops........................................................................................................................................................................... 586
Manual Find Stops.......................................................................................................................................................... 588
Menu - Calibrate.............................................................................................................................................................. 588
Diagnostics Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 589
Diagnostic Reports......................................................................................................................................................... 595
Menu - Diagnostics........................................................................................................................................................ 600
Status Tab................................................................................................................................................................................... 601
Menu -Status Tab ........................................................................................................................................................... 603
Check Tab ................................................................................................................................................................................... 604
Set I/P ................................................................................................................................................................................... 605
Menu-Check ...................................................................................................................................................................... 605
Controller Tab ........................................................................................................................................................................... 606
Menu - Controller............................................................................................................................................................ 608
Controller Settings Tab......................................................................................................................................................... 609
Menu Bar and Footer Buttons........................................................................................................................................... 612
ValVue SVI Software .................................................................................................................................................................... 613
Monitor Tab................................................................................................................................................................................ 615
Mode.....................................................................................................................................................................................618
Command Result Display............................................................................................................................................ 619
Setup Wizard..................................................................................................................................................................... 620
Read Status ....................................................................................................................................................................... 623
Menu - Monitor ................................................................................................................................................................ 623
Trend Tab.................................................................................................................................................................................... 624
Menu - Trend..................................................................................................................................................................... 626
Configure Tab ........................................................................................................................................................................... 626
Custom Characterization............................................................................................................................................ 630
Custom Linearization.................................................................................................................................................... 632
Menu - Configure ............................................................................................................................................................ 633
Calibrate Tab............................................................................................................................................................................. 634
Menu - Calibrate.............................................................................................................................................................. 638
Diagnostics Tab ....................................................................................................................................................................... 639
Diagnostic Reports......................................................................................................................................................... 646
Menu - Diagnostics........................................................................................................................................................ 651
Status Tab................................................................................................................................................................................... 652
Menu - Status ................................................................................................................................................................... 653

15

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Check Tab ...................................................................................................................................................................................654
Menu - Check ....................................................................................................................................................................656
Menu Bar and Footer Buttons...........................................................................................................................................657

16

1

Introduction

The ValVue software package provides a powerful interface to Masoneilan Smart Valve
Interfaces, the 12400 Digital Level Transmitter (HDLT), and other HART instruments. This manual
describes the functionality of ValVue software and contains information needed to install and
use ValVue with the SVI II AP, SVi1000, DLT 12400 positioners and the VECTOR WirelessHART
adapter.

ValVue Lite and ValVue Trial
ValVue has a 60-day free trial period before a license is required. After the 60-day trial period,
ValVue will not execute. The trial period allows you to evaluate advanced functions such as:
Diagnostic Procedures
Report Generation
Password Administration
ValVue Lite is offered without registration. It provides sufficient functions to fully commission,
configure, and start up a positioner on a control valve.

Stand-Alone or Integrated ValVue
ValVue can be accessed as a standalone application or it can be accessed as a SNAP-ON to the
Emerson Process Management AMS, or a Plug In Application to Yokogawa system. Procedures
for finding and selecting devices are different in the two contexts. ValVue standalone offers
login, user administration, and device selection. For AMS SNAP-ON users, the AMS login, user
administration, and device selection, methods are used. The SNAP-ON application requires a
license. Contact the factory for licensing information.

17

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

ValVue Tasks
The SVI II AP and SVi1000 can be configured, calibrated, and operated locally or remotely
using ValVue software on a Windows based computer with a HART modem. Normal control
signaling is with 4 to 20 mA DC current (ANSI/ISA-50.1-1982 - (R1992)). For more information
on the individual devices, refer to SVI II AP Instruction Manual (GEA19681) or the SVi1000
Instruction Manual (GEA19363), Model V1100 Wireless Adapter Instruction Manual (GEA19362)
or 12400 Series Level Transmitter Instruction Manual an Safety Guide (GEA19367).
By using ValVue software it is possible to monitor, configure, calibrate, control and perform
valve diagnostics, remotely. ValVue can also provide a basic interface to other HART
instruments.

About this Manual
This manual is intended to assist you in easily installing, administrating, and using ValVue to
set up, configure, calibrate, monitor operation, and troubleshoot the ValVue family of
positioners. This manual contains subsections for each device.

18

ValVue Software Installation and
Administration

2

Requirements
Using the ValVue installation procedures detailed in this chapter requires basic knowledge of
Microsoft Windows operating systems and Masoneilan positioners.
NOTE

For installation and administration of AMS, see instructions provided with
AMS.

Hardware and Software Requirements
ValVue is distributed on a CD-ROM and runs on a standard IBM-compatible computer. To
successfully install and run ValVue, your computer system must meet or exceed the following
minimum hardware and software requirements.
Windows XP SP2, Window Server 2003 SP1 or Window Server 2003 R2, Windows Server
2008, or Windows 7
Windows Pentium or compatible microprocessor; 64 Mb RAM
CD-ROM or DVD-ROM drive
An available serial communication port or USB port
A HART modem
RS232/485 converter for HART Multiplexor
500 MB of free hard disk space to install and run ValVue

Before Installing ValVue
Before installing ValVue, determine which port the computer uses for serial (RS-232 or USB)
communication. The HART modem and RS232/485 or USB converter for ValVue multiplexor
configuration both use this port for communication with the positioner.

19

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

HART Compliance
The positioner requires a HART compliant communications loop. The HART protocol specifies
the noise level, impedance requirements, and configuration of the loop. Conventional
communications loops consisting of the following components meet requirements for HART
compliance.
Quality current source having low noise and high impedance
Minimum loop impedance of 250 Ohms
Twisted pair cable suitable for 4 - 20 mA current loops
When a safe barrier separates the communicating devices, a HART compliant barrier must be
used.
NOTE

You cannot connect or use ValVue and another HART master
terminal device (at the same time), for example a handheld device.

CAUTION

Some Distributed Control System output circuits are incompatible
with the HART protocol. Connecting a HART modem to such a
circuit can cause a process upset. A HART filter can be used.
Consult the DCS manufacturer to verity that the DCS is compatible
with HART, before connecting a HART modem and using ValVue.

Failure to Communicate
If the PC (using a modem) fails to communicate with the HART positioner the message No
Devices Found appears in the Connected Devices page. The message HART I/O Failed appears
if the device communications fails during the session. Communication failure prevents the PC
from establishing a link. Possible causes of communications failure related to installation
include:
Insufficient Loop Current and Voltage
Poor wiring contacts
Improper connection of the HART modem to the computer
Incorrect serial port
Using ValVue with another HART master terminal in service
Insufficient loop impedance (a minimum of 250 Ohms is required
Field device has a non-zero polling address (Set ValVue to multidrop)
If HART compliance problems are suspected prepare a detailed description of the loop,
including all devices on the loop, type of wiring used, loop length, and presence of any possible
interference sources before contacting the factory for assistance.

20

ValVue Software Installation and

Installing ValVue

Installing ValVue
Use this procedure to install ValVue software. If the ValVue installer finds a previously
installed version of ValVue, it uninstalls the old version. A dialog box asks your permission to
uninstall. Run the installer again to install the new version.
1. Insert the ValVue installation CD into your CD-ROM drive.
2. Select Start->Run from the taskbar.
Select Enter or OK.
Follow the prompts on your screen to complete the installation process.

Figure 1

ValVue Installation Wizard

21

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 2

Figure 3

License Agreement

ValVue Default Destination Location

22

ValVue Software Installation and

Installing ValVue

Figure 4

Figure 5

Install ValVue

Finish Installation

23

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Administration
An administrative program, ValVue 2 Administration, is installed along with ValVue. After
successful installation, the ValVue system administrator should change the default login and
password using the administrative program. There are two default login names installed and
they are both case sensitive (Table 1).
Table 1

Default Login Names and Passwords

Login Name

Password

Permission Level

admin

(No password needed)

9

masoneilan

new

8 (Used only for training)

Store the ValVue setup CD-ROM in a secure location to provide system security.

ValVue System Administration, Passwords, and Privilege Levels
In a system having many users with various levels of training and responsibility it is
recommended to restrict certain user’s access to a limited range of functions. Starting the
ValVue program requires a valid account with a user name and a password for each user. The
privilege level associated with a ValVue account determines which functions of the program
the user is allowed to access.
The ValVue Administration program, ValVue2Admin.exe, allows the administrator to perform
all user account administrative functions, run ValVue and control access to the functionality of
HART positioner. AMS handles security with passwords differently from ValVue. See the AMS
documentation.
The administrative functions include:
Adding new user accounts
Deleting existing user accounts
Changing existing user accounts
Adjusting privilege levels

24

ValVue Software Installation and

Starting Administration Program

Starting Administration Program
To start the ValVue Administration program:
1. Select Start > All Programs > Dresser > ValVue > ValVue Tools > ValVue
Administration and Figure 6 appears.

Figure 6
NOTE

ValVue Administration Program Startup
System administration, users, and licensing for the AMS
SNAP-ON differ from similar functions in ValVue. See the AMS
instruction manual.

2. Select ValVue and click OK and Figure 7 appears.

Figure 7

ValVue Administration Login

3. Enter admin as User Name. The system is case sensitive; you must enter the default
names in lower case. Leave Password blank for the first time.

25

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

4. Select Login to start an Administration window (Figure 9).

Figure 8 ValVue Administration Screen
CAUTION

Use permission level 8 for training only. Level 8 allows the
positioner to be disconnected from the process control system.
The administration program, when first installed, contains two
accounts. One account is the administrator account that you are
using. The other account has User Name of masoneilan in lower
case and password of new also in lower case. The masoneilan
account is assigned privilege level 8 that allows use of the process
control simulator for training purposes. The process control
simulator duplicates, in software, a process with a dead time of
one second and a lag of five seconds. Never assign permission
level 8 to basic users.

CAUTION

The administrator should change the login names and passwords.
Continued use of the login account names and passwords renders
the system insecure.

ValVue Lite does not require the administration program, and does not require passwords. If
restricted access is required, distribution of the ValVue Lite program software must be limited.

26

ValVue Software Installation and

Add Users

Add Users
To add users:
If you need to discard your changes click the Revert button.

NOTE

1. Enter the User Name.
2. Enter a password in the Password field and re-enter the password in the Password
Again field.
3. Assign a privilege level (refer to “Privilege Level” on page 29).
4. Select Add

Figure 9 Adding a ValVue User
5. Enter additional users.
6. Select Save and select Exit (Figure 10).

27

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 10

Saving New User

Editing User Accounts
To edit a user account:
1. Select the account you need to edit.
2. Delete the selected account.
3. Create an account with the changes.

Deleting a User Account
To delete a user’s account:
1. Select the user account in the list box.
2. Select the Delete button.
3. Select Save to apply your changes.
4. Select Exit.

28

ValVue Software Installation and

Privilege Level

Privilege Level
Each user is assigned an account with an associated privilege level associated. You provide
ValVue users an appropriate privilege level so you can keep field devices secure from the
actions of unknowledgeable or unauthorized users.
Privilege level ranges from 0 (lowest) to 9 (highest). Table 2 defines several privilege levels
that control access to specific functions of the ValVue program.
It is recommended that the administrator be assigned a second login name and password
with lower privilege, such as level 4, for routine use.
Privilege Level Details
Table 2

ValVue Privilege Levels

Security Level

Description

Level 0

Allows you to login to ValVue only if the connected positioner is in normal operating
mode. You can send commands that replies with configuration, calibration, and
status information, but you cannot change any information. Level 0 users cannot
go to manual mode.

Level 1

Allows you access to either normal operating mode or manual mode. You can
transfer from one to another mode (i.e. you can take the positioner out of normal
mode and put it in manual mode). However, you cannot change the calibration or
configuration.

Level 3

Allows you to change the configuration or calibration values, but does not allow
you to perform operations that stroke the valve (Find Stops and diagnostics).

Level 4

Allows you to perform all operations except Save Factory standard valve signature
and Restore SVI Memory.

Level 8

This level is intended for training and should be used cautiously. It grants all of the
privileges of level 4 plus allows access to the simulation mode of the optional process controller. The process controller is an available option. The simulation mode
of the controller allows you to run the process controller without connecting a process variable input to the positioner and is useful for learning how to operate the
process controller. Never assign level 8 to ordinary users!

Level 9

Allows access to all positioner functions. In addition, it is the only level allowed to
login to the administration program. The administrator has an account of privilege
level 9. There must be at least one user of privilege level 9.

29

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Starting ValVue
The ValVue program provides a Windows based interface that can operate, configure,
calibrate, and diagnose positioners and controllers. ValVue can also communicate with other
HART devices at a basic level (using HART Universal Commands) as well. To communicate with
a positioner, you need to connect the device to the computer RS-232 serial port through a
HART modem, or through an MTL multiplexor and an RS232-485 converter. When there is no
connected HART device, ValVue allows you to run offline with a simulated positioner.
ValVue provides an on-line help utility that provides information on how to use functions of
the positioner with ValVue. To access the help utility, select the appropriate Help from the Help
menu in various ValVue screens. After completing the hardware connections, communication
with a positioner can begin.
Always return control of the device to the control system before ending a ValVue
communications session. If communications to the positioner are interrupted by a computer
system failure, if Windows stops responding, always reboot the computer and return control
to the control system before ending the ValVue communication session
To start ValVue
Double-click on the ValVue icon.
or
Select Start > Programs > Dresser > ValVue > ValVue.

Registering ValVue
When you start ValVue for the first time the registration window launches. ValVue software
must be registered to activate the permanent installation. ValVue can be used without
registration for 60 days. Registration allows the factory to keep track of all of ValVue users so
that we can notify you of any changes or important information about new software features
and updates. A registration card is included with the installation CD.
The software package contains a serial number. Keep a record of the serial number in a secure
location. Do not discard the registration card. To register your software, you must launch
ValVue to obtain an installation ID number, then contact the factory by mail, telephone, email
or Fax, and provide your name, company’s name, contact information, the CD-ROM serial
number, and the installation ID number from the ValVue login display. Contact information is
provided on the registration card that is part of the software package.
Your serial number is located on the ValVue package and on the enclosed sticker. Place the
serial number sticker on the detachable card included with the Registration Instruction card
and store the card in a secure location. You need the serial number to move ValVue to a
different computer.

30

ValVue Software Installation and

Registering ValVue

Masoneilan Software Registration Center provides you with software keys that you enter the
next time you run the program. Contact Software Registration Center for a new software key
if you are moving ValVue to a different computer or, if you do not have a serial number.
To register ValVue:
1. Start ValVue either by clicking on the desktop icon or using the Start programs selection.
2. When you start ValVue Figure 11 appears.

Figure 11

ValVue Owner and Product Key Registration Window

3. Enter Name, Company and Serial Number and click OK.

31

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 12

Applying Owner and Product Key Information

The software key registration window appears (Figure 13).
4. If you need a software key for the Mux option, click the box next to Mux.

Figure 13

Software and Mux Key Window

32

ValVue Software Installation and

Registering ValVue

5. After selecting optional features, click Registration and Figure 14 appears.

Figure 14 Registration Window
6. Enter your name and the name of your company. You are now ready to make contact
with this information, to obtain your software keys.
There are four methods shown on the Registration Instruction Card:
Mail
Phone
Fax
Email
7. Click Save to File in Figure 14 to save your registration file and Figure 15 appears. Save
the registration information in a text file.

33

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 15

Save Registration Information

Figure 16 appears.

Figure 16 Registration File Saved Dialog
8. To email the registration information click Yes.
9. When you select email registration info, ValVue launches your email service and
automatically attaches the registration and Masoneilan Software Registration Center
(Figure 17). Click Send to email the registration.
If your email program fails to start, contact the software registration center by the email
address, phone number, address, or fax number given on the registration card (contained
with the ValVue CD).

34

ValVue Software Installation and

Registering ValVue

Figure 17 Emailing Registration Info
A dialog indicating the email has been sent appears.

Figure 18

Registration Email Sent Dialog

10. Click OK to close the dialog.
Entering Software Keys
After you have sent the registration info, you are provided you with software keys for ValVue
and optional features (when applicable).
Once you have your key, enable the program by:
1. Start ValVue.
2. Choose View Registration from the Help menu.

35

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

3. Enter the Serial Number (if not already entered) and click OK. On the 2nd registration
screen, enter the software key returned to you.

Figure 19

Entering Software Key

4. If you have the Mux option and need to enter the software key, click on the screen, under
the Unlock Keys field and the field becomes active. Enter the Mux software key.

Figure 20

Entering Mux Unlock Key

36

ValVue Software Installation and

Using Unregistered Software
5. Click OK and Figure 21 appears.

Figure 21

Successful Registration Message

Using Unregistered Software
You can use ValVue full version, without a software key, for 60 days after initial installation.

Starting Unregistered Software
To start the unregistered version of ValVue:
Double click on the ValVue icon.
or
1. Select Start >Programs->Dresser > ValVue > ValVue.
A dialog indicating the number of days remaining in the trial period appears, and then
the registration window appears.
2. Click OK.

Offline Mode
There is an offline mode available in ValVue to work with a disconnected HART device.
The Offline options serve two purposes:
Viewing configuration, calibration and diagnostic data, for a positioner using a dump
file (.dp1 or .dp2)
Learn the features and functions of a positioner and ValVue
When a positioner is started in the Offline mode you are prompted to select a dump file with
a dp1 (or .dp2) extension that contains configuration and calibration data used for running
the device.

37

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Offline Operation
To run ValVue in offline mode:
1. Click a Tag in the Connected Devices screen and click the Select button (or double click the
selected line). The HDLT Level transmitter offline file is also included. See the HDLT
instruction manual.
A File Open window appears to select a dump file as a simulated device. The dump files
are installed with ValVue in the same location as the program files (Figure 22).
2. Select the sub-folder for the selected device type, then select Data and then choose a file.
There is a default demo file that can be used for demonstration purposes. There can also
be files of actual devices in your plant that been saved in the default folder.

Figure 22

Open Offline File

3. Click Open.
If you select a file for a device that is incompatible with the selected device, Figure 23 appears.

Figure 23

Incompatible Device/Data Warning

Go back and check that the subdirectory for the specific device type has been used.

38

ValVue Software Installation and

Offline Operation

Selecting OK reopens the Open File dialog. Selecting the matching file type opens up Monitor
page. SVI II AP Offline appears in the top left corner, indicating the file that ValVue is using a
dump file to simulate operations.
Offline Mode

Figure 24

Offline Monitor Page

39

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

3

ValVue Setup

Overview
This section provides information on setting up ValVue. There are several features that you can
set up in ValVue before executing operation:
“Configure the Set Options” on page 41
“Configure Multiplexor Setup and Operation” on page 45
“Configuring Burst Mode” on page 51

Configure the Set Options
When login is complete, the Connected Devices page appears. To configure ValVue for your
system:
1. Right-click on the Connected Devices page, in the gray area (Figure 25).

Figure 25

Selecting Set Options
41

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

2. Select Set Options to open the Options dialog (Figure 26).

Figure 26 ValVue Options Dialog
3. Configure as required and click OK.
Figure 27 shows the dialog when PF-WHA-GW for a wireless gateway is selected. In this case
you need to configure the IP Address and Port.

42

ValVue Setup

Configure the Set Options

Figure 27

ValVue Options for Wireless

Buttons and Fields
Com Port

Select the COM Port on your PC that is connected to the HART
modem. If you’re not sure which COM port the modem is connected to, access Windows’ Device Manager to validate the com
port number assigned to the PC.

Hart Polling Option

When more than one device is connected on a loop or if polling
addresses other than 0 have been assigned to devices, use these
fields. ValVue supports HART devices with non-zero polling
addresses and supports multiple positioners on the same loop (for
split ranging, for example). If neither box is checked, ValVue looks
for devices only at polling address 0. Click either:
From and choose an address range from 0 to 63. Choosing
a range limits scan time.
Specific and enter an address or addresses, where you
enter one or multiple addresses separated by commas. This
also limits scan time.

43

GE Oil & Gas
Master Mode

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
ValVue communicates with a HART device as a primary master or as
a secondary master. HART is a Master-Slave communication protocol, where the slave (field device) replies to commands sent by the
master. The HART protocol lets a device communicate simultaneously with two masters, as long as they are different Masters: one
being a Primary Master and the other being a Secondary Master. A
Primary Master is defined as a host (or system interface) that is connected permanently with a slave, such as a control system. A Secondary Master is a host (or interface) connected temporarily to the
slave (a handheld or laptop computer) and that is not part of the
control system.
When used with a multiplexor, operation is allowed when a second
HART master, such as a DCS system, is communicating. The ValVue
program must be configured to match the configuration of the multiplexor. If the multiplexor is a primary master, ValVue must also be
configured to be a primary master.
See “Configure Multiplexor Setup and Operation” on page 45.

Use HART server

Check to use a HART server.

Using a Device List File

When you select the Load Device Addresses from File option, each
time you connect a device to ValVue the address for the scanned
device is saved to a device list file. The device list file eliminates rescanning each time Connect is selected and is useful in a multiplexor
setup.
Unless Load Devices Addresses from File is selected as an option,
the device addresses used are temporary and ValVue rescans for the
device’s address for each program start. If selected, you designate
the file where the device list is saved. This device list file is read and
appears when the program starts. To change the device list file or
create a new one:
1. Click Load Devices Addresses from File, click New File and
Figure 28 appears.

Figure 28

Device List Save As Window

44

ValVue Setup

Configure Multiplexor Setup and

2. Navigate to the required directory to either locate the old device
list file, or to create a new one.
Use Multiplexor

Use this option to set ValVue for multiplexor operation. When
checked then the MUX Setup, and MUX Reset controls appear on
the Connected Devices page context (right click) menu.
This checkbox also activates the multiplexor pulldown list, Baud
Rate and Nodes Search. Multiplexor choices include:
MTL-AMS
MTL-Cornerstone
PF-2700F
PF-2700G
SoftMux
PF-WHA-GW

CAUTION

Do not check Use Multiplexor unless ValVue is connected to
Multiplexor hardware.

Baud Rate

Set a baud rate that is equal to the baud rate set on the multiplexor
hardware. The MTL multiplexor supports baud rates of 9600,
19200, and 38400.

Nodes Search

Scan all nodes - Click this radio button and when you click Re-Scan
on the Connected Devices screen ValVue scans all 32 nodes to find
the connected devices.
Selected Nodes - Click this radio button and the Select list appears
for selecting a particular node (s) that are scanned when you click
Re-Scan on the Connected Devices screen.

Configure Multiplexor Setup and Operation
ValVue supports the MTL HART multiplexor to monitor and operate many HART devices from
a single computer.

45

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

The MTL 4840 HART maintenance system is a widely used multiplexor for communicating with
HART instruments. Connected to a computer serial port with a RS232⁄RS485 converter, the
multiplexor is capable of supporting up to 31 nodes, each with the capability of supporting up
to 16 sub nodes. Each sub node can control 16 loops. Therefore, the multiplexor provides the
potential to communicate with a maximum of 7936 HART loops, i.e., 31 (nodes) x 16 (sub
nodes) x 16 (loops) using one computer interface. Additionally, the multiplexor supports the
multidrop connection of HART devices on a single loop. Therefore, using the multidrop feature
it is possible to expended capacity of a system beyond 7936 HART devices.
For more information regarding the MTL multiplexor, refer to the MTL documentation.
Using the multiplexor capability of ValVue and the MTL multiplexor, monitoring and
communicating with many SVI’s and other HART devices is possible.

Mux Setup
To setup the nodes used on the MTL multiplexor:
1. After you have checked Use Multiplexor and selected the baud rate and node in the Set
Options (see “Use Multiplexor” on page 45), select Connected Devices.
2. Right-click on the Connected Devices page background and Select Mux Setup on the
context menu.

Figure 29

Context Menu with Mux Functions

Figure 30 appears and prompts for the nodes to be configured.

46

ValVue Setup

Mux Setup

Figure 30 Device Address
3. Enter a number between 1 and 31 for the desired node and select OK and Figure 31. The
node address must match the DIP switch setting on the Mux hardware.
The Multiplexor Setup dialog appears (Figure 31).

Figure 31

Options and Mux Setup

Buttons and Fields
Tag

Enter up to eight characters long and is used to identify the MTL
multiplexor node in the system. The tag is displayed in Device List
box on Connected Devices screen.

Descriptor

Enter a description with up to 15 characters for the MTL multiplexor node.

47

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Retry Count

Enter the number of times the multiplexor retries sending a command to a Hart device before returning with an error. The valid range
for this number is 0 to 5. The recommended number for use with ValVue is 3.

Preamble Count

Enter the number of preambles. A Host using the HART protocol
sends a short preamble string of characters at the beginning of each
communication to wake up the other device. The number of preambles prefixed to each Hart command sent to a device varies from
device to device. The valid range is 2 to 20. Recommended values for
this parameter are 3 to 5 when using the Mux.

Scan Age Time

Enter the maximum scan time in seconds that scan data remains
valid. An error is returned when scan data is requested more than
the age time since the data was last updated. This parameter is
available here to set for other applications that use the multiplexor.
ValVue does not support the scanning feature.

Master Mode Primary Mas- Select such that ValVue is configured to be the same type of master
ter/Secondary Masters
as the multiplexor. Use both the Options and Multiplexor Setup dialogs to check and compare the selection. Both can be primary or
both can be secondary; they cannot be different.
Search Method

When building a device list, the multiplexor can use one of three
ways:
Polling Address 0 only: This method looks only at polling
address 0 for each loop. Any devices on a loop with a
non-zero polling address are not found.
One Device: For each loop, all polling addresses are searched
until a device is found. The multiplexor does not continue the
search on a loop after the first device is found.
Multidrop: Polling addresses 0 - 31 are searched as per the
selections on the Options dialog ( “Configure the Set Options”
on page 41), and any devices found are added to the device
list.

Scan Option

The MTL multiplexor has the capability to continually scan the connected Hart devices to report the results. ValVue does not use this
feature, but the option is provided to configure the multiplexor as
needed by other applications.

Mux Reset
Click and the multiplexor rebuilds its table of live devices. You are prompted for the node that
is to be reset. When reset, the multiplexor node re-scans all of the devices connected to it and
depending upon the options set for the multiplexor, can take some time to complete. If
hardware has been added to the Mux or connected to different Mux channels a rescan must
be performed before the ValVue re-scan can be used.

48

ValVue Setup

Mux Reset

The Mux Reset is necessary when adding or removing HART devices on a Mux network. This
function updates the Mux’s Look Up Table utilized by ValVue to map devices.
NOTE

The Mux hardware re-scan is different from the re-scan
performed by ValVue from the Re-scan button. No
communication between ValVue and any device takes place on
the node until the reset is completed. This can take several
minutes, depending on MUX loading.

Use the multiplexor to request information about HART devices
1. Select the MUX Reset popup menu function to issue a reset command to a node of the
multiplexor. You are prompted for the node that is to be reset.
2. Reset the node. The multiplexor node re-scans all of the devices connected to the node
(this hardware rescan is different from the rescan done by ValVue from the Rescan
right-click menu). Depending upon the options set for the multiplexor, this can take a
while to complete. No communication can be done with devices on the selected node
until the reset is completed.
3. Select Rescan popup menu function to build a device list.
To find a device by its tag
A device list is arranged in the order found on the multiplexor’s channels. This list can be
very long if there are many connected devices.
1. Select the Find by Tag button to open a text entry dialog.
2. Enter a tag name for ValVue to search the device list for a device with a matching tag. If
found, the device is selected and the window scrolled so that its line is visible.
3. Selecting the Rescan popup menu function causes ValVue to build a new device list. All
nodes are polled. If there are a large number of devices connected to the multiplexor,
this function can take some time to complete. When the re-scan is completed, save the
device list to a file so that rescanning is not necessary every time ValVue is started.

49

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Troubleshooting ValVue Mux
Table 3

Troubleshooting ValVue Used with Mux

Problem

Cause

Corrective Action

Both ValVue and AMS
are connected to the
Mux

Connect ValVue to the device with a modem. If
the installation is correct connect the input to the
MTL 4046P Isolator. In a general purpose system,
connect directly to the device wires.

The MTL Mux is configured for AMS mode

Reconfigure the Mux for Cornerstone communications mode with MTL provided software.

Mismatch of the baud rate setting between the Mux and ValVue

Mux

Use Set Options in ValVue to match the setting of
the Mux. Refer to the dip switch setting on the
Mux.

HART converter (RS-232 to
RS485) not working properly.

Check for loose wires

Check configuration of converter. Refer to the
manufacturer’s instructions.

Expected device is not found in
Connected Devices list

Device was added
after the Mux performed its last scan

Click the Rescan mode Powering on/off/on the
Mux can also help. However, this impacts the
communication on all devices.

Devices all have the same tag
name in Connected Devices

ValVue and Mux are
not configured as the
same type of master

Set Mux and ValVue so both are Primary Master or
both are Secondary Master.

No devices found

Check for power
cabling between converter and Mux

50

ValVue Setup

Configuring Burst Mode

Configuring Burst Mode
The Burst mode is a mode where the HART device continuously sends out data without
being polled by a Master. This mode is useful only for devices that are passive (i.e. not a HART
master), such as a HART to Analog converter (SPA from Moore Industries, Tri-Loop by
Rosemount). It is not necessary to set the burst mode to allow communications with a
control system since the control system is a master capable of polling the device. Turning on
Burst mode in cases where it is not required affects the communication bandwidth.
Figure 4 provides a summary of the data returned from the Burst mode (HART Command #3
equivalent to Process-Vars-Current).
Table 4

Burst Mode Data Return

Variable

Description

Units/Range

SVI II AP (firmware 3.1.1, 3.1.2, 3.2.1, 3.3.3 and 4.1.1), SVI II (Firmware 12x) or SVi1000 (1.1.1)
PV (Primary Variable):

Valve position

0-100%

SV (Secondary Variable)

Actuator Pressure

0-150psig
(0-120psig for firmware 12x)

TV (Tertiary Variable)

Not used (Future)

QV (Quaternary Variable)

Not used (Future)

SVI
PV (Primary variable):

Valve position

0-100%

SV (Secondary variable)

Actuator Pressure

0-150psig

TV (Tertiary variable)

Process Variable

According to device setting

QV (Quaternary variable)

Controller setpoint

According to device setting

PV (Primary variable):

Level

According to device setting

SV (Secondary variable)

Actuator Pressure

0-150psig

TV (Tertiary variable)

Controller Setpoint

According to device setting

QV (Quaternary variable)

Board Temperature

According to device setting

HDLT

Use this procedure to configure a burst mode.
1. Select the intended device from the Connected Devices page.
51

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

2. Right-click on the gray background of the window and select Burst Mode Control and
Figure 32 appears.

Figure 32 Burst Mode Control
3. Select the desired command.
4. Select OK.

Connecting the SPA with the SVI II
• Valvue must be set as as
a secondary master if the
SPA is in polling mode to
be able to connect
• PV = Position
• SV = Actuator Pressure
• TV = Not Defined Yet
• QV = Not Defined Yet
The on/off contacts can be triggered from
the status bits sent with every message.
The module must be configured to let it know
which bit will trigger the contact.
Figure 33

Burst Mode Configuration

52

Connecting Devices

4

Connected Devices
After you have successfully logged in, ValVue opens the Connected Devices window and
searches the com port for connected devices. The devices that are found are listed. To stop the
searching process, select the Stop button. The list includes offline device files and live devices.
Scanning can take a few seconds if multidrop is selected. When a Multiplexor is used, the
process can take a longer time, depending upon how many devices are connected. If the device
file is enabled it displays previously scanned devices listed in the device file.

Figure 34

Connected Devices

53

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Selecting a Device
1. Click on the device you wish to run.
2. Click Select Device.
or
Double-click on a Tag name.
When connected through a multiplexor, any device connected to the multiplexor can be
selected. If the device is an SVI II AP, ValVue opens the device at the Monitor page.
When connected through a multiplexor, the select action is ignored if the selected device is a
node or sub node. If the selected HART device is not a Smart Valve Interface, only universal
HART messages are sent.

Find by Tag
Use this procedure to save scan time with the Mux when there are multiple devices.
To find a device by its tag name:
1. Select Find by Tag and Figure 35 appears.

Figure 35

Input Value

2. Enter a tag name and click OK.
The software searches for a device with a matching tag. When found, the device is
selected.

Re-Scan
To build a new device list:
1. Select Re-scan:
In the direct-connect configuration of ValVue all polling addresses are checked if the
options allow multidrop.

54

Connecting Devices

Re-Scan

In the multiplexor configuration of the program, all nodes are checked. If there are a
large number of devices connected to the multiplexor, this function takes time to
complete.
2. When the rescan is completed, you can save the device list to a file so that rescanning is
not necessary every time ValVue is started. If there is only one device on the loop, select
Stop when it has been found to save scan time.

55

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Advanced Setup with
ValVue

5

Methods to Set Up the SVI II AP
There are two methods of setting up the SVI II AP with ValVue:
1. Run Setup Wizard from the Monitor screen.
2. Advanced Setup of the SVI II AP by and advanced user.
The Setup Wizard automatically runs through the specified setup routines and is executed from
the Monitor screen. The Setup Wizard is the preferred and recommended method for initializing
an SVI II AP (refer to “Setup Wizard” on page 82 of this manual for instructions).

Advanced Setup
An advanced user may want to customize the setup beyond the parameters provided by the
Setup Wizard.

Steps to Set Up SVI II AP
To set up the SVI II AP:
1. Configure the SVI II AP.
Read and Set Configuration Parameters
2. Calibrate the SVI II AP.
a.

Run Find Stops or Manual Find Stops

b.

Run AutoTUNE

c.

View Calibration Parameters

NOTE
Before making any configuration or calibration changes ValVue must be in
Setup mode.

57

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Configuration Parameters
Refer to “Configure Screen” on page 99 of this manual for all configuration instructions.

Calibration Steps
Run Find Stops
To determine valve position, the positioner must measure and save the closed and open
positions of the valve. This can be done automatically by running the Find Stops procedure
from the Calibrate screen.
The SVI II AP first exhausts the actuator and measure the position, then fills the actuator and
measures the position. From these measurements the valve position can be determined.
Correction can be made for nominal valve travel if it is less than full travel.
To run Find Stops from the Calibrate screen:
1. Right-click and select Run Find Stops.

Figure 36

Selecting Run Find Stops

58

Advanced Setup with ValVue

Manual Find Stops
Figure 37 appears.

Figure 37

Starting Run Find Stops

2. Click OK.
When Find Stops is complete, Figure 38 appears.

Figure 38

Starting Run Find Stops

3. Click Continue to close the dialog and return to the Calibrate screen.

Manual Find Stops
On some actuators, it is possible that the automatic Find Stops procedure will not find the
correct end positions of the travel. A semi-automatic method of calibrating the stop
positions is provided.
Manual Find Stops moves the valve to full closed and you are asked to respond when the
valve has reached the closed position. The valve is then moved to full open and you are
asked to respond when the valve has reached the full open position.
For some valves where the travel exceeds the nominal travel of the valve, see “Open Stop
Adjustment” on page 61 for details about how to trim the open stop.

59

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

To run Manual Find Stops:
1. Right-click and select Manual Find Stops (Figure 39).

Figure 39

Selecting Manual Find Stops

Figure 41 appears.

Figure 40

Stroke Valve Dialog

60

Advanced Setup with ValVue

Open Stop Adjustment

2. Click OK. ValVue moves the valve to the fully closed position and Figure 41 appears.
Observe the valve until it is fully closed.

Figure 41

Valve Closed Dialog

3. Click OK. ValVue moves the valve to the fully open position and Figure 42 appears.
Observe the valve until it is fully open.
4. Click OK.

Figure 42 Valve Open Dialog

Open Stop Adjustment
Recomputes the position scale so that at the value entered in the open stop adjustment edit
box as a percent of full stops, the position reads 100%
In some valves the travel exceeds the nominal valve travel. The SVI II AP allows you to
compensate for this so that the valve position reads 100% at the nominal travel.
To make this correction:
1. Enter 100 in the Open Stop Adjustment edit box.
2. Select Find Stops from the context menu.
3. Return to manual mode and adjust the valve to its nominal travel and note the position
reading.

61

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

4. Return to calibrate mode, enter the position that was measured at nominal travel into the
Open Stop Adjustment edit box.
5. Select Open Stop Adjustment from the menu. The valve now reads 100% at the nominal
travel of the valve.
Full Travel
100%

Before Open Stop
20 mA

After Open Stop
100%

0

4 mA

Figure 43

0

Open Stop Adjustment Diagram

62

20 mA

4 mA

Advanced Setup with ValVue

Tri-Loop Configuration

Tri-Loop Configuration
Figure 44 is a simplified schematic showing the SVI II and Tri-Loop and a control system
connection
The input channel from the control system must have an impedance of at least 250 Ohms or
else the HART signal becomes attenuated and the Tri-Loop won’t function properly. Also,
channel one must be enabled and set for Primary Variable with a range of 0-100%. You can
enable channel 2 and 3 even if you don’t connect them.
Consult the TRI-LOOP instruction manual for wring diagrams.
Masoneilan is not responsible for improperly wiring the
TRI-LOOP. This document simplifies the setup requirement of an
SVI II with a device such as a TRI-LOOP. A resistor might be
required on the positive leg of Channel 1 to limit the current to
the TRI-LOOP.

NOTE

Ch 3

Ch 2

Ch 1

- +

- +

- +

TRI-LOOP
MODEL 333d or 333u

SVI II

Loop
Power
+ -

Comm
- +

Burst Input
- +

250ohm

+ 4-20mA
Analog
Output

+ 24Vdc
Analog
Input

SVI II Configuration:
HART Address = 0
Set BURST MODE to HART cmd#3 (with ValVue) or PROCESSVARS CURRENT(with Handheld or DD enabled Host)
PV is Valve Position (0-100%)
SV is Actuator Pressure (0-120 psi)
TV = Not Used
QV= Not Used
TRI-LOOP Setup
HART address =1
CHANNEL = ENABLE
Variable = PV
Upper Range Value = 100
Lower Range Value = 0
Units: %

Figure 44

Tri-Loop Configuration

63

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

SVI II AP Software Manual

SVI II AP Software Manual

Advanced Performance
Digital Positioner with
Remote Sensor

65

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

ValVue SVI II AP Work
Environment

1

Overview
This section describes the working environment of ValVue and how to accomplish SVI II AP tasks.
After you have successfully launched and logged into ValVue and selected a device the Monitor
screen appears (Figure 45).

Clicking on Tabs selects other ValVue Screens
Right clicking on background
displays the Screen related menu
Context-Sensitive Help.

Figure 45 ValVue Work Environment

67

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Working in ValVue
ValVue is set up as a typical Windows program, with tabs, menus, dialogs, windows and
toolbars. After you have successfully logged into ValVue, the selected device appears in
ValVue’s Monitor screen. You can either perform operation on the Monitor screen or select
another screen to display another ValVue screen.

Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of every ValVue screen has two menu items; Tools and Help.

Tools Menu
The Tools menu changes according to the selected screen.

Help Menu
The Help menu is the same on every screen and contains:
Help – launches the help file table of contents
Firmware Info – displays information about the firmware loaded into the SVI II AP
About – displays information about ValVue

68

ValVue SVI II AP Work

ValVue Help

ValVue Help
ValVue offers help in many forms. Help changes according to the active screen. Every screen
has access to the entire ValVue Help system through the Help command button located at
the bottom of every screen and through the Help menu located at the top of every screen.
Each screen also provides context sensitive Help that is pertinent to the active screen.

Accesses Active Screen Context Sensitive Help

Figure 46 Accessing Context Sensitive Help - Tools Menu

69

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Accesses Active Screen Context Sensitive Help

Figure 47

Accessing Context Sensitive Help - Right Click Menu

Exit
Clicking Exit quits the program.

Change Mode
The Change Mode button located at the bottom left of all SVI II AP screens allows you to
change the operating SVI II AP mode. There are three operating modes:
Normal - In this mode the SVI II AP follows the 4 - 20 mA input signal and positions the
valve accordingly (indicator green).
Manual - in this mode the valve setpoint is set by the valve software, the local
pushbutton or a HART compatible Host system. When changing to this mode the
setpoint becomes the actual position.
Setup - In this mode you can set calibration and configuration parameters.
Additionally, for SVI II AP, you can step response tests, and positioner signatures
(indicator yellow).

Failsafe Mode
Failsafe – When the SVI II AP cannot operate correctly the device goes to the failsafe
position and remains in the failsafe mode until the user intervenes (indicator red).
70

ValVue SVI II AP Work

ValVue Screens

ValVue Screens
There are seven screens, correlating to the seven tabs available at the top level of ValVue:
Monitor - Use this screen to adjust current operating parameters of the selected SVI II
AP, perform HART commands and run positioner setup (See “SVI II AP Monitor
Screen” on page 73).
Trend - Use this screen to view in a graphical format the live operation of the selected
SVI II AP and capture the current data as a bitmap and save it to the computer
clipboard. You can then paste the graphical contents into any program that accepts
a bmp file; e.g. Microsoft Word, Excel, Power Point, etc.
Configure - Use this screen to view and adjust the current SVI II AP configuration
parameters. To adjust the positioner configuration, ValVue must be in the Setup or
Manual mode.
Calibrate - Use this screen to view and calibrate the stop positions and the feedback
control parameters (PID tuning parameters).
Diagnostics - Use this screen to view continuous diagnostics information and
perform diagnostic tests.
Status - Use this screen to see the operating and internal status of the SVI II AP.
Check - Use this screen to monitor some of the basic parameters. This screen is used
primarily for troubleshooting.

71

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

2

SVI II AP Monitor
Screen
What You Can Do on the Monitor Screen

The Monitor screen is the first window displayed on starting ValVue. From the Monitor screen,
you can view the basic functions of the SVI II AP including; tag and identification, characteristics,
setpoint, position, and status. The Setup Wizard provides for rapid setup of the positioner in four
easy steps. You can:
Monitor the live operation of the SVI II AP

Monitor the current positioner
characteristics

Send a HART command and view the
result

View the Position Indicator
(graphical representation)

Generate reports

Run the Setup Wizard

Positioner Operations

Positioner Tag Information
Positioner Indicator

Send Command Menu
Status Display

Send Command Display Window

Launch Setup Wizard

Figure 48 Monitor Screen
73

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Button and Fields
Positioner Tag Information
Tag

A user-assigned name for the valve with a maximum eight characters.
The value appears in many views but can only be changed from the Configure
screen (see “What You Can Do on the Configure Screen” on page 99), using the
Setup Wizard (see “Setup Wizard” on page 82) or using a command ( “Changing
Tag Information on the Monitor Screen” on page 78).

Long Tag

A user-assigned name for the valve with a maximum thirty two characters. Only
available for HART 6.
Use this field for any information desired. The value appears in many views but
can only be changed from the Configure screen (see “What You Can Do on the
Configure Screen” on page 99).

Descriptor

A user-defined field with up to 16 characters. This field is commonly used to
describe valve use.
The value appears in many views but can only be changed from the Configure
screen (see “What You Can Do on the Configure Screen” on page 99), using the
Setup Wizard (see “Setup Wizard” on page 82) or using a command ( “Changing
Tag Information on the Monitor Screen” on page 78).

Message

A user-defined field with up to 32 characters. Use this field for any information
desired.
The value appears in many views but can only be changed from the Configure
screen (see “What You Can Do on the Configure Screen” on page 99), or using
the Setup Wizard (see “Setup Wizard” on page 82).

Date

Use the date field as needed. The preferred format is dd MMM yyyy (e.g. 14 NOV
2001). The program also accepts dates formatted as dd/mm/yy (e.g. 14/11/01).
Years greater than 70 are assumed to be in the 1900s and years 70 or less
assumed to be in the 2000s. The day precedes the month. Dates as dd/mm/yyyy
are also accepted.
The value appears in many views but can only be changed from the Configure
screen (see “What You Can Do on the Configure Screen” on page 99), using the
Setup Wizard (see “Setup Wizard” on page 82) or using a command ( “Changing
Tag Information on the Monitor Screen” on page 78).

Status Display

Displays health indicators. When there is a fault code from the SVI II AP, Additional Status Available appears.
The status block also contains other status codes returned by HART. These
include Configuration Changed, Device malfunction, and Variable out of limits.

Assembly Number

A user-assigned number. Value can be between 0 and 16,777,215.
Use this field for any information desired. The value appears in many views but
can only be changed from the Configure screen (see “What You Can Do on the
Configure Screen” on page 99) or using the Setup Wizard (see “Setup Wizard”
on page 82).

74

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

What You Can Do on the Monitor
Positioner Operations
Signal

Indicates the input analog signal expressed in % and in mA of the configured
signal range.

Position

Indicates the actual valve position in % of valve opening. 0% is always closed
and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may exceed its nominal travel,
positions greater than 100% are possible (see “Open Stop Adjustment” on
page 61).

Setpoint

In NORMAL mode, the setpoint is the target position based on the characterized
input. In MANUAL mode, it is the target position to which the SVI II AP is controlling the valve. The manual setpoint may be changed by dragging the lower
thumb on the position indicator.

Pressure

The SVI II AP continuously monitors the actuator pressure and displays according to the configured units (psi, bar, or kPa).

Position Indicator

This shows the valve position graphically and consists of three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator showing the value of the input
signal. In Normal mode this is the position setpoint. WARNING! - In manual
mode, this is the position that the valve moves to if normal mode is selected.
The center green bar shows the valve position in percent. The numerical
valve position is shown in the center.
The lower part contains an indicator (that can be dragged when active)
showing the valve setpoint. In operating mode, this is the same as the signal. In manual mode it is the valve setpoint. You can drag the indicator to
change the valve setpoint. While dragging, the number in the center bar
shows the manual setpoint that is selected when you release the indicator.

Send Command
menu

Use this pulldown to send HART commands whose responses are seen in the
Send Command Display window.

Send Command
Display window

Displays results of HART commands.

Setup Wizard button

Click to launch the Setup Wizard ( “Setup Wizard Selections” on
page 83).

75

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Changing the Setpoint
To change the manual setpoint the SVI II AP must be in manual mode. There are three ways to
change the position indicator:
1. Entering the setpoint value in the Setpoint dialog.
2. Dragging the position indicator.
3. Left clicking on either side of the position indicator modifies the setpoint by 5%.

Position Indicator Active (Manual Mode)

Figure 49

Position Indicator Active

Entering Setpoint Value
To enter a value for the position indicator setpoint:
1. Right-click inside the position indicator area and Figure 50 appears.
2. Enter the setpoint percentage and click OK.

Figure 50 Changing Position Indicator

76

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Status on the Monitor Screen

Status on the Monitor Screen
The SVI II AP provides several health indicators. When there is a fault code from the SVI II AP
Additional Status Available appears.
To retrieve fault codes:
1. Select Read Status from the Send Command drop pulldown list.
2. Click Send. The results appear in the lower left box. The fault codes also appear on the
Status screen.

Status Display - Additional Status Available

Figure 51

Monitor Screen - Additional Status Available

77

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Tag Information
Changing Tag Information on the Monitor Screen
There are two methods of changing Tag Information on the Monitor screen:
Activate the Setup Wizard and execute Step 1. See “Setup Wizard Step 1” on page 83.
Use a command:
1. Select the Write Tag and Descriptor command from the command drop down list and
appears.

Figure 52

Input Data Tag

3. Enter the Tag information in the dialog box and click OK.

78

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Send Command

Send Command
You can send HART commands to the SVI II AP and view the results in the box below the
Send Command pulldown list. To send a command:
1. Select the command from the drop down list (Figure 53).

Figure 53

Selecting a Command to Send

2. Click Send Cmd button (Figure 54).

Figure 54

Executing Send Command

79

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

3. Read the results below (Figure 55).

Figure 55

Send Command Results Displayed

List of Available HART Commands
When you click on the drop down arrow, ValVue displays the available HART commands. Scroll
through the list until you locate the command you wish to execute:
000 Read Identifier - Returns the unique identifier from the device including the device
ID, device type, and the manufacturers ID.
001 Read Primary Variable - Returns the position in percent open.
002 Read Current - Returns the input signal in mA.
003 Read All Variables - Returns the input signal and the position in percent open
011 Read ID from Tag - Prompts the user for a tag name. The tag name is sent in a
HART command and if received by a device with a matching tag name, the ID of the
device is returned. The format of the ID is the same as command 001 Read Identifier.
012 Read Message - Reads the message that was stored in the device when it was
configured
013 Read Tag & Descriptor - Reads the tag name, date, and the descriptor that was
stored in the device when it was configured
016 Read Assembly Number - Reads the final assembly number that was stored in the
device when it was assembled at the factory

80

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

List of Available HART Commands

017 Write Message - This command allows the user to enter a message (up to 32
characters) that is stored in the SVI II AP.
018 Write Tag & Descriptor - This command allows the user to enter a tag name (up
to 8 characters) and a description (up to 16 characters) that are stored in the
SVI II AP.
19 Write Final Assembly - This command allows the user to enter an identifying
number (0 to 16 million) which is stored in the SVI II AP.
038 Reset Configuration Changed Flag - This command sets the HART configuration
changed bit back to 0. The bit is set whenever a value in the device has changed.
072 Squawk - Send this command using ValVue and a specific device audibly
indicates the reception of the command.
210 Read Configuration - Reads the configuration data from the device and displays
it in the response box. The data includes all of the data describing the device set on
the Configure screen including Air-To-Open/Air-To-Close, Tight Shutoff status,
Software Position Limit Stops, etc.
200 Read Option Configuration - Reads basic (hardware) configuration information
about the positioner.
211 Read Custom Characterization – Reads the custom characterization information
about the positioner.
212 Read Error Limits - Reads and displays the position range and time-outs
associated with position and pressure errors
213 Read Calibration Data - Reads and displays the input signal that corresponds to
the open and closed positioning of the valve.
216 Read PID - Reads and displays the valve positioning tuning parameters
136 Read Status - Reads and displays the status flags. These flags describe error
conditions that have occurred since the last time they were cleared. See “Status
Code List” on page 150 of this manual for a complete list of possible codes.
138 Clear Status - Clears the status flags. See also “Status Code List” on page 150.
142 Read Switches - Reads the status of the contact switches
139 Read Continuous Diagnostic Data - Reads and displays the continuous
diagnostic data including number of full strokes the valve has made, the number of
cycles (direction changes), the time the valve has spent open, the time the valve has
been closed, and the time the valve has spent throttling near the seat
191 Read Standard Diagnostic Data - Displays the valve response time open and
response time closed
154 Read Setpoint - Reads the manual setpoint of the positioner.
141 Read Raw Data - Returns information from the SVI II AP that is useful to
engineers for diagnostic purposes. The information includes the input current on the
auxiliary input channel, the A/D values from the pressure, signal, and position

81

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
measurements, the D/A value of the signal to the I/P, and the internal SVI II AP
temperature.
143 Read Temperatures – Reads the historical low and high range to which the
positioner was be exposed and reads the actual circuit board temperature
201 Read All Pressures – Reads the Actuator, Supply and IP pressure (available with the
Advanced Diagnostics version)
249 Read Operating Mode – Reads and displays the positioner operating mode.

Setup Wizard
Running the Setup Wizard is one of two ways to set up the SVI II AP. When you decide to run
the setup you can either run the entire wizard or pick and choose which components to run.
From the Setup Wizard screen you can rapidly setup the SVI II AP by configuring some basic
parameters. By selecting the appropriate check boxes you can set the device identification,
select the air action, perform a travel calibration, and autotune the positioning parameters.
When the selected tasks are started, ValVue displays a progress screen.
To customize the valve setup refer to “Advanced Setup with ValVue” on page 57 of this
manual.

Setup Wizard Button
Figure 56 Starting the Setup Wizard

82

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Setup Wizard Selections

Setup Wizard Selections
After you start the Setup Wizard Figure 57 appears where you can select the setup features
to perform:

Figure 57 Setup Wizard Selections
Setup Wizard Step 1
When selected, the device Tag, Long Tag (HART 6 only), Descriptor, and Message are
modified.
Setup Wizard Step 2
When selected you can set the air action. You can also reset the configuration and
calibration parameters to factory defaults; Air Action, Travel, and PID (tuning) parameters.
Setup Wizard Step 3
When selected, you can perform a travel calibration. To determine valve position, the
positioner must measure the closed and open positions of the valve. The SVI II AP first
exhausts the actuator and measures the position, then fills the actuator and measures the
position. From these measurements the valve position can be determined.
Additionally, you can enter the expected Supply Pressure.

83

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Wizard Step 4- Autotune
The SVI II AP has a built-in positioning Autotune feature. At the moment of setting up the
positioner on a valve, this feature automatically computes the optimal parameters for the
positioning algorithm. This feature does not require valve specific parameters in order to
complete successfully. The patented algorithm analyzes the dynamic behavior of the valve
assembly, and determines values for the tuning algorithm that are configured for tight and
accurate position control.
The Autotune feature can be launched using the local pushbuttons, a handheld
communicator loaded with the device (DD), a control system loaded with the DD or ValVue
software.
Wizard Step 5- Report & Backup
Creates a report of the positioner parameters using your default Report Setup choice:
Wordpad or Word. This report opens at the end of the wizard process.

Setting the Tag and Descriptor Data
1. Click Set Tag and Descriptor.
2. Click in the field (s) for modification and edit.

Figure 58
NOTE

Setting Tag and Descriptor

The changes you make to tag and descriptor will not take place
until you click Apply. Do not click Apply until after you have made
all your Setup Wizard selections.

84

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Setting the Air Action

Setting the Air Action
The Set Air Action step allows you to set the action of the air supply by making one of the
following selections:
Air to Open - air pressure is used through the SVI II AP to open the valve
Air to Close - air pressure is used through the SVI II AP to close the valve
Reset configuration to factory defaults - resets the calibration and configuration
parameters to the factory defaults; Air Action, Travel, and PID parameters
To set the air action:
1. Click Set Air Action.
2. Select either the Air-to-Open or Air-to-Close.
3. Click Reset configuration to factory defaults, if required.
NOTE

The changes you make to air action will not take place until you
click Apply. Do not click Apply until after you have made all your
Setup Wizard selections.

Calibrate Travel
To determine valve position, the positioner must measure the closed and open positions of
the valve. The SVI II AP first exhausts the actuator and measure the position, then fills the
actuator and measures the position. From these measurements the valve position can be
determined.
To calibrate positioner travel:
Click Calibrate Travel.
NOTE

The calibrate travel function will not take place until you click
Apply. Do not click Apply until after you have made all your
Setup Wizard selections.

Autotune
To autotune the SVI II AP:
Click Autotune.
NOTE

The autotune function will not take place until you click Apply.
Do not click Apply until after you have made all your Setup
Wizard selections.

85

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Setup Selections Made
1. After you have selected the desired steps click Apply (Figure 59).

Figure 59

Applying Setup Wizard Selections

Figure 60 appears indicating the actions selected.

Figure 60

Setup Dialog

86

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Progress Dialog
2. Click OK and Figure 61 appears.

Figure 61

Running Setup Wizard Dialog

3. Click OK.

Progress Dialog
Some calibration and diagnostic processes that ValVue launches can be of a long duration.
These processes include find stops, autotune, diagnostics, and the setup wizard. While
these processes run, a dialog is provided to show the progress and allow you to cancel the
process earlier if necessary.

Figure 62 Setup Wizard Progress

87

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
After the wizard completes, Figure 63 appears.

Figure 63

PID Values Displayed after Autotuning

4. Click Exit.

Figure 64

Setup Wizard Complete

5. Click Continue.

88

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Progress Dialog
Parameter Definitions
P

Proportional gain in %. Common values for the positioner are 50
for small valves up to 4000 for large valves.

I

Integral time or reset time in 1/10th sec, is the time constant of
integral control. Higher values of I cause less integral action, however a value of 0 gives no integral action. Common values are 10 to
200.

D

Derivative time or rate time (msec) is the time constant of derivative control. Common values are 10 to 100

PAdjust

Valves often have significantly different response when filling
verses exhausting. The proportional gain is adjusted by adding
Padj (%) to P when the valve is exhausting.

Beta

Beta is a nonlinear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is
0, the controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of
error. The larger the beta, the smaller the gain for small error. Typical beta value for a valve position controller is 7 or 8.

Position Compensation
Coefficient

The response of the valve is different when the valve is nearly
closed than when the valve is nearly open. The position compensation coefficient, which is a number between 0 and 20. Make adjustments to try to equalize the valve response. The normal value is 6.
For springless actuators the value is 15.

Dead Zone

When the valve position is within the setpoint +/- the dead zone, no
additional position control is performed. This value is normally 0%,
however for high friction valves (e.g. valves with graphite packing)
a higher dead zone (%) helps avoid limit cycling due to the stick/slip
action of the valve. In these cases the dead zone chosen might be
0.5% to 1%. Range: 0 to 5%

Boost

The boost field in the PID adjustments controls a supplemental
pressure, or boost, to speed up initial valve response. This compensates for pneumatic deadband. Range: 0 to 20.

The values determined above provide sufficient response for most applications. However
these values are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVI II AP.
You may want performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID
values differently than determined by Autotune. You can individually set tuning values from
the Calibrate screen.

89

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Monitor Context Menu
Right-click on the Monitor screen and a context menu appears (Figure 65).

Figure 65

Monitor Screen Context Sensitive Menu

The following items appear and are greyed out based on the actual SVI II AP mode.
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command takes the valve out of closed
loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P. This is available only in manual or
setup mode.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This takes the valve out of closed loop
control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P. This is available only in manual or
setup mode.
Set to Fail Position - Sets the Output Pressure (P1) to 0 psig. Moves the valve full open or
full closed, whichever is the fail position of the actuator.
Cancel Transfer - Returns the SVI II AP to manual mode from the bumpless transfer
mode (available during a bumpless transfer).
Reset - Issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go through its startup routine
and re-initializing all of its operating parameters from non-volatile memory.
WARNING

The valve moves during the reset operation.

90

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Restore SVI Data

Report Setup - Allows you to select a report setup set report template file and report
printing program
Report - Generates a report of the SVI II AP parameters
Save SVI Data - Saves the SVI II AP internal parameters in a file that can be read and
restored by ValVue.
Restore SVI Data - Restores the contents of a dump file to a Masoneilan device. This
can be used to clone an SVI II AP into a new SVI II AP. Items like tag, which must be
unique, and position calibrations which differ on each positioner are not cloned. This
command is available only in manual mode.
Backup NVM – Backups up the Non Volatile Memory (NVM). This is useful for factory
engineer to help troubleshoot an SVI II AP.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the anchored screen format and
creates a separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor screen instructions.

Restore SVI Data
To restore SVI data:
1. Right-click and select Restore SVI Data and appears.

Figure 66

Restore SVI Data

2. Click OK and Figure 67 appears.

Figure 67

Time Warning

3. Click OK and an Open dialog appears.
4. Navigate to the dump file and click Open.

91

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Reports
One of the functions available on the Monitor screen is the ability to generate reports. ValVue
provides the ability to extract information about the SVI II AP operation and dump the
information into a report format. When ValVue extracts the information from a device it
requires a template file into which to dump the data. To generate a report with ValVue you
must first create a report template file that includes the parameters to include in the report as
well as personalization. There are three basic steps to create reports:
1. Set up the report - create a report template file
2. Select the report setup (report template file) - using the Report Setup command from the
Monitor context menu.
3. Generate the report - using the Report command from the Monitor context menu.
Report Setup
1. Right-click on the Monitor screen and select Report Setup and Figure 68 appears.

Figure 68

Report Setup Dialog

2. Use the browser or type the path for the Report Template file name.
3. Select the program for report generation by clicking Auto Find or click the Browse button
and manually locate the.exe.

Figure 69

Report Setup Completed

92

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Reports
Creating Report Template Files

You can create a custom SVI II AP report by creating a rich text format (RTF). The default
template is located in:
C:\ProgramData\Dresser\ValVue\SVI2 AP\Report\
Prior to selecting the set up of the report, you must create the report template file in an rtf
format. The report template should include the operation parameters that you would like
populated in the report.
ValVue substitutes the values of SVI II AP parameters into the text file where ever it finds a
parameter name that matches an SVI II AP parameter. For each parameter you would like
included in the report place $$ in front of the parameter name.
For example:
Tag = $$Tag
When creating the report template file, use an application that can save the report template
file to an rtf or text file such as WordPad or Microsoft Word.
NOTE

rtf files are preferred as you can apply special formatting to the
file that can contain fonts, sizes, tabs, etc. and bitmaps. Some
.rtf formatting is accepted in Word which is not available in
WordPad.

The allowed SVI II AP parameters are listed in Table 5. Use the report file (report.rtf) shipped
with the application for examples.
Table 5 Report Setup Parameters
Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$Tag

Tag Name

$$Descriptor

Descriptor

$$Date

Date

$$Message

Message

$$AssemblyNumber

Final Assembly Number

$$MfgID

Manufacturer’s ID (101 for Masoneilan)

$$DeviceType

Device Type (200 for the SVI II AP)

$$DeviceID

Hart DeviceID

$$HWRev

Hardware Revision

93

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 5

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$SWRev

Software Revision

$$CmdRev

Firmware Command Revision

$$PollingAddress

PollingAddress

$$Position

Position

$$Signal

Input Signal

$$Pressure

Actuator Pressure

$$IPOutput

Signal to the I/P in Counts (0 - 65000)

$$Temperature

Circuit Board Temperature

$$LowTemperature

Historical Low Temperature

$$HighTemperature

Historical High Temperature

$$Output

Output from the process controller

$$Mode

SVI II AP Mode

$$SignalPercent

Input Signal as Percent

$$AirAction

Air-to-Open/Air-to-Close

$$ActuatorType

Single/Double Acting Actuator

$$PosErrorBand

Position Error Band

$$PosErrorTime

Position Deviation Time

$$Charact

Characterization (Linear, Equal Percentage, etc.)

$$CustomCharact

Displays the Custom Characterization constants
Individual items of the characterization curve may be selected by entering:
$$CustomCharact[n] - where n is a number between 0 and 17

$$ButtonLock

Button Lock Level

$$Bumpless

Bumpless Transfer On/Off

$$BumplessSpeed

Time to move from Manual to Normal (operating) mode

$$TightShutoff

Tight Shutoff On/Off

$$TSValue

Tight Shutoff Value

94

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Reports
Table 5

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$ULimitStop

Upper Position Limit On/Off

$$ULSValue

Upper Position Limit

$$LLimitStop

Lower Position Limit On/Off

$$LLSValue

Lower Position Limit

$$NearClosed

Value below which is considered Near Closed

$$PosUnits

Position Units of Measure (always %)

$$PresUnits

Pressure Units (psi, bar, or kPa

$$SignalUnits

Signal Units (always mA)

$$Language

SVI II AP Display Language

$$LowSignal

Low Calibration Value

$$HighSignal

High Calibration Value

$$P

Proportional Gain In Positioner

$$Padjust

Adjustment to P when valve is exhausting

$$I

Integral action of positioner

$$Beta

Step size adjustment in positioner

$$D

Derivative action of positioner

$$PosComp

Position range compensation of positioner

$$DeadZone

Dead zone of positioner

$$Damping

Damping coefficient of positioner

$$Travel

Total strokes of the valve

$$Cycles

Total cycles of the valve

$$TimeOpen

Total time open of the valve

$$TimeClosed

Total time closed of the valve

$$TimeNearClosed

Amount of time valve was nearly closed

$$ResponseOpen

Time require to open valve

$$ResponseClosed

Time required to close valve

$$Switch1Type

Condition under which Switch 1 operates

95

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 5

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$Switch1Value

Value at which Switch 1 activates

$$Switch1Action

Switch is Normally Closed or Normally Open

$$RawSignal

Signal Value in A/D Counts

$$RawPosition

Position Value in A/D Counts

$$PositionStopLow

Position A/D Counts at the Lower Stop

$$PositionStopHigh

Position A/D Counts at the Upper Stop

$$OptionConfig
$$OptionConfigEx0
$$OptionConfigEx1

Data describing the hardware installed on the positioner

$$OptionConfigEx2
$$OptionConfigEx3
$$Friction

Friction Measured from a Standard Actuator Signature

$$FLowerSpringRange

Lower Spring Range measured from a standard actuator signature

$$FupperSpringRange

Upper Spring Range measured from a standard actuator signature

$$LowPressureActual

Pressure when the actuator is exhausted

$$HighPressureActual

Supply Pressure

$$Speed

Speed at which the last diagnostic test was run

$$SpeedSaved

Speed at which the saved standard signature was run

$$SpeedBaseline

Speed at which the baseline standard signature was run

$$LowerSpringRange

Lower Spring Range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature

$$LowerSpringRangeSaved
$$LowerSpringRangeBaseline
$$UpperSpringRange
$$UpperSpringRangeSaved

Upper Spring Range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature

$$UpperSpringRangeBaseline
$$Signature

Position/Pressure Pairs -gathered during the Standard Signature Test

$$SignatureSaved

Position/Pressure Pairs - saved in the Saved Standard Signature

$$SignatureBaseline

Position/Pressure Pairs- saved in the Baseline Standard Signature

96

SVI II AP Monitor Screen

Reports
(Generate) Report
To generate a report:
Right-click and select Report.

ValVue populates the report template. An example of a report is shown in Figure 70.












Smart Valve Interface 2AP - Configuration Data Sheet


General Information
Tag Name
Descriptor
Date
Message
Assembly Number
Manufacturer’s ID
Device Type
Device ID
Hardware Revision
Transmitter Revision
Software Revision
Polling Address

NEW

0
101
206
5010001
32
1
1
0

Operating Data
Position
Signal
Pressure
Pressure2
Supply Pressure
Switch 1

50.0 %
12.00 mA
13.54 psi
0.00 psi
N/A psi
Closed

Configuration Information
Air Action
Actuator Type
Position Error Band
Position Error Time
Charactacterization
Custom Charact.
In
100.0
Out 100.0

Figure 70

ATO
Single
5.0 %
Off
Linear

Report Sample Using ValVue Template

97

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

3

Configure Screen

What You Can Do on the Configure Screen
From the Configure screen, you can configure the valve/actuator by adjusting:
“Tag Information” on page 100

“Characterization” on page 102

“Button Lock” on page 107

“Air-to-Open / Air-to-Close” on
page 108

“Bumpless Transfer” on page 107

“Near Closed” on page 107

“Position Limit Stops” on page 108

“Position Fault Limits” on page 108

“Language” on page 108

“Burst Settings” on page 112

“Configure I/O” on page 109

Characterization

Tag Information

Button Lock

Bumpless
Transfer
Near Closed
Value

Air Action

Language
Burst Settings Configure I/O

Figure 71

Configure Screen - Setup Mode

99

Position Limits

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
ValVue must be in Setup mode to make any configuration changes
on this screen.

NOTE

Tag Information
The Tag information contains an extra field, Polling Address. To change Tag information:
1. Enter data.
2. Click Apply.
Polling Address
The Polling Address doesn’t appear in the Tag information on the Monitor screen.
HART can communicate with up to 64 devices on a single pair of wires. These devices are
distinguished by their polling address which number from 0 to 63. If there is a device at polling
address 0, it must be the only device on the loop. There can be up to 63 devices with non-zero
polling addresses on the loop (subject to power and intrinsic safety constraints). For an SVI II
AP HART 6 device, polling address can be up to 63. Devices which operate 4-20 mA are
generally required to have polling address 0, however with split range valve positioners,
several 4-20 mA devices can be wired in series. Set these devices up with non-zero polling
addresses.
Table 6
Positioner Application

Polling Address Applications
Polling Address

Comment

Normal default on current loop

0

Use this for all single loop control.

Split range on a single current
loop

1 to 63

Give each device on the current loop a
unique address. 0 can cause errors. Use
the Options dialog to specify particular
addresses or an address range to save
scanning time.

Split range with each positioner
on a current loop powered by isolator

1 to 63

Give each device operated by a single
controller a unique address. 0 can cause
errors. Use the Options dialog to specify
particular addresses or an address
range to save scanning time.

Multidrop in voltage mode

1 to 63

Used with HART multiplexor. Follow
instructions of Mux manufacturer.

100

Configure Screen

Tag Information
Table 6
Positioner Application
Use with Mux

Polling Address Applications (Continued)
Polling Address
1 to 31

Comment
Used with voltage mode devices only.
Give each device on a circuit a unique
address. 0 can cause errors. Use the
Options dialog to specify particular
addresses or an address range to save
scanning time.

101

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Characterization
Control valves are characterized to give a specific relationship between flow capacity (Cv) and
percent opening of the valve. The valve can be characterized with special purpose trim or with
the SVI II AP positioner. Several characterizations are available:
Linear: Causes the valve to open proportionally with the input signal. Select this option
if non-linear trim is used in the valve.
Equal Percentage (50) and Equal Percentage (30): Two equal percentage
characterizations are available, one with R=50 and the other with R=30.
Quick Opening: The quick opening characterization is the inverse to the Equal
Percentage (50) characterization curve.
Custom Configuration: Selecting this option displays an additional dialog where you
enter or draw a custom characterization curve. The curve can have up to nine points
and points in between are linearly interpolated.
Camflex: Selecting this option characterizes the valve as if it were a Camflex valve with
settings of Linear and Equal Percentage 50.

Valve Position %

Figure 72 shows the characterization curves in a graphical format.

Input Signal %
Figure 72

Characterization Curves

102

Configure Screen

Custom Characterization

Custom Characterization
When you select Custom under Characterization, ValVue launches a characterization graph
(Figure 73). A custom characterization defines the relationship between the input signal and
the output position of the valve. The characterization may contain up to nine XY pairs and
the position is linearly interpolated between the pairs. It is required that the first position is 0,
0 and the last position is 100,100 (both first and last positions indicate 0 and 100 percent
and are not counted as any of the nine points allowed).

Figure 73

Custom Characterization Curve - No Data Points

103

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Adding Data Points
1. Adding data points by placing the cursor on the curve and left-clicking (Figure 74).

Figure 74

Adding the First Data Point

2. Continue until you have added all data points to the curve. The values for the data points
fill the editable boxes below the graph. Data points are added from the highest to lowest
values.

Figure 75

Data Points Added

104

Configure Screen

Custom Characterization
Deleting Data Points

1. Delete data points by selecting the data point and right clicking (Figure 76).

Figure 76

Deleting a Data Point

2. Continue selecting data points until you have deleted all data points. The values for the
data points empty from the editable boxes below the graph.

Figure 77

Data Points Deleted

105

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Dragging Data Points
Move points by dragging them to their new position (Figure 78). The characterization curve
must be non-decreasing and the program does not allow a point to be added or moved to a
position that would create a decreasing segment. To drag a data point:
1. Select a data point by dragging and holding with a left click.
2. Drag the data point to the new location.

Figure 78

Changing Curve by Dragging

Saving Custom Characterization Curves
To save the custom curve:
1. Click OK.
Figure 79 appears.

Figure 79

Save Custom Characterization

2. Click OK to save the custom characterization data.
3. Return to the Calibration screen and click Apply to save the changes.

106

Configure Screen

Button Lock

Button Lock
The SVI II AP comes with an optional local display and buttons for data entry. These buttons
can be used to perform basic SVI II AP setup without the need for ValVue or a handheld. It
may, however, be desirable after initial setup to lock the buttons so that the parameters
cannot be inadvertently changed from the buttons. Several levels of locks are provided:
Allow Local Buttons (level 3): Buttons on the SVI II AP are enabled.
Lock Out Local Cal. - Config. (level 2): You can use the buttons to perform operations in
normal operating mode and manual mode, however you cannot go to configure or
calibrate mode.
Lock Out Local Manual (level 1): You can examine variables in normal operating mode
but may not put the valve in manual mode (and therefore cannot get to calibrate or
configure modes).
Lock Out All Buttons (level 0): The buttons are disabled.

Bumpless Transfer
This option provides a means to maintain smooth valve control positioning when changing
to Normal mode from Manual or Setup. Without Bumpless Transfer, when changing to
Normal mode, the setpoint could vary in a manner that causes a significant process
disturbance. Bumpless Transfer moves the controller signal to match the valve position so
that smooth resumption of control with little disturbance results.
When Bumpless Transfer is selected, returning to Normal mode from Manual or Setup mode
is deferred until the input signal matches the current valve position. Either the input signal or
the valve position can be changed to match. If nothing is done, the system slowly changes
the position until it matches the signal setpoint. The time taken to move to the position is
determined by the Transfer Time which is a number between 0 and 255 and is
approximately the number of seconds required to move the valve 100% toward the signal
position.

Near Closed
The near closed value determines the value of position below which the valve is considered
near closed by the continuous diagnostic calculations.

107

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Position Limit Stops
Use the SVI II AP to establish software limit stops. If enabled, during correct operation of the
SVI II AP, the control functions of the SVI II AP do not allow the valve position to be lower than
the lower position limit or above the upper position limit.
NOTE

This option does not provide mechanical stops for the valve. In an
electrical or air failure the valve goes to the fail safe position
without regard to the software limit stops.

The full open and full closed buttons similarly ignores the settings of the software limit stops.
Some of the diagnostic tests cannot be performed with position limit stops set.

Single/Double Acting
This is factory set.

Air-to-Open / Air-to-Close
You must select whether the valve is an air to open valve or an air to close valve. This selection
is used to determine whether an increasing signal opens or closes the valve.

Position Fault Limits
You can configure how position errors are handled. A position error occurs when the valve
position differs from the requested position (from the input signal in Normal mode or the
manual setpoint in Manual mode) by more than the Position Error Band for more than the
Position Error Time 1. When this occurs, a status flag is set which is reported during the next
HART message (only that a flag is set is reported. You must send a Read Status message to
find out the cause of the status flag). If the error persists for Position Error Time 2, the valve is
put in failsafe position. This latter action can be disabled by unchecking the enable box next to
the Time 2 entry.
For practical considerations, Time 2 (if enabled) must be larger than Time 1 by at least two
seconds. Time 1 must be at least as long as the time required to open the valve fully or
unnecessary position errors are reported. The maximum time is 327 seconds.

Language
The SVI II AP can display its menu in English or French. The ValVue program is not affected.

108

Configure Screen

Pressure Units

Pressure Units
You can select the units in which the actuator pressure is reported: psi, bar, or kPa.

Configure I/O
Use the Configure screen to set up the Inputs and Outputs.

Accessing Configure I/O
When the user clicks on the Configure I/O button on the Configure screen ValVue launches
the I/O configure window shown below. In the Configure I/O window you can change the
following configuration parameters:
“Output Switches (DO)” on page 110
“Digital Input (DI)” on page 111
“Input Signal Range (AI)” on page 111
“Position Retransmit (AO)” on page 111
To configure the inputs and outputs:
1. Click Configure I/O.

Figure 80 Launching Configure I/O

109

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
The I/O Configure window appears (Figure 81).

2. Adjust the parameters and click OK to save changes and return to the Configure screen.

Figure 81

I/O Configure Window

Output Switches (DO)
The SVI II AP supports two identical contact outputs which can be logically linked to status
bits. The two output switches can be opened or closed in response to conditions that the SVI II
AP detects. These conditions are:
0.
Always Normal
Position

The switch is not controlled by the SVI II AP and remains in it’s default
position. The two digital output switches can be opened or closed in
response to detected conditions. The default configuration setting is
Always Normal Position, where normal is closed, which means that
the switch will not switch for any valve travel. To activate the switch
at a given valve position, configure the switch Position Low Limit or
Position High Limit.

1.

Failsafe

The switch is activated when the SVI II AP is in failsafe mode.

2.

Reset

The switch is activated whenever a reset has occurred and the
switch remains activated until the SVI II AP status is cleared.

3.

Position Error

The switch is activated whenever a position error has occurred and is
deactivated when the position recovers to the correct position.

4.

Tight Shutoff Active

The switch is activated whenever the device is in tight shutoff (tight
shutoff is on and the valve position is less than the tight shutoff position).

5.

Position Low Limit

The switch is activated whenever the valve position is less than the
position setting of this switch control.

110

Configure Screen

Digital Input (DI)
CAUTION

6.

Position Upper Limit The switch is activated whenever the valve position is greater than
the position setting of this switch control.
CAUTION

7.

If both Position Low Limit and Tight Shut Off are used, the
Position Low Limit must be above the Tight Shut Off.

Manual Mode

If both Position High Limit and Full Open Above are used, the
Position High Limit must be below the Full Open Above.

The switch is activated whenever the SVI II AP is in manual mode,
configure mode, calibrate mode, or diagnostic mode.

The switch can be configured to default as normally open or normally closed.
NOTE

The contacts are OPEN when the SVI II AP is unpowered and
may be made to be open or closed when the flag is asserted
after boot.

Digital Input (DI)
The SVI II AP can receive a digital signal that is used by the positioner software. You can
enable the digital input by clicking in the checkbox.

Input Signal Range (AI)
Use this parameter to adjust the current range Input Signal low and high signal values. The
low value must between 3.8 and 14 mA and the high value must be between 8 and 20.2 mA.

Position Retransmit (AO)
The SVI II AP has the ability to retransmit the position signal as an output to another device
with 4 - 20 mA current output proportional to position. The 4-20 retransmit is galvanically
isolated from the 4-20 input on the main board.

111

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Burst Settings
The Burst mode is when the HART device continuously sends out data for a device not capable
of being polled by a Master. Use this mode only for devices that are passive (i.e. not a HART
master), such as a HART to Analog converter. Turning on Burst mode in cases where it is not
required affects the communication bandwidth.
To configure Burst Settings:
1. Place the unit into Setup mode.
2. Click Burst Settings and Figure 82 appears.

Figure 82

Burst Settings

3. Use the Burst Mode pulldown to select On.
4. Use the Burst Command pulldown to select the required command:
Cmd1: PV
Cmd2: %range/current
Cmd3: Dyn vars/current
Cmd9: Device vars w/status (only applies to SVI II AP HART 6 (firmware 411))
Cmd33: Device variables (only applies to SVI II AP HART 6 (firmware 411))
5. If using:
Cmd9 or Cmd33: Choose the variables for the burst command and the order for
command variables to be returned using the four Burst Variable pulldowns. There are
15 variables:

112

Configure Screen

Configure Context Menu
Position

P2

P1-P2

Supply Pressure

Setpoint

Signal

DO2

DO1

Temperature

DI

Raw Position

VoltsInput

Num Strokes

Num Cycles

Pos Retransmit

Then click OK.
Any other command click OK.
A dialog appears.
6. Click OK and then Apply.

Configure Context Menu
Right-click on the Configure screen, a context menu shown in Figure 83 appears.

Figure 83 Configure Screen Context Menu
The following items are on the Configure context menu.
Custom Linearization - Recomputes the position scale so that when the open stop
adjustment is edited, and is only a percent of the full stops, ValVue reads and display
the edited open stop adjustment as 100%
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the anchored screen format and
creates a separate trend display
Help - Displays the help file at the Configure screen instructions

113

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Custom Linearization
When mounted on a reciprocating valve, a small non-linearity in the reported valve position
versus actual valve position may result from the linkage configuration. This non-linearity can
be corrected using a custom characterization that matches the specific linkage used. The
custom linearization procedure automatically generates this custom characterization.
Custom characterization must be the selected configuration option to use the generated
curve.
Two types of linkages are modeled: simple and compound. Most Masoneilan linkages use the
compound linkage system.
1. Right-click and select Custom Linearization and Figure 84 appears.

Figure 84

Custom Linearization Dialog

Levers

You can customize both simple and compound lever.

Simple Lever

The simple lever has the pivot point (the potentiometer in the SVI II
AP) mounted a fixed distance (L1) from the valve stem pickup point.
In order to compute the proper correction curve, the stroke length,
the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup point and the
valve position at horizontal must be entered. Click Simple to compute the correction and displays the curve.

114

Configure Screen

Custom Linearization
Compound Lever

The compound lever linkage has two lever segments attached at
one end to the pivot and the other end to the valve stem pickup
point. In order to compute the proper correction curve, you must
enter the stroke length, first lever segment length (L1), second lever
segment length (L2), the distance from the pivot to the valve stem
pickup (L3), the valve position at horizontal. Click Compound to
compute the correction and display the curve.
Most Masoneilan linkages use a linkage with L3 equal to L1, i.e. the
second lever arm is vertical when the first lever arm is horizontal.
The correction computation correctly computes the correction
curve when L3 is not equal to L1, however L3 must be greater than
0 which requires that the valve stem pickup not be lined up with
the pivot and that the pickup be on the same side of the pivot as
the link between the first and second lever segments.

2. Enter all lever parameters, click on the lever type (Compound lever in Figure 85).

Figure 85

Selecting Lever Type

ValVue displays the rotation angle for the custom linearization.
3. Click OK to continue.

Figure 86

Rotation Angle Dialog

115

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
The custom linearization in a custom characterization graph appears (Figure 87).

Figure 87

Custom Linearization Graph

4. Click OK to save and return to the Configure screen.
Figure 88 appears.

Figure 88 Saving Custom Linear Characterization
5. Click OK to save the custom characterization data.

Applying Configuration Changes
After you have made all the necessary configuration changes you must apply the changes at
the top level of the Configure screen.
To apply all configuration changes:
Click Apply and any changes made in the Configure or Calibrate screens are written
immediately to the SVI II AP.

116

4

Trend Screen

What you can do on the Trend Screen
Use the Trend screen (Figure 89) to observe the valve real time performance. The process trend
graph is useful for troubleshooting a control valve and for tuning the PID positioning parameters.
As the X axis is defined in seconds, the process trend graphs are zoomed only on the Y axis.
The process trend graph can be detached as a separate window from the tabbed dialog for
viewing while performing calibration and diagnostic tasks. To detach the trend:
Right-click in any screen and select Detach Trend.
In manual mode, drag the position indicator to change the valve position.

Figure 89

Trend Screen

117

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend Graph Features
Turn the display of any of the curves on the Trend graph by checking or unchecking these
boxes:
Position - blue
Manual Setpoint - black
Signal Setpoint - red
Pressure - green (SVI, SVI II, SVI II AP with Advanced Diagnostics
Trend - Y Low/High

Set the Y axis (position) of the Trend graph by entering the values in
these edit boxes and hit tab to set the scale. Change the axis with the
mouse by zooming and return to the original scale by right-clicking
in the graph.

Figure 90

Selecting Area of Trend to Zoom

118

Trend Screen

Trend Graph Features

Figure 91

Area of Trend with Zoom View

Position

Shows the position of the valve is in percentage of valve opening.
0% is always closed and 100% is open. Because the travel of a
valve can exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100%
are possible (see “Open Stop Adjustment” on page 61).

Signal

Indicates the input analog signal expressed in percentage of the
configured signal range.

119

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend Context Menu
When the user right clicks on the grey area of the Trend screen (but not in the graph area), a
context menu shown in Figure 92 appears:
Refresh Graph - Restarts the sampling of the trend graph.
Stop Graph - Stops the sampling of the trend graph. It can be restarted by selecting
Refresh Graph.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Trend screen instructions

Figure 92

Trend Context Menu

120

Calibrate Screen

What you can do on the Calibrate Screen
From the Calibrate screen (Figure 93) you can calibrate:
Signal
Pressure
Advanced Parameters (PID Position tuning parameters)
Valve Travel

Figure 93 Calibrate Screen

121

5

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Signal Calibration Procedure
Use the Calibrate screen to recalibrate the signal sensor in the SVI II AP. The sensor is
calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog
provides a convenient method.
NOTE

The Reset to Factory selection in the Calibrate right click menu
returns the calibrations to those that were set at the factory.

The currently measured value of the primary input is displayed and can be compared to
reference signals to see if recalibration is necessary. Calibrating the primary signal can be
done most easily with a variable current source.
ValVue allows you to perform a low signal and high signal calibration.

Low Signal Value Calibration
1. Click Calib. Signal (Figure 94).

Figure 94

Starting Signal Calibration

Figure 95 appears indicating that the calibration will be changed.

122

Calibrate Screen

Low Signal Value Calibration

Figure 95

Starting Signal Calibration

2. Click OK and Figure 96 appears with a field to enter the low or high signal value.

Figure 96

Signal Calibration Dialog

3. Enter a low value Signal Value (from 3.5 and 8.0 mA) and click Set as Low Value.

Figure 97 Setting Signal Low Value
NOTE

Enter a low signal value outside the 3.5 to 8.0 range and
Figure 98 appears. Click OK and re-enter the value.

Figure 98

Low Signal Calibration Warning

123

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

High signal Value Calibration
1. Click Calib. Signal (Figure 94).
A dialog appears indicating that the calibration will be changed (Figure 95).
2. Click OK to continue.
A dialog appears with a blank field for entering the low or high signal value, in mA
(Figure 96).
3. Enter the high value (between 16.0 and 21.0 mA) in the Signal Value field. Click Set as High
Value.

Figure 99 Setting Signal High Value
NOTE

If you enter a low signal value outside the range of 16.0 to 21.0
mA, ValVue issues a warning (Figure 98). Click OK to continue and
re-enter a value.

Figure 100

High Signal Calibration Warning

124

Calibrate Screen

Pressure Calibration Procedure

Pressure Calibration Procedure
WARNING

Prior to performing pressure calibration all air must be turned
off and all pressures vented. This procedure references a
measuring instrument capable of reading +/- 0.01 psig.

Use the Calibrate screen to recalibrate the pressure sensor in the SVI II AP. The sensor is
calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog
provides a convenient method.
The currently measured value of pressure is displayed and can be compared to reference
pressures to see if recalibration is necessary.
To recalibrate the pressure sensor:
1. Click Calib. Pressure (Figure 101).

Figure 101

Starting Pressure Calibration

125

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
A dialog appears (Figure 102).

Figure 102

Calibrate Pressure Dialog

2. Click Yes to continue.
After calibrating the pressure sensors Figure 103 appears.

Figure 103 Pressure Calibration Changed Dialog
3. Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Calibrate screen.
NOTE

If ValVue detects an error when performing pressure calibration,
the calibration aborts and the dialog displayed in Figure 104.
Click OK to close the dialog and return to the Calibrate screen.
Troubleshoot the problem prior to performing pressure calibration
a second time.

Figure 104

Calibration Failure Dialog

126

Calibrate Screen

Advanced Parameters

Advanced Parameters
You can fine tune the SVI II AP using the Advanced Parameters dialog to adjust:
Dead Zone
Beta
Position Compensation Coefficient
Boost
Stroke Time
To adjust the advanced parameters:
1. Click Advanced Parameters (Figure 105).

Figure 105

Starting Advanced Parameters

127

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
The Advanced Tuning Parameters dialog appears (Figure 106). Refer to Table 7 for
parameter descriptions.

Figure 106

Advanced Parameters Dialog

Table 7 Advanced Tuning Parameters
Tuning Parameter

Description

Dead Zone

When the valve position is within the setpoint +/- the dead zone, no additional position control is performed. This value is normally 0%, however for high friction valves
(e.g. valves with graphite packing) a higher dead zone (%) helps avoid limit cycling
due to the stick/slip action of the valve. In these cases the dead zone chosen might
be 0.5% to 1%. Range: 0 and 5%.

Beta

Beta is nonlinear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is 0, the position controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is function of error. The larger the Beta, the
smaller the gain for small error. Typical values for a valve position controller is 7 or 8.

Position Compensation
Coefficient

The response of a valve is different when it is nearly closed than when it is nearly
open. The position compensation coefficient, a number between 2 and 20, allows
you to make adjustments to try to equalize the valve response. The normal value is 6.

Boost

The boost field in the PID adjustments controls a supplemental pressure or boost to
speed up initial valve response. Valve response is the amount of time it takes for the
valve to go from setpoint to 100%

Stroke Time

Amount of time in seconds required for the valve to be completely stroked.

128

Calibrate Screen

Calibrate Context Menu

Calibrate Context Menu
Right-click on the Calibrate screen and a context menu appears (Figure 107).
NOTE

Most functions available in the Calibrate context menu are used
for advanced setup and are only accessible when ValVue is in
the setup mode. Refer to “Advanced Setup with ValVue” on
page 57 of this manual for further instructions.

Figure 107

Calibrate Screen Context Menu

The following items are on the Calibrate context menu.
Run Find Stops - Runs the automatic position calibration process.
Manual Find Stops - Sets the position calibration by moving the valve full closed and
full open. On very large valves, the automatic find stops routine may timeout before
the valve has reached the end of travel. Manual find stops allows calibration of these
valves.
Open Stop Adjustment - Recomputes the position scale so that at the value entered in
the open stop adjustment edit box as a percent of full stops, the position reads 100%
Run Auto Tune - Automatically finds appropriate PID parameters for the valve.
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command works by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.

129

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command works by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Set Valve Position - Sets the valve to a specific position (this is accomplished by
momentarily returning to manual mode, repositioning the valve, and returning to setup
mode).
Reset to Factory Cal - Resets the signal and pressure calibration to their factory
settings.
Live Tuning - Enables/disables live tuning and sets the Max Live % of the original value.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Calibrate screen instructions.

Reset to Factory Cal
Resetting Factory Calibration restores the calibration data for all sensors.
To reset calibration parameters:
1. Select Reset to Factory Cal from the Calibrate context menu and Figure 108 appears.

Figure 108 Reset to Factory Cal Dialog
2. Click OK and Figure 109 appears.

Figure 109 Reset to Factory Cal Confirmation Dialog

130

Calibrate Screen

Live Tuning

Live Tuning
In Normal mode, experienced users can tune PID parameters. Only experienced users should
use this feature.
To do this:
1. Click Live Tuning and Figure 110 appears.

Figure 110

Live Tuning Wizard

2. Configure the desired parameters and click Apply. The dialog closes and the
parameters are applied.

Applying Calibration Screen Changes
After making all necessary calibration changes, you must apply the changes at the top level
of the Calibrate screen. To apply all calibration changes:
Click Apply to save any changes made immediately to the SVI II AP.

131

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Diagnostics Screen

6

What you can do on the Diagnostics Screen
The Diagnostics screen (Figure 111) displays positioner Tag information and the current
continuous diagnostics information (updated every time the Diagnostics screen is selected). It
provides access to the diagnostic tests, and displays test results in the Results area.
From the Diagnostics screen you can run Standard Actuator Signature, Step Response, Ramp,
and Extended Actuator Signature tests.

Diagnostic Tests

Tag Information

Continuous Diagnostics

Diagnostics Results Window

Figure 111

Diagnostics Screen

133

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Tag Information
The Diagnostics screen displays the Tag information for the active SVI II AP. The Tag
information is display only on the Diagnostics screen. Change Tag info on the Monitor or
Configure screens.

Continuous Diagnostics
The Continuous Diagnostics window displays the continuous diagnostic data including:
Strokes: Number of full strokes the valve has made
Cycles: Number of cycles (direction changes)
Time Open: Time the valve has spent open
Time Closed: Time the valve has been closed
Time Near Closed: Time the valve has spent throttling near the seat

Diagnostic Tests
The SVI II AP allows four diagnostic tests to be performed:
Standard Actuator Signature (/AD)
Step Test (ISD, /AD)
Ramp Test (ISD, /AD)
Extended Actuator Signature (/AD)

Performing Diagnostic Tests
To perform a diagnostic test:
1. Select the test to perform.
2. Adjust the test parameters, if necessary.
3. Click Perform Diag.
After you first run a diagnostic test, the Diagnostic Graph appears (Figure 112) and three
buttons appear on the main Diagnostics screen:
View Current Diag ( “View Current Diag” on page 135)
Save Diag ( “Save Diag” on page 135)
View Saved Diag ( “View Saved Diag” on page 136)

134

Diagnostics Screen

Performing Diagnostic Tests

Figure 112

Diagnostic Graph

View Current Diag
After performing a diagnostic test and returning to the Diagnostics screen, you can view the
current diagnostic graph again:
Click View Current Diag and the Diagnostic Graph appears.
Save Diag
After performing a diagnostic test and returning to the Diagnostics screen, you can save the
diagnostic graph and data:
1. Click Save Current Diag and a Windows browser appears.
2. Locate the folder in which to save the diagnostic graph and data (.dgn format).

135

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

View Saved Diag
You can view previously saved diagnostic graphs and data. To view saved diagnostics:
1. Click View Saved Diag and an empty Diagnostic Graph appears.
2. Click Select Curve and a dialog containing a list of signature locations appears
(Figure 113).

Figure 113

Choose Signature Curve

3. Choose the type of saved signature curve for viewing, click OK and, if appropriate, a
Windows browser to locate the file appears.
4. Select a curve is selected, the graph appears in the Diagnostic Graph window.

136

Diagnostics Screen

Standard Actuator Signature (Std.

Standard Actuator Signature (Std. Actuator Sig.)
The Standard Actuator Signature test is a response time test that measures the time for the
valve to go from full closed to full open and the time for the valve to go from full open to full
closed. For an SVI II AP/AD this test measures the friction, spring range and response time.
To run the diagnostic:
1. Select Std. Actuator Sig.
2. Enter a Speed Level, if required. The speed level is the rate of speed at which the test is
performed, with 1 being the slowest and 10 being the fastest. The default speed level is
4.
3. Click Perform Diag.

Speed Level

Figure 114

Performing Standard Actuator Signature Test

137

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

4. During the Standard Actuator Signature test, a dialog Figure 115 appears indicating
running time.

Figure 115

Standard Actuator Signature Test Progress

When the Standard Actuator Signature diagnostics complete Figure 116 appears with the
elapsed time shown.

Figure 116

Standard Actuator Signature Test Complete

138

Diagnostics Screen

Standard Actuator Signature (Std.
5. Click Continue and Figure 117 appears.

During the Standard Actuator Signature test, the positioner is slowly moved from the
starting position to the ending position and back and the two curves (up and down) are
measured and displayed in the Diagnostic Graph.

Data Points

Select Curve
Signature 1
Select curve
Signature 2

Figure 117

Standard Actuator Signature Diagnostics Graph

Diagnostic Graph Features
There are several features on the Diagnostic Graphs that allow you to view and save
diagnostic data:
“Show Data Points”
“Export to Excel” on page 140
“Capture to Clipboard” on page 140
“Print Report” on page 140
“Select Curves” on page 140
“Show Diagnostic Info” on page 141
Show Data Points
Select Show Data Points and the Diagnostic Graph displays a tick mark on the graph for all
available data points as shown in Figure 117.

139

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Export to Excel
Select Export to Excel and Excel opens with the Diagnostic Graph data exported into an Excel
spreadsheet. You must then save the data as an Excel file.
NOTE

If there is no curve displayed in the graph ValVue displays an error
message No curves to export.

Capture to Clipboard
Select Capture to Clipboard and ValVue captures the diagnostic graph to the Windows
clipboard. Open any Windows program that can process images, such as Microsoft Word or
WordPad, and paste the image of the diagnostic graph.
Print Report
Select Print Report and ValVue captures a report and opens it in your Report Setup selection,
which you can then print or save.
Select Curves
You can view two positioner signatures in addition to the current signature. The two other
signatures, represented by blue and black curves, can be displayed in the Diagnostic Graph.
To select a curve:
1. Click Select Curve (Figure 117 on page 139).
Figure 118 appears.

Figure 118

Select Curve Dialog

140

Diagnostics Screen

Standard Actuator Signature (Std.

2. Select the signature type and click OK. If the signature curve is from a file ValVue
launches a Windows browser to locate the file. The signature curve appears in the
Diagnostic Graph window.

Figure 119

Select Baseline Signature from Dump File

Show Diagnostic Info
Diagnostic Info accesses a dialog that displays the diagnostic information gathered for the
selected signatures.
To show diagnostic info:
1. Click Show Diagnostic Info (Figure 120). The Diagnostic Graph shows the current curve
and a selected saved curve, Signature 1, in blue.

Figure 120

Show Diagnostic Info

141

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
The Diagnostic Information dialog appears displaying the data for the curves in the
Diagnostic Graph (Figure 121).

Figure 121

Diagnostic Information

2. Click OK to close the dialog.

Step Test
The Step Test produces a time vs. position graph where the valve is submitted to a stepped
input. The graph can contain data for 2 to 60 seconds of data with data taken up to every 0.05
seconds. The step profile may contain multiple steps. To run a step profile, you must enter the
starting position, the ending position, the pause between each step, the step size, and
whether or not to measure both up and down steps.
The step test starts at the starting position and makes steps according to the size specified in
step until the ending position is reached. For each step, the SVI II AP measures the position at
even time intervals for the amount of time specified in time. If 2-way is specified, when the
end position is reached, the procedure is repeated from the end position to the start position.
To run the Step Test:
1. Click Step Test. The test parameters become active to the right of Diagnostic Tests.
2. If necessary, adjust the following parameters:
Start Position (%)

Stop Position (%)

Time (s)

Sample Rate
(samples/s)

Step Size (%)

One Way or Two Way

142

Diagnostics Screen

Step Test
3. Click Perform Diag.
While the test is running, a progress dialog appears (Figure 122).

Figure 122

Step Test Running

On completion of the test a Signature Complete message appears.
4. Click Continue to close the dialog. The Step Test Diagnostic Graph appears (Figure 123).

Figure 123

Diagnostics Graph for Step Test

5. View/save the graph (refer to “Diagnostic Graph Features” on page 139) and click on
Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.

143

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Diagnostic Info for Step Test
Click Show Diagnostic Info displays the analysis for each step (Figure 123).

Figure 124

Step Test Diagnostic Information (Diag Info)

Ramp Test
The Ramp Test produces a position vs. input signal graph for both increasing and decreasing
signal. The signal is a simulated signal so linearity cannot be checked.
1. Select Ramp Test and Ramp Test parameters become active to the right of the Diagnostic
Tests.
2. If necessary, adjust the following parameters:
Start Signal (mA)
Stop Signal (mA)
Number of Samples
3. Click Perform Diag. Figure 125 appears.

Figure 125

Ramp Test Running

144

Diagnostics Screen

Ramp Test
On completion Figure 126 appears.

Figure 126

Ramp Test Complete

4. Click Continue to close the dialog.
The Ramp Test Diagnostic Graph appears (Figure 127).

Figure 127

Ramp Test Diagnostic Graph

5. View/save the graph and click Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.

145

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Extended Actuator Signature (Extended Act. Sig.)
The extended actuator signature slowly ramps the pressure to the actuator up and down over
a user-selected position range and measures the position vs. pressure. The signature is useful
for determining valve friction and for identifying performance problems at specific valve
positions. To perform this test:
1. Select Extended Act. Sig.
2. Adjust the Start Position, Stop Position and Speed Level parameters, if necessary.
3. Click Perform Diag.

Figure 128

Performing Extended Actuator Signature Diagnostic Test

Figure 129 appears.

Figure 129 Extended Actuator Signature Test Complete

146

Diagnostics Screen

Diagnostics Context Menu
When the test is complete, the dialog indicates completion.
4. Click Continue to close the dialog.
The Extended Actuator Diagnostic Graph appears (Figure 130).

Figure 130

Extended Actuator Signature Test Diagnostic Graph

5. View/edit/save the graph and click Close to return to the Diagnostics screen.

Diagnostics Context Menu
The Diagnostics context, right click menu is displayed below and contains the following
selections:
View Diagnostic Graph - Displays the diagnostic graph from the most recent
diagnostic test.
Save Diagnostic Data to File - Launches Windows browser to select or create data
file, for saving diagnostic data.
Save Signature in SVI II AP - Saves the current signature in SVI II AP, that can be
recalled from Select Curve in the Diagnostic Graph.
Reset Continuous Diagnostics - Resets the continuous diagnostics.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the on-line help at the Diagnostics screen instructions.

147

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 131

Diagnostics Context Menu

Reset Continuous Diagnostics
This function sets the historical counters to 0.
To reset continuous diagnostics:
1. Select Reset Continuous Diagnostics from the Diagnostics context menu and Figure 132
appears.
2. Click OK.

Figure 132

Diagnostics Reset Continuous Diagnostics Dialog

148

7

Status Screen

What you can do on the SVI II AP Status Screen
Use the Status screen to see the operating and internal status of the SVI II AP and reset the
Current Fault or All Faults (Current and Historical). The screen is divided into three separate
sections for Operation, Firmware, and Circuit where:
Green indicates no faults
Yellow indicates error conditions that can occur in normal operation (not faults) that may
presently exist or have historically existed
Red indicates a fault.

Figure 133 SVI II AP Status Screen

149

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Clear Current Faults
Click Clear Current Faults to reset the status in the SVI II AP for all current faults only. The
buttons on the Status screen indicating the current faults revert to green, if the condition is no
longer valid.

Clear All Faults
Click Clear All Faults to reset the status bit in the SVI II AP for all faults, both historical and
current. The buttons on the Status screen indicating the current and historical faults revert to
green.

Status Code List
Fault Definitions
Table 8 lists a definition for each indicated device fault and recommended actions.
Table 8
FAULT Name

Fault Matrix

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

RESET

Reset

Device reset
indicator

LOW_
POWER

Low Power

Input current <
3.2 mA

ACTUATOR

Actuator Error

Unable to posi- 2
tion the valve
normally.

AIR_SUPPLY_L
OW

Low Air
Supply
Warning

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

3

Device reboot. The power
recovered. Incoming signal
was below 2.9 mA.

Reset the flag using ValVue
or HART Host.

3

Device power is below
3.2 mA.

Increase mA only if calibration or diagnostics are to
be performed.

1: Air supply is insufficient.
2: Handwheel or mechanical stop present.

1: Increase air supply
above spring final value +
10 psig.

3: Valve stuck of sticking
excessively.

2: Verify if mechanical stop
is present.

4: Unbalance forces on
valve trim exceeds actuator capability.

3: Perform valve signature
using ValVue.

Air supply is not turned on
or is set below 10 psig.

Increase air supply above
spring final value + 10 psig.

Supply
2
Pressure below
low limit

150

4: If possible, perform valve
signature under process
conditions. Validate sizing
of actuator against process condition using ValSpeQ.

Status Screen

Status Code List
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
POSITION_
ERROR

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

Position Error

If T1 error is
configured
AND the position error outside the error
band for time
T1.

2

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1. Controller is slow to follow command signal due to
physical valve wear, such as
tight packing, stem build up,
throttling surface friction or
actuator friction.

1: Perform valve signature
using ValVue.

2. Valve is slow to follow
command signal due to
large volume actuator.

2: Perform step test signature using ValVue. Verify
that air supply droop during filling is less than 15 %
or the set pressure.

3: Validate that the air supply set to the instrument is
3: Valve will not follow com- greater that the spring
mand signal due to insuffi- final + 10 psig.
cient or no air supply.
4: Set the mode to Normal
4: Valve does not move
because the device's mode
is not set to Normal.

using ValVue or HART Host.

5: Perform Autotune or
Manual tuning using Val5:. Valve will not follow com- Vue or HART Host.
mand signal due to poor
6: Verify if Bias Out Range
controller tuning for current or I/P Out of Range events
valve status.
are active.
6: Valve will not follow com- 7: Perform valve signature
mand signal due to control- using ValVue.
ler malfunction such as I/P
or Relay.
7: Valve will not follow command signal due to inline
obstruction.
I2CBUS
KEYPAD

Keypad Fault

Possible moisture inside or
connector or
mechanical
failure.

MARGINAL_PO Marginal
WER
Power

CALIBRATION_
FAILED

Calibration
Failed

Calibration of
AO or pressure
failed.

2

The local user interface and
display is defective.

Replace the local user
interface and display
assembly.

2

The input current is less
than 3.85 mA.

Increase loop current to 4
mA only if calibration and
diagnostics are to be performed.

3

Calibration of the input sensors was outside the
acceptable range when
attempting to calibrate.

Using precision measuring
equipment, perform calibration according to
boundary limits of input
sensors.

151

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)

FAULT Name
FIND_STOPS_F
AILED

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

Find Stops
Failed

Find Stops pro- 3
cess failed.

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1: When calibrating stops
(Zero / Span) the travel sensor moved outside the
acceptable limits.

1: Using ValVue or HART
Host, verify that travel sensor counts is 0 +/– 1000
with the valve closed. For a
90° valve, measured sensor count is done at 50%
travel.

2: A procedure timeout
occurred due to an
extremely large volume of
actuator to displace.
3: Valve position could not
stabilize when deenergizing or when energizing the
actuator.

AUTOTUNE_FAI Autotune
LED
Failed

Self tuning
failed to converge on
acceptable
parameters.

3

1: When performing an
Autotune, procedure failed
to complete due valve hysteresis beyond 50 %.
2: Air supply is insufficient.
3: Air supply droops significantly during actuator filling.

2: Using ValVue or HART
Host, performs a Manual
Stop calibration.
3: Verify that air supply is
adequate. Verify that
accessories (boosters,
quick exhausts, etc.) are
not creating instability.
1: Using ValVue or HART
Host, perform an Autotune with an aggressiveness level between 2 and 4.
Or manual tune the
parameters according to
the instruction manual.
2: Increase air supply
above spring final value +
10 psig.
3: Perform 5 to 10 % steps
and observe air supply
gauge on the controller.

Std DiagnosSTD_
DIAGNOSTICS_ tics Failed
FAILED

Ext DiagnosEXT_
DIAGNOSTICS_ tics Failed.
FAILED

3

3

When running a Standard
Actuator Signature, the
device failed to move the
valve between 10 % to 90
%.

1: Selected speed is too
slow. Increase speed for
the test by increments of 1.

When running a Extended
Actuator Signature, device
failed to move the valve
between the configured
travel.

1: Selected speed is too
slow. Increase the speed
for the test by increments
of 1.

152

2: Insufficient Air supply.

2: Insufficient air supply.

Status Screen

Status Code List
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

RTOS_
SCHEDULING

2
Operating Sys- An internal
tem Fault.
error from
which the
device recovered automatically

SUPPLY_
HIGH

High Air
Supply
Warning

Supply Pressure above
upper limit.

1

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1:A failure in the air filter
regulator occurred.

1: Replace air filter regulator.

2: A nearby equipment
drawing a high volume,
suddenly quit using air and
created a spike in air supply.

2: Resize air manifold.
3:Adjust threshold to be 3
to 5 psig greater than set
air supply.

3: The air set is adjusted
greater than configured
threshold.
1

The servo signal to the current to pressure converter is
outside of normal throttling
range.

IP_OUT_OF_RA I/P Out Of
NGE
Range

1
I/P current
feedback is out
of range.

The loop current to the
internal current to pressure
converter is outside of normal range.

TEMPR_OUT_O Temp. Out Of
F_RANGE
Range

Temperature
outside operating range.

BIAS_OUT_
OF_RANGE

Bias Out Of
Range

An important
internal
parameter is
out of range.

DI_
ABNORMAL

2

The board temperature is
below –40 °C or above
85 °C.

NOT IMPLEMENTED

A permanent corruption of
the content in non volatile
memory occurred.

1: Remove power to the
device for 2 minutes and
restart the device.

3

LATCH_
FSAFE
TIGHT_SHUTO
FF
NVM_CHECKS
UM0

NVM Checksum Error

The device
failed to read
critical data
from non volatile memory.

1

2: If the failure persist,
replace the device.

153

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)

FAULT Name

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

RAM_CHECKS
UM

RAM Checksum Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

A corruption of the content
in volatile memory
occurred.

Notify the factory at svisupport@GE.com.

FW_
CHECKSUM

Flash Checksum Error

A critical internal fault.

Invalid firmware checksum
due to data corruption.

1: Remove power to the
device for 2 minutes and
restart it.

1

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

2: If the failure persists,
Replace device.
STACK

Stack Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

A problem with the memory
stack occurred.

Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

FACTORYWRITE

Factory Write
Indicator

Indicator of
writes to non
volatile memory allowed
only for firmware upgrade.

1

NVM_TEST

NVM Test Error An error in non
volatile memory could not
be repaired.

2

A problem occurred when
testing non volatile memory.

Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

0

ESD Trip
occurred and
requires user
intervention to
be released.
1

Device is in the factory
mode.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

A component problem is
affecting the circuit board's
reference voltage.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

FACTORYMODE Factory Mode
Indicator

Device performs factory
authorized
operations.

REF_
VOLTAGE

May indicate
1
faulty A/D subsystem.

Ref Voltage
Fault

154

Status Screen

Status Code List
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

Probable Cause

Recommended Action
Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

POSITION_
SENSOR

Position Sensor
Fault

1

Electronic Hall sensor component and related components failed.

CURRENT_
SENSOR

Current Sensor Fault

1

Electronic input loop current Replace device and report
sensor is damaged.
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

TEMPERATURE
_SENSOR

Temperature
Sensor Fault

1

Electronic temperature sen- Replace device and report
sor is damaged.
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2

Secondary input current
sensor is damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

1
Output Pressure Sensor
Fault (Single
acting) or Output 2 Pressure
Sensor Fault
(double acting).

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

Supply Pressure Sensor
Fault (Single
acting) or Output 1 Pressure
Sensor Fault
(double acting)

1

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Supply Pressure Sensor
Fault (double
acting only)

1

CURRENT_
SENSOR_
2ND
PRESSURE1

PRESSURE2

PRESSURE3

PRESSURE4

Pressure 1
Fault

Pressure 2
Fault

Pressure 3
Fault

I/P Pressure
Sensor Fault

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
1

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.
2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.

155

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)

FAULT Name
PRESSURE5

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Atmospheric
Pressure Sensor Fault

Critic
ality
2

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
WATCHDOG_TI Watchdog
MEOUT
timeout

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

NVM_WRITE
NVM

A write to non
volatile memory failed; data
may be lost on
reset.

IRQ_FAULT

NVM Write
Fault

IRQ Fault

2

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

TMOUT_
FLASH_TEST

Flash ROM Test The test didn't
timeout
complete in
time.

2

SELF_
CHECK

MCU Internal
Malfunction

1

A critical internal fault.

n/a

NOT IMPLEMENTED

An error occurred when
attempting to write to non
volatile memory.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

The circuit board interrupt
request failed.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

A general self check failed.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.
2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

SOFTWARE

Software Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

Operating system failed in
conducting a task.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.
2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

156

Status Screen

Status Code List
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Critic
ality

ESD_TRIP

ESD Valve
Tripped

An ESD trip
event is present.

1

AI_PV_LOW

AI_PV_LOW

An ESD trajectory signature
is available for
retrieving.

2

n/a

Not Implemented

AI_PV_HIGH

AI_PV_HIGH

An error saving 2
ESD signature,
not necessarily the latest.

n/a

Not Implemented

IP_SERVO_
LOW

IP_SERVO_
LOW

Last completed PST
failed.

1: The required I/P current is
too low to ensure venting of
the relay.

1,2,3: Service required.
Contact the factory.

1

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

2: The I/P flexure is pushed
against the
nozzle.
3: Faulty I/P flow regulator
IP_SERVO_
HIGH

IP_SERVO_
HIGH

A new PST trajectory signature and data
are available
for retrieving.

2

1: The required I/P current is
too high to maintain output
pressure to actuator.
2: The I/P flexure is pushed
away from the nozzle

An error saving 2
PST signature,
not necessarily the latest.

0

DIAGPROC1

Diag Proc1

Last completed Pneumatic Test
failed.

2

RANGE1

Range 1

The I/P cut off
switch is not
functional.

2

RANGE2

Range 2

2

157

1, 2: Service required. Contact the factory.

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 8 Fault Matrix (Continued)

FAULT Name
LINKAGE_DRIF
T

VALVE_
STUCK_
CLOSED

VALVE_
STUCK_
OPENED

TEXT For DD &
ValVue

HELP For DD &
ValVue

Linkage Drift

Valve Stuck
Closed

Valve Stuck
Opened

Critic
ality
2

Measured friction is below
customer
specified
range.

2

Measured friction is above
customer
specified
range.

2

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1:In the fully open or fully
closed position a raw travel
sensor count deviation of
x% exists against the calibrated stop value.

1: Verify that linkage is well
fastened.

1: A handwheel is left
engaged.

1: Verify presence of a
mechanical stops such as
a handwheel.

2: Valve is seized in place.
3: Insufficient actuator
thrust.

2: Repair valve.

1: A handwheel is left
engaged.

1: Verify presence of a
mechanical stops such as
a hand wheel.

2: Valve is seized in place.
3: Exhaust port is clogged
up (no venting).
4: An accessory prevents
the air from the actuator to
be vented.

2

UI_OFF

UI_OFF

Pressure to
move valve is
greater than
customer
specified
range.

RANGE3

Range 3

2
Supply pressure drop
exceeds a customer specified value.

RANGE4

Range 4

PST canceled
before completion.

2: Re run the Find Stops
method. When device goes
in Failsafe when running
the Find Stop method,
clear alarm and rerun the
stops.

2

158

3: Run a PST or Extended
signature. If friction is
abnormal then overhaul
valve.

2: Repair valve.
3: Verify that exhaust port
is not restricted.
4: Run a TBT test from ValVue. A failure of the TBT
test would indicate a problem in venting.

Status Screen

Status Code List
HART Device Status Command Bytes

Table 9 lists all Bytes and their correlating fault bits in the HART Device Status Command.
Table 9
LCD
RESET

LCD Error Messages

Description

Action

Reset occurred due to command or power up. Warning
Always present after power up.

LOW POWER Input current < 3.6 mA

Cause
Normal operation on power
up always sets RESET. RESET
is sent by HART communications. Use CLEAR ERR to
remove warning

Takes the device to
low power

ACT ERR

Positioner unable to position a valve normally Warning

AIR LOW

Supply pressure is < 10 psi (.69 bar, 69 kPa).
Otherwise I/P pressure is below 0.8 psi (.05
bar, 5.5 kPa)

Warning

Mechanical or pneumatic
problem

POS ERR

The position error exceeds configured limit
for more than configured time

Warning after T1
and Failsafe

Pneumatic/ mechanical,
configuration, loose magnet

KEYBOARD

LCD/Button Failure

Warning

Damaged buttons or LCD
electronics

Warning

Invalid values for current
calibration and input range
by HART commands

MARGN PWR Input signal is insufficient to proceed
CALIB ERR

Calibrate failed

STOP ERR

Calibration error. Find STOPS was unsuccess- Warning
ful.

Configuration, calibration

TUNE ERR

Auto tune failed

Warning

Mechanical or pneumatic
problem causes tuning
failure

STD DIAG

A standard diagnostic procedure failed to
complete

Warning

Pneumatic / mechanical,
configuration

EXT DIAG

An extended diagnostic procedure failed to
complete

Warning

Pneumatic / mechanical,
configuration

CMD STOP

HART command aborted

Warning

Bad data range or data limitation

BIAS ERR

Position algorithm error in output bias

Warning

Pneumatic/ mechanical

159

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Table 9

LCD

LCD Error Messages (Continued)

Description

Action

I/P LIMIT

I/P current too high or too low

Warning

TEMP ERR

Internal circuit temperature high (>80 °C, 176 Warning
°F) or low (<-40 °C, -40 °F)

NVM ERR_R

An FRAM record and its copy both have CRC
errors

Failsafe

RAM ERR

RAM data item had a bad checksum

Warning

FLASH ERR

Flash memory failed checksum test

Failsafe

STACK ERR

A valid hidden record (in RAM) existing upon
reset indicating that a stack overflow had
occurred

Warning

Cause
Electronic hardware
Environment

Flash memory failed checksum test

FCTRYMODE Factory mode failure

Failsafe

NVM ERR-T

An FRAM record and its copy both have CRC
errors

Warning

REF VOLT

Temperature compensated I/P current is out Failsafe
of range

POS SENSR

Internal error in Hall Effect sensor

Warning

Electronic hardware

SIG SENSR

Internal error in sensing of 4 - 20 mA

Warning

Electronic hardware

PRES1 ER

Temperature compensated pressure
sensor 1 reading is outside the range

Warning

PRES2 ER

Temperature compensated pressure
sensor 2 reading is outside the range

Warning

PRES3 ER

Temperature compensated pressure sensor 3 Warning
reading is outside the range or supply pressure recorded is >120 psi (8.28 bar, 828 kPa)

PRES4 ER

Temperature compensated pressure sensor 4 Warning
reading is outside the range or pilot pressure
recorded is >120 psi (8.28 bar, 828 kPa)

PRES5 ER

Temperature compensated pressure sensor 5 Warning
reading is outside the range

NVM ERR-W Writer to FRAM fails or data repairing in FRAM Warning
fails

160

Status Screen

Status Context Menu
Table 9
LCD

LCD Error Messages (Continued)

Description

Action

IRQ FAULT

Valid hidden record (in RAM) existing upon
reset that indicates that an illegal interrupt
occurred

Warning

DATA ERR

Internal software error data overrun

Failsafe

MCU ERR 1

Micro-Controller Self Check failed

Failsafe

SW ERR

Software self check error

Failsafe

Cause

CPU/firmware

CPU/firmware

Status Context Menu
When you right click on the Status screen, a context menu appears as shown in Figure 134.
The context menu contains only a link to Status on-line help.

Figure 134

SVI II AP Status Screen Context Menu

161

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Check Screen- Advanced
Troubleshooting

8

What you can do on the Check Screen
Use the Check screen (Figure 135) to monitor and set some basic parameters: Set I/P, Unset
I/P, Full Open, Full Closed and Detach Trend. The Check screen is used primarily for troubleshooting.
Setting parameters on this screen requires the use of the right click menu or the Tools menu and
that you are in Setup mode.

Figure 135 Check Screen

163

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Information Displayed
The Check screen is used for troubleshooting and displays the operating parameters of the SVI
II AP including:
Tag Information

Position

Lower Stop

Raw Position

Upper Stop

Current

Raw Signal

Pressure reading

Board Temperature
reading

Minimum Temperature

Maximum Temperature

I/P reading

Set I/P field

Check Context Menu
The Check context, right click menu is displayed Figure 136 on page 165 and described below:
Set I/P - Removes the valve from normal control and applies a constant signal (using
the value in the Set I/P edit box) to the I/P.
UnSet I/P - Turns off Set I/P and returns the valve to normal control.
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve out of
closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command works by taking the valve
out of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the on-line help at the Check screen instructions

164

Check Screen- Advanced

Set I/P

Set I/P
Setting the I/P removes the valve from normal control and sends a constant, user defined
signal to the I/P. This is useful for troubleshooting. This command is only available in Setup
mode.
To set the I/P:
1. Enter a number between 1 and 55000 in the Set I/P edit box (Figure 136).
2. Right-click and select Set I/P (or use the Tools menu). The indicator appears red.
To resume normal control:
Right-click and select UnSet I/P. Returning to Manual or Normal mode also returns
the valve to control.

I/P Indicator

Set I/P Edit Box

Figure 136 Check Screen Context Menu

165

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Changing HART
Versions

9

Changing SVI II AP to HART 6
Starting with firmware version 4.1.1, ValVue SVI II AP software supports HART 6. When you logon
to a HART 5 version of the software and either look at the Tools menu or Tools right-click menu a
menu item appears to convert to HART 6.

Figure 137

Select Tools

167

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

To change a HART 5 unit to HART 6:
1. Select Tools > Change HART Rev to 6 and a Figure 138 appears.

Figure 138
NOTE

HART Change DCS Warning

Modify your DCS system via the associated DD.

2. Click OK and a second dialog appears.
3. Click Yes and a third dialog appears.

Figure 139

Application Warning

4. Press OK and the ValVue SVI II AP application closes. Once you reopen HART 6 is
functional.

168

10

References

Overview
This section provides the compatible HART modems and technical release notes.

Supported HART Modems
Listed below are the HART modems supported by ValVue.
Supports MacTek Viator RS232 HART modem model 010001
Supports MacTek Viator USB HART modem model 010031.
Supports Micriolink RS232 HART modem model 101-0005
Supports Microlink USB HART modem model 101-0007.
Supports E & H USB HART modem model FXA-191-S1
Supports MTL Multiplexor model 4841
P&F HART Multiplexers and wireless gateway

169

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Technical Release
Notes

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software Technical Release Notes

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
1 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned
country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

170

References

Supported HART Modems

Revision History
The table below describes the revision history of this document.
Revised Checked Approved
Rev. Date
By
By
By
A

06/14/2011

Sean
Kong

Luke
Tao/Terry
Zuo

Du Henry

Title

Brief Description

Release as 2.80.0 family software mainly to support Wireless Adapter VECTOR,
and WirelessHART Gateway Connection

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
2 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned
country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

171

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

TOPICS
=================
I.
Family Software Overview
II.
Software Registration Requirement
III.
Supported Device
IV.
New Features
V.
Improvements
VI.
Bug Fixes
VII. Known Issues
VIII. Supported Operating Environment
IX.
Software Backward Compatibility
X.
Supported Standalone Communication Medium

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
3 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned
country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

172

References

Supported HART Modems

I.

Family Software Overview

The ValVue® HART 2.80.0 Family software package provides a powerful interface to
Masoneilan’s Smart Valve Interfaces, the Model 12300 and 12400 Digital Level Transmitter (HDLT12300 and 12400),
and other HART® instruments. This package supports SVI® models SVI® II AP, SVI® II , SVI® and SVi1000, Level
transmitter HDLT12300 and 12400, and WirelessHart® Adapter VECTOR
ValVue 2.80.0 Family Software supports a variety of computer environments. The family consists of the following
deployable software products, each with its own installer. Different products are allowed to coexist on the same
machine.
The following describes the nature of each product.
1.
ValVue 2.80.0 Full Edition
This edition of the software runs in a standalone environment. This edition of the software requires Software
Registration to activate the license. It may be used as trial for up to 60-day prior to the registration.
2.
ValVue 2.80.0 Lite Edition
This edition of the software runs in a standalone environment with limited features. This edition of the software does
not require Software Registration.
3.
PRM PLUG-IN ValVue 2.80.0
This software operates with Yokogawa PRM (Plant Resource Management). This software requires Software
Registration to activate the license. This software supports SVI II AP, SVI II , SVi1000 and 12400 only.
4.
ValVue 2.80.0 AMS SNAP-ON
This software operates with Emerson AMS (Asset Management System). This software requires software license
through Emerson AMS Help Desk.
5.
ValVue 2.80.0 For Honeywell FDM
This software, the same binary as that of Standalone Full Edition, operates with Honeywell FDM (Field Device
Manager). This software requires Software Registration to activate the license with the same licensing mechanism. It
may be used as trial for up to 60-day prior to the registration.
6.
Smarts Assistant 2.10.0 Standard Edition
This edition of the software, as a companion tool for HART devices, is a utility used for operation such as device
option upgrade or firmware upgrade. This tool supports SVI II AP, SVI II , SVI II ESD, SVi1000 and 12400. The
software does not require Software Registration.

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
4 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned
country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

173

GE Oil & Gas

II.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Software Registration Requirement

The following applies to software registration for all ValVue Family software except ValVue AMS SNAP-ON and
ValVue Lite Edition. Please refer to SNAP-ON Marketing release for the SNAP-ON software registration.
The key for software registration and the licensing is the possession of a valid software serial number issued as part of
the software purchase. To register the software, the user has to launch the ValVue application.
Follow the instructions provided in the application to complete the registration. Upon the successful completion of
registration, a software key will be issued by Software Registration Desk. The registration is a one-time process with
perpetual licensing on the installed computer therefore no new registration is required if the software has been
registered previously on the same computer.

Software Registration is only available via email.
Software Registration Desk Email Address:
software.reg@ge.com

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
5 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned
country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

174

References

Supported HART Modems

III.

Supported Devices

The following lists all supported devices with associated firmware version.

ValVue Family Application Supported Device List
Device
Type
Firmware
Ver.
ValVue
2.80.0 Full
Edition
ValVue
2.80.0 Lite
Edition
ValVue
2.80.0 AMS
SNAP-ON
PRM
PLUG-IN
ValVue
2.80.0
ValVue
2.80.0 for
FDM

VECTOR

SVi1000

3.195

1.1.1

1.1.
2

12400
1.1.
1

4.1.1

3.2.3

SVI II AP
3.2.1

3.1.3

3.1.1

1.2.5

1.2.4

1.2.3

1.2.2

1.2.1

1.08

1.07

1.06

7.11

6.11

5.11

4.12

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

√

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.

Title

SVI II



SVI

Revision
Date

HDLT12300

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
6 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or copied and is subject to
return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in accordance with the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use, disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This
prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

175

GE Oil & Gas

IV.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

New Features

1. All ValVue 2.80.0 Family
x
x
x

Support WirelessHART Adapter, VECTOR, device type 0x65CD
Support WirelessHART Adapter, VECTOR bullet of MACTek, device type 0xE0AC
Support P+F WirelessHART Gateway communication, based upon UDP protocol

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
7 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

176

References

Supported HART Modems

V.

Improvements
x
x
x
x
x
x

ValVue 12400 trending was updated to have the same style as ValVue SVI2AP module
Enumerate available com port
Allow searching devices from given range of polling addresses or specific addresses
Added “Report and Backup” to Setup Wizard
Complete solution of Windows 7/server 2008 compatibility.
Dresser logo, images and copyright information were replaced with GE Energy.

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
8 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

177

GE Oil & Gas

VI.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Bug Fixes
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

Fixed issue that restoring 12400 data always popup error said that "An unsupported operation was
attempted."
Allow use to change option settings even when ValVue is offline connection.
The Availability of SVi1000 DO configuration in ValVue SVi1000 is based upon the present of physical
DO card.
The appending spaces in the Long Tag string will be trimmed when it is written to device.
The error messages of burst setting for AP HART6 is more user-friendly and instructive.
Allow users to change mode from failsafe to setup and normal for SVi1000.
Fixed issue about trend information display in offline mode of double acting AP.

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
9 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

178

References

Supported HART Modems

VII.

Known Issues
x
x
x
x
x
x

If you load a DGN file that was created with ValVue2.50 or before, you have to make sure the current
ValVue has the same the pressure unit same as it in DGN file, an then you will get the same diagnostic
result as before.
After having done a standard actuator signature, you can’t change the pressure unit before you save it
with DGN format file (if you want to save it). It is because that the pressure unit change can’t influence
the result from COMMAND191 and COMMAND192 at the same time.
For ValVue SVI2AP with FDM connection, the hart command "038 Reset Configuration Changed" does
not work.
FDM build network can't find 12400 devices with burst mode is on
When ValVue connects to device through P+F WirelessHART Gateway communication, system
performance may be slow.
Sometimes ValVue SVi1000 or ValVue SVI2AP processes may still remain after application is
terminated. Task Manager is needed to kill it manually.

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
10 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

179

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

VIII. Supported Operating Environment
The following lists the supported Operating System for Standalone application and the Host System for integrated application.

ValVue Family Application OS/Host Compatibility
O.S. / Host

Windows for Standalone

Emerson AMS

Yokogawa PRM

Honeywell FDM

Version

Windows
Server
2008

Windows
7 32 and
64 bit

XP
SP3

Vista
SP1

2000
SP4

Server
2003

11.x

10.x

9.x

8.x

6.x

3.x

2.x

310/410

ValVue 2.80.0
Full Edition

√

√

√

√

√

√

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ValVue 2.80.0
Lite Edition

√

√

√

√

√

√

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

ValVue 2.80.0
AMS SNAPON

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

√

√

√

√

√

N/A

N/A

N/A

PRM PLUGIN ValVue
2.80.0

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

√

√

N/A

ValVue 2.80.0
for FDM

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

√

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
11 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or copied and is subject to
return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in accordance with the U.S. Export Administration
Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use, disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This
prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

180

References

Supported HART Modems

IX.

Software Backward Compatibility

All Products
-

Support earlier version of configuration data file.
Support earlier version of Trend and Signature data file.
Support interchange of configuration data saved among different supported device types and
revisions.

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
12 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

181

GE Oil & Gas

X.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Supported Standalone Communication Medium

The following lists the supported communication medium.

Standalone ValVue Communication Medium Support
MACKTEK (RS232; USB, Bluetooth
Wireless)
HART Modem

MICROLINK (RS232; USB)
E + H FXA-191-S1 (USB)
ProComSol (Bluetooth Wireless)
MTL 4841 (Cornerstone Protocol; AMS
Protocol)

HART MUX

P+F (2700F, 2700G)
FDM HART Multiplexer (SoftMux)

HART OPC
Server
WirelessHART

HART Server 3.x
P+F WirlessHART Gateway

(End of Document)

Title

ValVue HART 2.80.0 Family Software
Technical Release Notes.doc

No.



Revision
Date

A
6/14/2012

Approv
Page
13 of 13
Author
Sean Kong
Check
Luke Tao/Terry Zuo
Henry Du
Copyright 2009 as an unpublished trade secret; this document and all information therein is the property of Dresser, Inc. It is confidential and must not be made public or
copied and is subject to return on demand. This document and/or technology exported from the United States, or the originating country of this export, must be in
accordance with the U.S. Export Administration Regulations and/or originating jurisdiction Export Regulations. Diversion (export, re-export, transfer, sale, review, use,
disclosure, or distribution) contrary to such law(s) is prohibited. This prohibition includes no diversion to current U.S. sanctioned countries; plus any additional
sanctioned country of the originating country of this transaction if not the United States.

182

References

Supported HART Modems

Notes
The space provided below is for entering notes on ValVue and its operation.

183

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

184

SVi1000 Software Manual

SVi1000 Software Manual

Electro-pneumatic Positioner
t
 Extreme accuracy and reliability
t
 Precise, quick,
k, responsive control of
n
valve position

185

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

1

Introduction

About This Manual
These instructions are intended to help a field engineer install, setup, and calibrate an SVi1000 in
the most efficient manner possible. If you experience problems that are not documented,
contact Masoneilan or your local Masoneilan representative.

Conventions Used in This Manual
Conventions used in this manual are as follows:
Italicized letters are used when referencing a term used in the program display window.
Italics is used for emphasis on important items.
Fields where data is entered or user entered data is italicized.
Actions performed on buttons, checkboxes, etc. appear bolded. For example: Click Done.
Indicates important facts and conditions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided could
result in property damage or data loss.

187

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided could
result in death or serious injury.

ValVue Overview
Masoneilan's ValVue software is a Human Machine Interface (HMI) software tool that provides
a powerful interface to Masoneilan’s SVi1000 and other HART instruments. ValVue is used to
configure and calibrate the SVi1000 utilizing HART communications protocol.
Using ValVue you can:
Monitor SVi1000 Operation and Quickly set up the SVi1000 (See “What You Can Do on
the Monitor Tab” on page 199)
Observe real time valve performance (See “What you can do on the Trend Tab” on
page 225)
Advanced SVi1000 Set Up (See “What You Can Do on the Configure Tab” on page 229)
Calibrate the SVi1000 (See “What you can do on the Calibrate Tab” on page 241)
Check the SVi1000 Status (See “What you can do on the Status Tab” on page 253)
Monitor and adjust some of the basic parameter (See “What you can do on the Check
Tab” on page 273)

System Requirements
Listed below are the hardware and software requirements for the computer used with ValVue:

Hardware
Processor:

PC with minimum 1 GHz Intel Pentium or compatible

RAM:

Minimum 1 Gig

Disk:

Application Component: 15 M
Database Component: 30 M minimum

Software
OS:

Windows XP SP2, Window Server 2003 SP1 or Window Server 2003
R2, or Windows Server 2008

188

ValVue SVi1000 Work
Environment

2

Overview
After you have selected the connected device ValVue launches and the device appears in the
first Monitor tab (Figure 1).
ValVue is the main interface for connected devices. Once a connected
device is selected the SVi1000 software launches.

Figure 1

SVi1000 Environment

189

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Working in SVi1000
SVi1000 is set up as a typical Windows program, with tabs, menus, dialogs, windows and
toolbars. After logging into ValVue the currently selected device appears in SVi1000’s Monitor
tab. You can either perform operations on the Monitor tab or select another tab.

Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of every SVi1000 tab has two menu items: Tools and Help. The Tools
menu depends on the tab and is explained with that tab.

Modes of Operation
The SVi1000 has three modes of operation:
Normal: In this mode the SVi1000 responds to the input signal and positions the valve
accordingly (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the input signal. Instead it remains
stable in one position, which is the position that the valve was in when manual mode
was entered or a new position selected by you (by changing the setpoint in the Monitor
tab).
Setup: In this mode you can set calibration and configuration parameters. Whenever
you leave the Normal mode, a warning appears (Figure 2).

Change Mode
Use the Change Mode button on all SVi1000 tabs to change the operating SVi1000 mode.
When selected, you can change the SVi1000 mode to any of three operating modes:
1. Click OK to continue the mode change.

Figure 2

Leaving Normal Mode Warning

Whenever you leave Normal mode, a warning appears.
2. Click OK to continue the mode change.

Exit
Clicking Exit quits the program.

190

ValVue SVi1000

SVi1000 Help

SVi1000 Help
Help is readily available from anywhere within SVi1000, including:
Main Help menu: Available by clicking Help, located at the bottom, right corner of
every tab.
Context Sensitive Help: Available by right clicking within the tab area.
Toolbar Help: Located in the toolbar at the top of every tab, available by clicking Help
at the top of the tab.

Help Menu
The Help menu is the same on every tab and contains:
Help: Launches the help file table of contents.
Firmware Info: Displays information about the firmware loaded into the SVi1000.
About: Displays information about ValVue SVi1000.

191

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

SVi1000 Tabs
Monitor Tab
From the Monitor tab, you can view the basic functions of the SVi1000 including tag and
identification, input signal, setpoint, position, and status. You can also change the SVi1000
mode of operation and perform setup and command functions.

Figure 3

Monitor Tab

192

ValVue SVi1000

Trend Tab

Trend Tab
From the Trend tab you can observe real time valve performance. These process trend
graphs are useful for troubleshooting a control valve and for tuning the PID positioning
parameters.

Figure 4

Trend Tab

193

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configure Tab
The Configure tab displays the current configuration parameters and provides the ability to
change them.

Figure 5

Configure Tab

194

ValVue SVi1000

Configure Tab

Calibrate Tab
The Calibrate tab displays the current controller calibration parameters and provides the
ability to adjust them in the Setup mode.

Figure 6

Calibrate Tab

195

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Status Tab
Use the Status tabs to see the operating and internal status of the SVi1000. There are seven
tabs, which include:
Active Faults: Displays all current faults and provides current and historical information
on each fault. These also appear on the individual tabs.
General: Displays faults that cannot be attributed to SVi1000 components; e.g.
instrumentation, actuator, pneumatics, electronics. General faults are often testing and
data faults.
Instrumentation: Displays all faults related to instrumentation other than the actuator,
pneumatics or electronics.
Actuator: Displays all faults related to the actuator on which the SVi1000 is mounted.
Pneumatics: Displays all faults related to the SVi1000 pneumatics.
Critical: Displays all faults critical to SVi1000 operations.
Electronics: Displays all electronics faults.

Figure 7 Status Tab: Active Faults

196

ValVue SVi1000

Check

Check
Use the Check tab to set some of the basic parameters. This tab is used primarily for
troubleshooting.

Figure 8

Check Tab

197

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

3

Monitor

What You Can Do on the Monitor Tab
The Monitor tab is the first window displayed on starting SVi1000. You can:
Monitor the current operation of the SVi1000 and adjust the controller (graphical
representation) to change operation parameters. See “Adjust Operations” on page 200.
Generate reports on SVi1000 operation. See “Reports” on page 207.
Access the Setup Wizard. See “Setup Wizard” on page 213.

199

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Adjust Operations

2
1

3

4

Figure 9

Monitor Tab

1. Tag Information
The Tag Information on the Monitor tab displays the following items:
Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date
Assembly Number
This data appears at the same location on the Monitor, Configure and Calibrate tabs but can
only be changed on the Configure tab (See “Tag Information” on page 230).

200

Monitor

2. Signal/Position Data

2. Signal/Position Data
Signal

Indicates the input analog signal expressed in % of the configured
signal range.

Position %

Indicates the actual valve position in % of valve opening. 0% is
always closed and 100% is open for ATO and reversed for ATC.
Because the travel of a valve may exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible.

Setpoint %

In NORMAL mode, the setpoint is the target position based on the
characterized input. In MANUAL mode, it is the target position to
which the SVi1000 is controlling the valve. Drag the lower arrow to
change the manual setpoint.

Position Indicator

Shows the valve position graphically. The indicator consists of
three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator showing the value of
the input signal. In Normal mode this is the position
setpoint.
If operating in manual mode, this is the position that the valve moves to if
returning operation to normal mode.

The center green bar shows the valve position where % =
valve open. The numerical valve position is shown in the
center.
The lower part contains an indicator showing the valve
setpoint. In operating mode, this is the same as the signal.
In Manual mode it is the valve setpoint. You can drag the
arrow to change the valve setpoint. While dragging, the
number in the center bar shows the manual setpoint for use
when you release the arrow.

201

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Changing the Setpoint

Change to Manual mode prior to changing the position indicator; click on Change Mode and
select Manual. There are three ways to change the position indicator:
Entering the setpoint value in the Setpoint dialog.
Dragging the position indicator.
Left clicking on either side of the position indicator modifies the setpoint by 5%.
To enter a value for the position indicator setpoint:
1. Right click inside the position indicator area.
The Setpoint dialog appears.

Figure 10

Setpoint

2. Enter the setpoint percentage and click OK.

3. Status on the Monitor Tab
The SVi1000 tracks operation and provides several health indicators. When there is a fault
code available in the SVi1000, this box contains (Figure 11) Additional Status Available. The LED
is green for OK or red when a flag is set. The fault codes can be retrieved by:
1. Select Read Status from the Send Command drop down list.
2. Click Send Cmd.
The status block also contains other status codes returned by HART. These include
Configuration Changed, Cold Start, Device malfunction, and Variable out of limits.

Figure 11

Monitor Tab: Additional Status Available

202

Monitor

3. Status on the Monitor Tab
List of Available HART Commands
The following commands can be sent to the SVi1000:

000 Read Identifier: Returns the unique identifier from the device including the device ID,
device type, and the manufacturers ID.
001 Read Primary Variable: Returns the position in percent open.
002 Read Current: Returns the input signal in mA and the signal in percent.
003 Read All Variables: Returns the input signal and the position in percent open
011 Read ID from Tag: Prompts you for a tag name. The tag name is sent in a HART
command and if received by a device with a matching tag name, the ID of the device is
returned. The format of the ID is the same as command 001 Read Identifier.
012 Read Message: Reads the message that was stored in the device when it was
configured
013 Read Tag & Descriptor: Reads the tag name, date, and the descriptor that was stored in
the device when it was configured.
016 Read Assembly Number: Reads the final assembly number that was stored in the device
when it was assembled at the factory
017 Write Message: Enter a message (up to 32 characters) for storage in the SVi1000.
018 Write Tag & Descriptor: Enter a tag name (up to 8 characters) and a description (up to 16
characters) that are stored in the SVi1000.
019 Write Final Assembly: Enter an identifying number (0 to 16 million) that is stored in the
SVi1000.
038 Reset Configuration Changed Flag: Sets the HART configuration changed bit back to 0.
The bit is set whenever a value in the device has changed.
211 Read Custom Characterization: Reads and displays the custom characterization
configuration.
212 Read Error Limits: Reads and displays the position range and time outs associated with
position errors.
213 Read Calibration Data: Reads and displays the low and high signal calibration in mA.
216 Read PID: Reads and displays the valve positioning tuning parameters.
136 Read Status: Reads and displays the status flags. These flags describe error conditions
that have occurred since the last time they were cleared.
138 Clear Status: Clears the status flags.
142 Read Switches: Reads and displays the state (open/closed) of the switches, if applicable.

203

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

154 Read Setpoint: Reads the manual setpoint of the controller.
141 Read Raw Data: Returns information from the SVi1000 that is useful to Masoneilan
engineers for diagnostic purposes. The information includes values from the position
measurements, and the internal SVi1000 temperature.
143 Read Temperatures: Reads the historical low and high range to which the controller was
exposed and reads the actual circuit board temperature.
249 Read Operating Mode: Reads and displays the controller operating mode.

4. Information Pane
Use the Send Cmd button to make a request for the display of various system data in this
pane. For example, device identifier settings see Figure 9 on page 200.
To retrieve information:
1. Select a command from the Send Command drop down list.
2. Click Send Cmd.

204

Monitor

Monitor Context Menu

Monitor Context Menu
When you right click a context menu appears (Figure 12).

Figure 12

Monitor Tab Context Sensitive Menu

The following items appear and are greyed out based on the actual SVi1000 mode:
Full Open

Moves the valve to full open. This command takes the valve out of
closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P. This is
available only in manual or setup mode.

Full Closed

Moves the valve to full closed. This takes the valve out of closed
loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P. This is available only in manual or setup mode.

Set to Fail Position

Sets the Output Pressure (P1) to 0 psi. Moves the valve full open or
full closed, whichever is the fail position of the actuator.

Cancel Transfer

Returns the SVi1000 to manual mode from the bumpless transfer
mode (available during a bumpless transfer).

Reset

Issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go through its
startup routine and reinitializing all of its operating parameters
from nonvolatile memory.

205

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
The valve moves during the reset operation.

Report Setup

Allows you to set up a report template and printing program. See
“How to Create Reports” on page 207.

Report

Generates a report of the SVi1000 parameters. “Generate Report”
on page 212.

Save SVI Data

Saves the SVi1000 internal parameters in a file that can be read and
restored.

Restore SVI Data

Restores the contents of a dump file to a Masoneilan device. This can
be used to clone an SVi1000 into a new SVi1000.
Items like tag, which should be unique, and position calibrations which
differ on each controller, are not cloned. This command is available only in
manual mode.

Detach Trend

Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend display.

Help

Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

206

Monitor

Reports

Reports
One of the functions available on the Monitor tab is the ability to generate reports. SVi1000
provides the ability to extract information about the SVi1000 operation and dump the
information into a report format. When SVi1000 extracts the information from a device it
requires a template file into which to dump the data. To generate a report with SVi1000 you
must first create a report template file that includes the parameters you would like to
include in the report as well as personalization.

How to Create Reports
There are three basic steps to create reports:
1. Set up the report: Create a report template file.
2. Select the report setup (report template file): Using the Report Setup command from the
Monitor context menu.
3. Generate the report: Using the Report command from the Monitor context menu.

Creating Report Template Files
You can create a custom SVi1000 report by creating a rich text format (RTF) file which is laid
out in the format of the desired report. The default template is located in:
Win7 and 2008 Server: C:\Program Data\Dresser\ValVue\SVi1000\Data.
WinXP and 2003 Server: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Dresser\ValVue\SVi1000\Data.
Prior to selecting the set up of the report (Monitor Context menu) you must create the report
template file in an rtf format. The report template includes the operation parameters that
you would like populated in the report.
SVi1000 substitutes the values of SVi1000 parameters into the text file where ever it finds a
parameter name that matches an SVi1000 parameter. For each parameter you would like
included in the report place $$ in front of the parameter name.
For example:
Tag = $$Tag
SVi1000 substitutes the actual tag name from the SVi1000 in place of the $$Tag in the
report.
When creating the report template file, use an application that can save the report template
file to an rtf or text file such as WordPad, Microsoft Word, or Notepad.

207

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

rtf files are preferred as you can apply special formatting to the file that
can contain fonts, sizes, tabs, etc. and bitmaps. Some .rtf formatting is
accepted in Word which is not available in WordPad.

The allowed SVi1000 Parameters are listed in Table 1. Use the report file (report.rtf) shipped
with the application for examples.
Table 1 Report Setup Parameters
Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$Tag

Tag Name

$$Descriptor

Descriptor

$$Date

Date

$$Message

Message

$$AssemblyNumber

Final Assembly Number

$$MfgID

Manufacturer’s ID (101 for Masoneilan)

$$DeviceType

Device Type (200 for the SVi1000)

$$DeviceID

Hart DeviceID

$$HWRev

Hardware Revision

$$SWRev

Software Revision

$$CmdRev

Firmware Command Revision

$$PollingAddress

PollingAddress

$$Position

Position

$$Signal

Input Signal

$$Pressure

Actuator Pressure

$$IPOutput

Signal to the I/P in Counts (0 to 65000)

$$Temperature

Circuit Board Temperature

$$LowTemperature

Historical Low Temperature

$$HighTemperature

Historical High Temperature

$$Output

Output from the process controller

$$Mode

SVi1000 Mode

$$SignalPercent

Input Signal as Percent

$$AirAction

Air to Open/Air to Close

208

Monitor

Creating Report Template Files
Table 1

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$ActuatorType

Single/Double Acting Actuator

$$PosErrorBand

Position Error Band

$$PosErrorTime

Position Deviation Time

$$Charact

Characterization (Linear, Equal Percentage, etc.)

$$CustomCharact

Displays the Custom Characterization constants
Individual items of the characterization curve may be selected by entering:
$$CustomCharact[n] where n is a number between 0 and 17

$$ButtonLock

Button Lock Level

$$Bumpless

Bumpless Transfer On/Off

$$BumplessSpeed

Time to move from Manual to Normal (operating) mode

$$TightShutoff

Tight Shutoff On/Off

$$TSValue

Tight Shutoff Value

$$ULimitStop

Upper Position Limit On/Off

$$ULSValue

Upper Position Limit

$$LLimitStop

Lower Position Limit On/Off

$$LLSValue

Lower Position Limit

$$NearClosed

Value below which is considered Near Closed

$$PosUnits

Position Units of Measure (always %)

$$PresUnits

Pressure Units (psi, bar, or kpa)

$$SignalUnits

Signal Units (always mA)

$$Language

SVi1000 Display Language

$$LowSignal

Low Calibration Value

$$HighSignal

High Calibration Value

$$P

Proportional Gain In controller

$$Padjust

Adjustment to P when valve is exhausting

$$I

Integral action of controller

$$Beta

Step size adjustment in controller

$$D

Derivative action of controller

$$PosComp

Position range compensation of controller

$$DeadZone

Dead zone of controller

209

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Table 1

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter

Information Provided in Report

$$Damping

Damping coefficient of controller

$$Travel

Total strokes of the valve

$$Cycles

Total cycles of the valve

$$TimeOpen

Total time open of the valve

$$TimeClosed

Total time closed of the valve

$$TimeNearClosed

Amount of time valve was nearly closed

$$ResponseOpen

Time require to open valve

$$ResponseClosed

Time required to close valve

$$Switch1Type

Condition under which Switch 1 will operate

$$Switch1Value

Value at which Switch 1 will activate

$$Switch1Action

Switch is Normally Closed or Normally Open

$$RawSignal

Signal Value in A/D Counts

$$RawPosition

Position Value in A/D Counts

$$PositionStopLow

Position A/D Counts at the Lower Stop

$$PositionStopHigh

Position A/D Counts at the Upper Stop

$$OptionConfig
$$OptionConfigEx0
$$OptionConfigEx1

Data describing the hardware installed on the controller

$$OptionConfigEx2
$$OptionConfigEx3
$$Friction

Friction Measured from a Standard Actuator Signature

$$FLowerSpringRange

Lower Spring Range measured from a standard actuator signature

$$FupperSpringRange

Upper Spring Range measured from a standard actuator signature

$$LowPressureActual

Pressure when the actuator is exhausted

$$HighPressureActual

Supply Pressure

$$Speed

Speed at which the last diagnostic test was run

$$SpeedSaved

Speed at which the saved standard signature was run

$$SpeedBaseline

Speed at which the baseline standard signature was run

$$LowerSpringRange

Lower Spring Range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature

$$LowerSpringRangeSaved
$$LowerSpringRangeBaseline

210

Monitor

Report Setup
Table 1

Report Setup Parameters (Continued)

Report Parameter
$$UpperSpringRange
$$UpperSpringRangeSaved

Information Provided in Report
Upper Spring Range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature

$$UpperSpringRangeBaseline
$$Signature

Position/Pressure Pairs Gathered during the Standard Signature Test

$$SignatureSaved

Position/Pressure Pairs Saved in the Saved Standard Signature

$$SignatureBaseline

Position/Pressure Pairs Saved in the Baseline Standard Signature

Report Setup
To set up the report:
1. Right click on the Monitor tab and select Report Setup.
The Report Setup dialog appears.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the desired folder for both:
Report Template File Name
Report Program to use

Click to
automatically
use Wordpad
for reports.

Click to
automatically
use Word for
reports.

Figure 13

Report Setup

211

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Generate Report
To generate a report:
1. On the Monitor tab right click and select Report.
2. Click OK.
SVi1000 populates the report template. An example of a report is shown in Figure 14.

Figure 14

Report Sample Using SVi1000 Template

212

Monitor

Setup Wizard

Setup Wizard
Running the Setup Wizard is one of two ways to set up the SVi1000. When you decide to run
the setup you can either run the entire setup wizard or pick and choose which components
of the setup wizard to run.
From the Setup Wizard tab you can rapidly setup the SVi1000 by configuring some basic
parameters. By selecting the appropriate check boxes you can set the device identification,
reset the configuration to factory defaults, perform a travel calibration, create a report and
backup and autotune the positioning parameters. When the selected tasks are started a
progress dialog appears.
The Setup Wizard can dramatically reduce commissioning time in the field.
To run the Setup Wizard you must first be in Setup mode. See “Change Mode” on page 190
for information on changing modes.
Select Setup Wizard and Starting the Setup Wizard appears.

Figure 15

Starting the Setup Wizard

213

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Setup Wizard Selections
After you start the Setup Wizard SVi1000 launches the Setup Wizard window where you can
select the setup features to perform:
“Step 1: Setting the Tag and Descriptor” on page 215
“Step 2: Set Air Action” on page 216
“Step 3: Calibrate Travel” on page 217
“Step 4: Autotune” on page 218
“Step 5: Report & Backup” on page 219
“Step 6: Setup Selections Made” on page 220
“Step 7: New Parameters” on page 222
“Step 8: Setup Wizard Complete” on page 224

Figure 16

Setup Wizard

214

Monitor

Setup Wizard Selections
Step 1: Setting the Tag and Descriptor
To change the Tag and Descriptor information:
1. Select Set Tag and Descriptor (See Figure 17).
2. Edit the Tag field.

Figure 17

Setup Wizard: Setting Tag and Descriptor

3. Enter text in the Descriptor and Message fields, if necessary.
Changes made to Tag and Descriptor will not take place until you click
Apply. Don’t click Apply until after you have made all your Setup Wizard
selections.

215

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Step 2: Set Air Action

Use this to set the reset to factory defaults.
Reset Configuration to
factory defaults

Resets the configuration to factory defaults.

To do this:
Click Reset configuration to factory defaults.

Figure 18 Reset to Factory Defaults
Changes made to Tag and Descriptor will not take place until you click
Apply. Don’t click Apply until after you have made all your Setup Wizard
selections.

216

Monitor

Setup Wizard Selections
Step 3: Calibrate Travel

To determine valve position, the controller must measure the closed and open positions of
the valve. The SVi1000 first exhausts the actuator and measures the position, then fills the
actuator and measures the position. From these measurements the valve position is
determined.
To calibrate controller travel:
Click the Calibrate Travel checkbox.

Figure 19 Enabling Calibrate Travel
Changes made to Tag and Descriptor will not take place until you click
Apply. Don’t click Apply until after you have made all your Setup Wizard
selections.

217

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Step 4: Autotune

The SVi1000 has a built in positioning Autotune feature. When setting up the valve controller,
this feature automatically computes the optimal parameters for the positioning algorithm.
This feature does not require valve specific parameters in order to complete successfully.
The Autotune feature can be launched using the local user interface, a handheld
communicator loaded with the device driver (DD), a control system loaded with the DD or
SVi1000 software. However, it cannot be fully done remotely, as you must use the local user
interface Configuration Selection Switch.
To autotune the SVi1000 with the Setup Wizard:
1. Move the Configuration Selection Switch on the unit to:
0 for and ATO valve.
8 for an ATC valve.
2. Click the Autotune checkbox.
3. Enter a Supply Pressure.

Figure 20

Enabling Autotune

218

Monitor

Setup Wizard Selections

Changes made to Tag and Descriptor will not take place until you click
Apply. Don’t click Apply until after you have made all your Setup Wizard
selections.

Step 5: Report & Backup
Use this step to create a report and backup.
To do this:
Click Report & Backup.

Figure 21

Creating Report & Backup

219

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Step 6: Setup Selections Made
1. Click Apply.

SVi1000 applies Step 1 and Step 2 (if selected) and executes Step 3 and Step 4 (if selected).

Figure 22

Applying Setup Wizard Changes

The Setup Dialog: Confirm Actions dialog indicating the actions setup selected appears.

Figure 23 Setup Dialog: Confirm Actions
2. Click OK.

220

Monitor

Setup Wizard Selections
If you are calibrating travel and autotuning, the Stroke the Valve Warning dialog
appears.

Figure 24

Stroke the Valve Warning

3. Click OK to continue.
Setup Wizard Progress
During the course of running the Setup Wizard, SVi1000 displays progress dialogs. The
Setup Wizard Progress Dialog indicates that Step 1 – Set Tag and Descriptor is finished.
These dialogs progress as the various selections are run.

Figure 25 Setup Wizard Progress Dialog

221

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Step 7: New Parameters

After you close the Setup Wizard Diagnostic Graph, the PID Values window appears
(See Figure 26).
The PID Values window shows the previous and the newly calculated (as a result of auto tune)
PID values. To complete the auto tune process:
Close the window by clicking Exit.

Figure 26 New PID Values After Setup Wizard Calibration
Parameter Definitions
P

Proportional gain in %. Common values for the controller are 50 for
small valves up to 4000 for large valves.

I

Integral time or reset time in 1/10th sec, is the time constant of integral control. Higher values of I cause less integral action, however a
value of 0 gives no integral action. Common values are 10 to 200.

D

Derivative time or rate time (msec) is the time constant of derivative
control. Common values are 10 to 100.

PAdjust

Valves often have significantly different response when filling verses
exhausting. The proportional gain is adjusted by adding Padj (%) to P
when the valve is exhausting.

222

Monitor

Setup Wizard Selections
Pos Comp (Position Compensation Coefficient)

The response of the valve is different when the valve is nearly
closed than when the valve is nearly open. The position compensation coefficient, which is a number between 0 and 20, makes
adjustments to try to equalize the valve response. The normal
value is 6. For springless actuators the value is 15.

Beta

Beta is a nonlinear gain factor, ranging from –9 to 9. When beta is
0, the controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of
error. The larger the beta, the smaller the gain for a small error
( Beta Response).
Positive Beta

Negative Beta

Figure 27

Beta Response

Dead Zone

When the valve position is within the setpoint +/– the dead zone,
no additional position control is performed. This value is normally
0%, however for high friction valves (e.g. valves with graphite packing) a higher dead zone (%) helps avoid limit cycling due to the
stick/slip action of the valve. In these cases the dead zone chosen
might be 0.5% to 1%.

Boost

This field controls a supplemental pressure or boost to speed up
initial valve response from setpoint from 0 to 100%.

The values determined above provide sufficient response for most applications. However
these values are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVi1000.
You may want performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID
values differently than determined by Autotune. You can individually set tuning values from
the Calibrate tab.

223

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Step 8: Setup Wizard Complete

After the Setup Wizard completes all setup tasks, and you have closed the PID Values window
(if you ran Auto Tune) SVi1000 the Setup Wizard dialog appears, indicating Setup Wizard
Complete.
Click Continue to complete the process.

Figure 28

Setup Wizard Complete

224

4

Trend

What you can do on the Trend Tab
Use the Trend tab (see Figure 29) to observe real time valve performance. These process trend
graphs are useful for troubleshooting a control valve and for tuning the PID positioning
parameters. The graphs can be manipulated only on the Y axis.
You can detach the trend as a separate window for viewing while performing calibration and
diagnostic tasks. To detach the trend:
Right click in any tab select Detach Trend.
In Manual or Setup mode, drag the position indicator to change the valve position.

Figure 29

Trend Tab Displaying All Parameters
225

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Trend Graph Features
The display of any of the four curves on the Trend graph may be turned on or off by checking
or unchecking these boxes:
Position: blue
Manual Setpoint: black
Signal Setpoint: red
Trend: Y Low/High

The Y axis (position) of the trend graph can be set by entering the values in these edit boxes. Enter a number and hit Tab or Enter key to
set the scale.

Position

Indicates the actual valve position in % of valve opening. 0% is
always closed and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may
exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible.

Changing the Graph View
Any portion of a diagnostic graph may be examined more closely by entering the new Y scale
in the proper scale edit box or by dragging a box across an area of the graph. If the mouse is
dragged across an area, that area fills the graphic window. Right clicking or double clicking on
the graph restores the default scales. The X scale cannot be resized.

Capture to Clipboard
Clicking this button saves an image of the graph on the clipboard. The image (a bitmap) may
be pasted into another document (e.g. into a Microsoft Word document).

226

Trend

Trend Context Menu

Trend Context Menu
When you right click on the grey area of the Trend tab (but not in the graph area), the Trend
Context Menu appears. The following items appear:
Refresh Graph

Restarts the sampling of the trend graph

Stop Graph

Stops the sampling of the trend graph. It can be restarted by
selecting Refresh Graph.

Open

Opens an Open Trend Data File dialog to select a .tre file for
viewing.

Save

Opens an Save Trend Data File dialog to save a file (.re).

Detach Trend

Removes the display from the tabbed dialog and creates a separate trend display

Help

Displays the help file at the Trend tab instructions

Figure 30

Trend Context Menu

227

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

5

Configure

What You Can Do on the Configure Tab
In the Setup mode, from the Configure tab (see Figure 31), you can set the information that tells
the SVi1000 how the valve/actuator is configured by adjusting the following parameters:
“Tag Information” on page 230

“Position Fault Limits” on page 231

“Characterization” on page 232

“Air Action” on page 235

“Bumpless Transfer” on page 236

“Position Limits” on page 236

“DO Output Switches” on page 237

“Configure Context Menu” on page 239

Before making any configuration changes on the Configuration tab
SVi1000 must be in Setup mode. If you need to change modes refer to
“Change Mode” on page 190.

229

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 31

Configure Tab: Setup Mode

Tag Information
To change Tag information on the Configure tab:
1. In the Setup mode place the cursor in the Tag field for change.
2. Delete and type as necessary.
3. Click Apply.
You can also change the tag information through the Setup Wizard.

230

Configure

Position Fault Limits

Position Fault Limits
You can configure how position errors are handled. A position error occurs when the valve
position differs from the requested position (from the input signal in normal operating mode
or the manual setpoint in manual mode) by more than the parameters. When this occurs, a
status flag is set which is reported during the next HART message only that a flag is set is
reported.
On the Configure tab you can set:
Position Error Band

Use this to define the error band, or the percentage of valve travel,
that the requested position is allowed to vary from the actual position. The Position Error Band must be between 0.5% and 200%. If
you set a value for Position Error Band outside the range an error
message appears.

Figure 32
Time 1 s Enable

Position Error Band Error Message

Use check box to enable a field to enter the amount of time a position error is allowed to exist before the valve is put in failsafe position. This time must be between 1 and 327 seconds. If you set a
value for Position Error Time outside the range an error message
appears.

Figure 33

Position Error Time Error Message

231

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Characterization
Use the radio buttons to select the characterization type. Control valves are characterized to
give a specific relationship between flow capacity (Cv) and percent opening of the valve. The
valve can be characterized with special purpose trim or with the positioner. Several
characterizations are available:
Linear: Causes the valve to open proportionally with the input signal. Select this option
if non linear trim is used in the valve.
Equal % (50) and Equal % (30): Two equal percentage characterizations are available,
one with R=50 and the other with R=30.
Quick Open: The quick opening characterization is the inverse to the Equal Percentage
50% characterization curve.
Custom: Selecting this option displays the Custom Characterization dialog to format a
custom curve. The curve can have up to nine points and points in between are linearly
interpolated. See “Custom Characterization” on page 233.
Camflex %: This characterizes the valve as a Masoneilan Camflex valve with settings of
Linear and Equal 50%.
Figure 34 shows the characterization curves in a graphical format.

Figure 34

Characterization Curves

232

Configure

Custom Characterization

Custom Characterization
When mounted on a reciprocating valve, a small non linearity in the reported valve position
versus actual valve position may result from the linkage configuration. This non linearity can
be corrected using a custom characterization that matches the specific linkage used.
Custom characterization must be the selected configuration option to use the generated
curve. Custom characterization is accomplished using the Figure 35 dialog.

Figure 35
Input Signal (%)/Position
(%)

Custom Characterization

Activated by selecting Custom in Characterization.

A custom characterization defines the relationship between the input signal and the output
position of the valve. The characterization may contain up to nine XY pairs and the position
is linearly interpolated between the pairs. The first position is always 0, 0 and the last
position is always 100,100. Both first and last positions indicate 0 and 100 percent and are
not counted as any of the nine points allowed.

233

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
To create a custom characterization:

1. Click Custom and the Custom Characterization dialog appears.
2. Enter values in the Input Signal (%)/Position (%) fields from lowest to highest. If there is too
drastic a slope change the Invalid Segment dialog appears. Adjust values accordingly.

Figure 36

Invalid Segment

Input Signal (%)/Position (%) fields activate and appears.
3. Click Close and a dialog appears prompting you to save.
4. Click OK.

Custom Linearization
Two types of linkages are modeled: simple and compound. Most Masoneilan linkages use the
compound linkage system.
Simple Lever Type

The simple lever has the pivot point (the potentiometer in the
SVi1000) mounted a fixed distance (L1) from the valve stem pickup
point. In order to compute the proper correction curve, the stroke
length, the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup point
and the valve position at horizontal must be entered. Clicking Simple,
entering a value and clicking OK computes the correction and displays the curve.

Compound Lever Type

The compound lever linkage has two lever segments attached at one
end to the pivot and the other end to the valve stem pickup point. In
order to compute the proper correction curve, the user must enter
the stroke length, first lever segment length (L1), second lever segment length (L2), the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup
(L3), the valve position at horizontal. Clicking Compound, entering a
value and clicking OK computes the correction and displays the
curve.

Most Masoneilan linkages use a linkage with L3 equal to L1, i.e. the second lever arm is vertical
when the first lever arm is horizontal. The correction computation will correctly compute the
correction curve when L3 is not equal to L1, however L3 must be greater than 0 which requires
that the valve stem pickup not be lined up with the pivot and that the pickup be on the same
side of the pivot as the link between the first and second lever segments.

234

Configure

Air Action
To create a custom linearization:

1. Select Custom Linearization from the Custom Characterization dialog and the Custom
Linearization dialog appears.

Figure 37

Custom Linearization

2. Enter values in the fields associated with either lever type and click the associated
button.
3. Use the Length Unit Select pulldown to select either:
inch
mm
4. Click OK.

Air Action
Use this reset to factory defaults. Air Action is factory set.

235

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Bumpless Transfer
Use the checkbox to select/deselect this option.
This option provides a means to maintain smooth valve control positioning when changing to
Normal mode from Manual or Setup. Without Bumpless Transfer, when changing to Normal
mode, the setpoint could vary in a manner that causes a significant process disturbance.
Bumpless Transfer moves the controller signal to match the valve position so that smooth
resumption of control with little disturbance results.
When Bumpless Transfer is selected, returning to Normal mode from Manual or Setup mode is
deferred until the input signal matches the current valve position. Either the input signal or the
valve position can be changed to match. If nothing is done, the system slowly changes the
position until it matches the signal setpoint. The time taken to move to the position is
determined by the Transfer Time which is a number between 0 and 255 and is approximately
the number of seconds required to move the valve 100%.

Position Limits
Allow Diagnostics to Override Limits

A checkbox for enabling/disabling autotuning and diagnostics to
override limits.

Tight Shutoff Below (%)

Use this checkbox to enable/disable the use of Tight Shutoff’s value.
Activates a tight shutoff below the value in the field. If the input signal would position the valve below the Tight Shutoff value, then air is
supplied to fully seat the valve. Range: –1 and 20%.

Position Lower Limit

Use this checkbox to enable/disable the use of the value in the field.
Activates a software limit stop. No valve position lower than this
occurs when enabled. This is software only. During electrical/air failure, the valve moves to failsafe position. This stop is ignored during
manual full open or close operations.

Position Upper Limit

Use this checkbox to enable/disable the use of the value in the field.
Activates a software limit stop. No valve position higher than this
occurs when enabled. This is software only. During electrical/air failure, the valve moves to failsafe position. This stop is ignored during
manual full open or close operations.

Position Rate Limits

Click either/both boxes to activate a field to the right. Enter a value in
%/second which is the time used for travelling full span.

NOTE

If you configure both Bumpless Transfer and Position Rate Limits
and the Bumpless Transfer settings is significantly greater than
the Position Rate Limits, a dialog appears. You can click OK and
continue, but in effect, the Bumpless Transfer is ignored in favor of
Position Rate Limits.

236

Configure

DO Output Switches

DO Output Switches
Use this to define characteristics of the inputs and output switches and position retransmit.

Configuring Output Switches
You can change the following configuration parameters:
DO (Output Switches)
SP (Input Signal Range)
To configure the inputs and outputs:
1. Change the following configuration parameters:
Output Switches: See “Output Switches” for descriptions of all the I/O settings.
Input Signal Range : See “Input Signal Range” on page 238 for descriptions of all the
I/O settings.

Figure 38

Configure Output Switches

2. Click Apply.
Output Switches
The SVi1000 supports two identical contact outputs which can be logically linked to status
bits. The two output switches can be opened or closed in response to conditions that the
SVi1000 detects. These conditions are:
0. Always Normal Position

The switch is not controlled by the SVi1000 and remains in it’s
default position. The two digital output switches can be opened or
closed in response to detected conditions. The default configuration setting is Always Normal Position, where normal is closed,
which means that the switch will not switch for any valve travel. To
activate the switch at a given valve position, configure the switch
Position Low Limit or Position High Limit.

1. Failsafe

The switch is activated when the SVi1000 is in failsafe mode.

2. Reset

The switch is activated whenever a reset has occurred and the
switch remains activated until the SVi1000 status is cleared.

237

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
3. Position Error

The switch is activated whenever a position error has occurred and is
deactivated when the position recovers to the correct position.

4. Tight Shutoff Active

The switch is activated whenever the device is in tight shutoff (tight
shutoff is on and the valve position is less than the tight shutoff position).

5. Position Low Limit

The switch is activated whenever the valve position is less than the
position setting of this switch control.

CAUTION

6. Position Upper Limit

CAUTION

7. Manual Mode

If both Position Low Limit and Tight Shut Off are used, the Position
Low Limit must be above the Tight Shut Off.

The switch is activated whenever the valve position is greater than
the position setting of this switch control.
If both Position High Limit and Full Open Above are used, the
Position High Limit must be below the Full Open Above.

The switch is activated whenever the SVi1000 is in manual mode.

Use the radio buttons to configure to default the switch as normally open or normally closed.
The contacts are OPEN when the SVi1000 is unpowered and can be made
to be open or closed when the flag is asserted after boot.

Input Signal Range
Use this parameter to adjust the current range Input Signal the low and high signal values.
The low value must between 3.8 and 14 mA and the high value must be between 8 and 20.2
mA.

238

Configure

Configure Context Menu

Configure Context Menu
When you right click on the Configure tab the Configure Tab: Context Menu appears
containing:
Detach Trend: Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates
a separate trend display
Help: Displays the help file at the Configure tab instructions.

Figure 39

Configure Tab: Context Menu

239

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

6

Calibrate

What you can do on the Calibrate Tab
Use the SVi1000 Calibrate Tab calibrate:
Calibration: Signal calibration. See “Calibration” on page 243.
Parameters: PID parameters and advanced parameters. See “PID and Advanced
Parameters” on page 244.
Open Stop Adjustment. See “Open Stop Adjustment” on page 246.
Use the right click menu to:
“Run Find Stops” on page 248

“Manual Find Stops” on page 250

“Auto Tune” on page 251

“Open Stop Adjustment” on page 246

Full Open

Full Closed

Set Valve Position

Reset to Factory Cal

Detach Trend

241

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 40

Calibrate Tab

242

Calibrate

Calibration

Calibration
The sensor is calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if
needed, this dialog provides a convenient method.
To start this function:
1. Click Calib. Signal. and the This Will Change Calibration dialog appears.

Figure 41

This Will Change Calibration

2. Click OK and the Sensor Calibration dialog appears.

Figure 42

Sensor Calibration

3. Enter a value for either high or low and click the associated button and the Calibration
Has Been Changed dialog appears.

Figure 43

Calibration Has Been Changed

4. Click OK.

243

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

PID and Advanced Parameters
You can fine tune the SVi1000 using regular parameters or advanced parameters. On this tab
you can adjust:
P
I
D
Padj
See “Step 7: New Parameters” on page 222 for an explanation of these parameters.
NOTE

You can only edit the PID parameters when the slot is 0. In the
local UI the slots run from 0 to F. In ValVue they run from 0 to 7.

To adjust these parameters:
1. Enter values in the required fields in PID Parameters.

Figure 44

PID Parameters

2. Click Apply.

244

Calibrate

Advanced Parameters

Advanced Parameters
Use this dialog to adjust:
P

I

D

Padj

Dead Zone

Beta

Position Compensation Coefficient

Boost

See “Step 7: New Parameters” on page 222 for an explanation of these parameters.
To adjust the advanced parameters:
1. Click Advanced Parameters and the Advanced Parameters dialog appears.

Figure 45 Advanced Parameters
2. Use the pulldown to select slot 0.
3. Adjust the parameters, then click OK.
A dialog appears.
4. Click OK.
5. Click Apply.

245

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Open Stop Adjustment
Recomputes the position scale so that at the value entered in the open stop adjustment edit
box as a percent of full stops, the position reads 100%.
In some valves the travel exceeds the nominal valve travel. You can compensate for this so
that the valve position reads 100% at the nominal travel.
Figure 46 shows how this works. This calibrates the position with the full travel of the valve.
Full Travel
100%

Before Open Stop
20 mA

After Open Stop
100%

0

4 mA

Figure 46

0

20 mA

4 mA

Open Stop Adjustment Diagram

To start this function:
1. Enter an open stop value in the edit field.
2. Click Set Open Stop Adj. and the Open Stop Adjustment Successful dialog appears.

Figure 47 Open Stop Adjustment Successful
3. Click OK.
4. Click Apply.

246

Calibrate

Calibrate Context Menu

Calibrate Context Menu
When you right click on the Calibrate tab the Calibrate Tab Context Menu appears.
Only Detach Trend and Help are available in the Calibrate context menu
for Normal and Manual modes.

Figure 48

Calibrate Tab Context Menu

The following items are on the Calibrate context menu.
Run Find Stops: Runs the automatic position calibration process ( “Run Find Stops” on
page 248).
Manual Find Stops: Set the position calibration by moving the valve full closed and full
open. On very large valves, the automatic find stops routine may timeout before the
valve has reached the end of travel. Manual find stops allows calibration of these
valves ( “Manual Find Stops” on page 250).
Open Stop Adjustment: See “Open Stop Adjustment” on page 246.

247

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Run Auto Tune: Automatically finds appropriate PID parameters for the valve ( “Auto
Tune” on page 251).
Full Open: Moves the valve to full open. This command works by taking the valve out of
closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed: Moves the valve to full closed. This command works by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Set Valve Position: Allows you to set the valve to a specific position (this is accomplished
by momentarily returning to manual mode, repositioning the valve, and returning to
setup mode).
Reset to Factory Cal: Resets the signal calibration to factory settings.
Detach Trend: Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a
separate trend display.
Help: Displays the help file at the Calibrate tab instructions.

Run Find Stops
To determine valve position, the controller must measure and save the closed and open
positions of the valve. This can be done automatically by running the Run Find Stops
procedure from the Calibrate tab context menu.
The SVi1000 first exhausts the actuator and measures the position, then fills the actuator and
measures the position. From these measurements the valve position is determined.
Correction can be made for nominal valve travel if it is less than full travel. A progress tab
appears while the find stops process is running.
To run Find Stops:
1. Right click in the tab and select Run Find Stops.
The Starting Run Find Stops dialog appears.

Figure 49 Starting Run Find Stops
2. Click OK.

248

Calibrate

Run Find Stops
When Find Stops is running, the Find Stops dialog appears.

Figure 50

Find Stops

When Find Stops completes, the progress dialog appears as in Find Stops Complete.

Figure 51

Find Stops Complete

3. Click Continue to close the dialog and return to the Calibrate tab.

249

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Manual Find Stops
On some actuators it is possible that the automatic Find Stops procedure will not find the
correct end positions of the travel. A semi automatic method of calibrating the stop positions
is provided.
When Manual Find Stops is selected, the valve is moved to full closed and you are asked to
respond when the valve has reached the full closed position. The valve is then moved to full
open and you are asked to respond when the valve has reached the full open position.
To run Manual Find Stops:
1. Right click in the Calibrate tab and select Manual Find Stops.
The Stroke Valve dialog appears.

Figure 52 Stroke Valve
2. Click OK to continue.
SVi1000 moves the valve to the fully closed position and launches the Valve Closed dialog.

Figure 53 Valve Closed
3. When the valve is fully closed click OK.
SVi1000 moves the valve to the fully open position and the Valve Open Dialog dialog
appears.

250

Calibrate

Auto Tune

Figure 54 Valve Open Dialog
4. When the valve is fully open click OK.

Auto Tune
To start the Auto Tune function:
1. Right click in the Calibrate tab and select Run Auto Tune.
The Start Running Autotune Warning dialog appears.

Figure 55 Start Running Autotune Warning
2. Click OK and the Enter Supply Pressure dialog appears.

Figure 56

Enter Supply Pressure

3. Enter a pressure. click OK and the Aggressiveness dialog appears.

251

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Figure 57 Aggressiveness
Aggressiveness: Enter a value that tends the valve to either fast response
or overshoot. It is advised to increment the value one digit at a time to see
the operational results.

4. Enter a value, click OK and the PID Tuning begins followed in sequence until complete.
5. Click Continue to return to the Calibrate tab.

252

7

Status

What you can do on the Status Tab
Use the Status tab to see at a glance the SVi1000 operating and internal status. The tab is
divided into a series of tabs that provide status, alarm, and fault information in a graphical form
for all aspects of the system.
Each alarm condition is color coded according to the criticality of the alarm:
Blue = low
Yellow = Medium (error conditions that can occur in normal operation, not faults, that
may presently exist or have historically existed)
Red = High (indicates a fault)
Green indicates no faults
On the Status tab you can reset the Current Faults or All Faults (Current and Historical).
The window has selectable tabs that display the associated parameters for each tab.
When you are on the Active Faults tab the current active faults appears (Figure 58). The status
codes are then partitioned into their respective SVi1000 functional areas.

253

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Active Faults
The Status Tab: Active Faults tab displays all current faults and provides current and historical
information on each fault.

Figure 58

Status Tab: Active Faults

254

Status

General

General
The General status tab displays faults that cannot be attributed to SVi1000 components; e.g.
actuator, pneumatics, electronics. General faults are often testing and data faults.

Figure 59

Status Tab: General

255

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Instrumentation
The Instrumentation status tab displays all faults related to instrumentation other than the
actuator, pneumatics or electronics.

Figure 60

Status Tab: Instrumentation

256

Status

Actuator

Actuator
The Actuator status tab displays all faults related to the actuator on which the SVi1000 is
mounted.

Figure 61

Status Tab: Actuator

257

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Pneumatics
The Pneumatics status tab displays all faults related to the SVi1000 pneumatics.

Figure 62

Status Tab: Pneumatics

258

Status

Critical

Critical
The Critical status tab displays all faults critical to SVi1000 operations.

Figure 63

Status Tab: Critical

259

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Electronics
The Electronics status tab displays all electronics faults.

Figure 64

Status Tab: Electronics

260

Status

Clear Current Faults

Clear Current Faults
When you click Clear Current Faults, SVi1000 resets the status in the SVi1000 for all current
faults only. The buttons on the Status tab indicating the current faults revert to green, if the
condition is no longer valid.
To clear current faults:
Click Clear Current Faults.
There should be no faults listed in Figure 65 as current on any tab or in the Active Faults
column.

Figure 65

Current Faults Cleared

261

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Clear All Faults
When you click Clear All Faults SVi1000 resets the status bit in the SVi1000 for all faults, both
historical and current. The buttons on the Status tab indicating the current and historical
faults revert to green.
To clear all faults:
Click Clear All Faults.
There should be no faults listed as current on any tab.

262

Status

Fault Matrix

Fault Matrix
Table 2 describes SVi1000 faults and helps determine the cause and corrective action.
Table 2

Fault Matrix

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

RESET

Reset

Device reset
indicator

LOW_POWER

Low Power

Input current <
3.2 mA

ACTUATOR

Actuator Error

Unable to posi- 2
tion the valve
normally.

FAULT Name
(Anchor)

AIR_SUPPLY_L
OW

Low Air Supply
Warning

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

3

Device reboot. The power
recovered. Incoming signal
was below 2.9 mA.

Reset the flag using ValVue
or HART Host.

3

Device power is below
3.2mA.

Increase mA only if calibration or diagnostics are to
be performed.

1: Air supply is insufficient.
2: Handwheel or mechanical stop present.

1: Increase air supply
above spring final value +
10 psig.

3: Valve stuck of sticking
excessively.

2: Verify if mechanical stop
is present.

4: Unbalance forces on
valve trim exceeds actuator capability.

3: Perform valve signature
using ValVue.

Air supply is not turned on
or is set below 10psig.

Increase air supply above
spring final value + 10 psig.

2
Supply Pressure below low
limit

263

4: If possible, perform valve
signature under process
conditions. Validate sizing
of actuator against process condition using ValSpeQ.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)
POSITION_
ERROR

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

Position Error

If T1 error is
configured
AND the position error outside the error
band for time
T1.

2

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1. Controller is slow to follow command signal due to
physical valve wear, such as
tight packing, stem build up,
throttling surface friction or
actuator friction.

1: Perform valve signature
using ValVue.

2. Valve is slow to follow
command signal due to
large volume actuator.

2: Perform step test signature using ValVue. Verify
that air supply droop during filling is less than 15%
or the set pressure.

3: Validate that the air supply set to the instrument is
3: Valve will not follow com- greater that the spring
mand signal due to insuffi- final + 10 psig.
cient or no air supply.
4: Set the mode to Normal
4: Valve does not move
because the device's mode
is not set to Normal.

using ValVue or HART Host.

5: Perform Autotune or
Manual tuning using Val5:. Valve will not follow com- Vue or HART Host.
mand signal due to poor
6: Verify if Bias Out Range
controller tuning for current or I/P Out of Range events
valve status.
are active.
6: Valve will not follow com- 7: Perform valve signature
mand signal due to control- using ValVue.
ler malfunction such as I/P
or Relay.
7: Valve will not follow command signal due to inline
obstruction.
I2CBUS
KEYPAD

Keypad Fault

MARGINAL_
POWER

Marginal
Power

Possible moisture inside or
connector or
mechanical
failure.

2

The local user interface and
display is defective.

Replace the local user
interface and display
assembly.

2

The input current is less
than 3.85mA.

Increase loop current to
4mA only if calibration and
diagnostics are to be performed.

264

Status

Fault Matrix
Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

CALIBRATION_
FAILED

Calibration
Failed

Calibration of
AO or pressure
failed.

3

Calibration of the input sensors was outside the
acceptable range when
attempting to calibrate.

Using precision measuring
equipment, perform calibration according to
boundary limits of input
sensors.

FIND_STOPS_
FAILED

Find Stops
Failed

Find Stops pro- 3
cess failed,

1: When calibrating stops
(Zero / Span) the travel sensor moved outside the
acceptable limits.

1: Using ValVue or HART
Host, verify that travel sensor counts is 0 +/– 1000
with the valve closed. For a
90° valve, measured sensor count is done at 50%
travel.

2: A procedure timeout
occurred due to an
extremely large volume of
actuator to displace.
3: Valve position could not
stabilize when deenergizing or when energizing the
actuator.

AUTOTUNE_
FAILED

Autotune
Failed

Self tuning
failed to converge on
acceptable
parameters.

3

1: When performing an
Autotune, procedure failed
to complete due valve hysteresis beyond 50%.
2: Air supply is insufficient.
3: Air supply droops significantly during actuator filling.

2: Using ValVue or HART
Host, performs a Manual
Stop calibration.
3: Verify that air supply is
adequate. Verify that
accessories (boosters,
quick exhausts, etc.) are
not creating instability.
1: Using ValVue or HART
Host, perform an Autotune with an aggressiveness level between 2 and 4.
Or manual tune the
parameters according to
the instruction manual.
2: Increase air supply
above spring final value +
10 psig.
3: Perform 5 to 10% steps
and observe air supply
gauge on the controller.

STD_
Std DiagnosDIAGNOSTICS_ tics Failed
FAILED

3

When running a Standard
Actuator Signature, the
device failed to move the
valve between 10% to 90%.

265

1: Selected speed is too
slow. Increase speed for
the test by increments of 1.
2: Insufficient Air supply.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

EXT_
Ext DiagnosDIAGNOSTICS_ tics Failed.
FAILED

Critic
ality
3

RTOS_
SCHEDULING

2
Operating Sys- An internal
tem Fault.
error from
which the
device recovered automatically

SUPPLY_HIGH

High Air Supply Supply PresWarning
sure above
upper limit.

1

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

When running a Extended
Actuator Signature, device
failed to move the valve
between the configured
travel.

1: Selected speed is too
slow. Increase the speed
for the test by increments
of 1.

1:A failure in the air filter
regulator occurred.

1: Replace air filter regulator.

2: A nearby equipment
drawing a high volume,
suddenly quit using air and
created a spike in air supply.

2: Resize air manifold.

2: Insufficient Air supply.

3:Adjust threshold to be 3
to 5 psig greater than set
air supply.

3: The air set is adjusted
greater than configured
threshold.
BIAS_OUT_OF_ Bias Out Of
RANGE
Range

An important
internal
parameter is
out of range.

1

The servo signal to the current to pressure converter is
outside of normal throttling
range.

IP_OUT_OF_
RANGE

I/P Out Of
Range

I/P current
1
feedback is out
of range.

The loop current to the
internal current to pressure
converter is outside of normal range.

TEMPR_OUT_
OF_RANGE

Temp. Out Of
Range

Temperature
outside operating range.

The board temperature is
below –40 °C or above
85 °C.

DI_ABNORMAL

2

3

LATCH_FSAFE
TIGHT_
SHUTOFF

266

NOT IMPLEMENTED

Status

Fault Matrix
Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)
NVM_
CHECKSUM0

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

NVM Checksum Error

The device
failed to read
critical data
from non volatile memory.

1

Probable Cause

A permanent corruption of
the content in non volatile
memory occurred.

Recommended Action

1: Remove power to the
device for 2 minutes and
restart the device.
2: If the failure persist,
replace the device.

RAM_
CHECKSUM

RAM Checksum Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

A corruption of the content
in volatile memory
occurred.

Notify GE at svisupport@GE.com.

FW_
CHECKSUM

Flash Checksum Error

A critical internal fault.

Invalid firmware checksum
due to data corruption.

1: Remove power to the
device for 2 minutes and
restart it.

1

2: If the failure persists,
Replace device.
STACK

Stack Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

FACTORYWRITE

Factory Write
Indicator

Indicator of
writes to non
volatile memory allowed
only for firmware upgrade.

1

NVM_TEST

NVM Test Error An error in non
volatile memory could not
be repaired.

2

0

ESD Trip
occurred and
requires user
intervention to
be released.

A problem with the memory
stack occurred.

Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

A problem occurred when
testing non volatile memory.

Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

267

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

FACTORYMODE Factory Mode
Indicator

Device performs factory
authorized
operations.

1

REF_VOLTAGE

Ref Voltage
Fault

POSITION_
SENSOR

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

Device is in the factory
mode.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

May indicate
1
faulty A/D subsystem.

A component problem is
affecting the circuit board's
reference voltage.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

Position Sensor
Fault

1

Electronic Hall sensor component and related components failed.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

CURRENT_
SENSOR

Current Sensor Fault

1

Electronic input loop current Replace device and report
sensor is damaged.
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

TEMPERATURE
_SENSOR

Temperature
Sensor Fault

1

Electronic temperature sen- Replace device and report
sor is damaged.
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2

Secondary input current
sensor is damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

1
Output Pressure Sensor
Fault (Single
acting) or Output 2 Pressure
Sensor Fault
(double acting).

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

Supply Pressure Sensor
Fault (Single
acting) or Output 1 Pressure
Sensor Fault
(double acting)

1

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Supply Pressure Sensor
Fault (double
acting only)

1

CURRENT_
SENSOR_2ND
PRESSURE1

PRESSURE2

PRESSURE3

Pressure 1
Fault

Pressure 2
Fault

Pressure 3
Fault

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.
2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.

268

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

Status

Fault Matrix
Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)
PRESSURE4

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

I/P Pressure
Sensor Fault

Critic
ality
1

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
PRESSURE5

Atmospheric
Pressure Sensor Fault

2

1: Pressure sensor has been
overpressurized and damaged.

Replace device and report
the problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: Pressure sensor has
failed due to some malfunction.
WATCHDOG_
TIMEOUT

Watchdog
timeout

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

NVM_WRITE
NVM

NVM Write
Fault

A write to non
volatile memory failed; data
may be lost on
reset.

IRQ_FAULT

IRQ Fault

2

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

TMOUT_FLASH Flash ROM Test The test didn't
_TEST
timeout
complete in
time.

2

SELF_CHECK

1

MCU Internal
Malfunction

A critical internal fault.

n/a

NOT IMPLEMENTED

An error occurred when
attempting to write to non
volatile memory.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

The circuit board interrupt
request failed.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.

2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

A general self check failed.

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.
2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

269

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)
SOFTWARE

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

Software Error

2
An internal
error from
which the
device recovered automatically.

Probable Cause

Operating system failed in
conducting a task.

Recommended Action

1: Clear the condition using
ValVue or HART Host.
2: If condition persists,
replace device and report
problem at svisupport@GE.com.

ESD_TRIP

ESD Valve
Tripped

An ESD trip
event is present.

1

AI_PV_LOW

AI_PV_LOW

An ESD trajectory signature
is available for
retrieving.

2

n/a

Not Implemented

AI_PV_HIGH

AI_PV_HIGH

An error saving 2
ESD signature,
not necessarily the latest.

n/a

Not Implemented

IP_SERVO_
LOW

IP_SERVO_
LOW

Last completed PST
failed.

1: The required I/P current is
too low to ensure venting of
the relay.

1,2,3: Service required.
Contact GE.

1

2: The I/P flexure is pushed
against the nozzle.
3: Faulty I/P flow regulator
IP_SERVO_
HIGH

IP_SERVO_
HIGH

2

1: The required I/P current is
too high to maintain output
pressure to actuator.
2: The I/P flexure is pushed
away from the nozzle

An error saving 2
PST signature,
not necessarily the latest.

0

DIAGPROC1

A new PST trajectory signature and data
are available
for retrieving.

Diag Proc1

Last completed Pneumatic Test
failed.

2

270

1, 2: Service required. Contact GE.

Status

Fault Matrix
Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

RANGE1

Range 1

The I/P cut off
switch is not
functional.

2

RANGE2

Range 2

2

LINKAGE_
DRIFT

Linkage Drift

2

VALVE_STUCK_ Valve Stuck
CLOSED
Closed

VALVE_STUCK_ Valve Stuck
OPENED
Opened

Measured friction is below
customer
specified
range.

2

Measured friction is above
customer
specified
range.

2

Probable Cause

Recommended Action

1:In the fully open or fully
closed position a raw travel
sensor count deviation of
x% exists against the calibrated stop value.

1: Verify that linkage is well
fastened.

1: A handwheel is left
engaged.

1: Verify presence of a
mechanical stops such as
a handwheel.

2: Valve is seized in place.
3: Insufficient actuator
thrust.

2: Repair valve.

1: A handwheel is left
engaged.

1: Verify presence of a
mechanical stops such as
a hand wheel.

2: Valve is seized in place.
3: Exhaust port is clogged
up (no venting).
4: An accessory prevents
the air from the actuator to
be vented.

UI_OFF

UI_OFF

Pressure to
move valve is
greater than
customer
specified
range.

2: Re run the Find Stops
method. When device goes
in Failsafe when running
the Find Stop method,
clear alarm and rerun the
stops.

2

271

3: Run a PST or Extended
signature. If friction is
abnormal then overhaul
valve.

2: Repair valve.
3: Verify that exhaust port
is not restricted.
4: Run a TBT test from ValVue. A failure of the TBT
test would indicate a problem in venting.

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Table 2 Fault Matrix (Continued)
FAULT Name
(Anchor)

TEXT For DD &
Valvue2
English

HELP For DD &
Valvue2
English

Critic
ality

RANGE3

Range 3

2
Supply pressure drop
exceeds a customer specified value.

RANGE4

Range 4

PST canceled
before completion.

Probable Cause

2

Status Context Menu
The Status tab context menu contains only a link to Status online help.

272

Recommended Action

8

Check

What you can do on the Check Tab
Check tab provides a method for monitoring and adjusting some of the basic parameters. This
tab is used primarily for troubleshooting.
You can use the right click menu or the Tools menu to Set IP, Unset IP, Full Open, Full Closed and
Detach Trend. To perform any action from the Check tab Context Menu, SVi1000 must be in the
Setup mode. (See “Change Mode” on page 190 for further information.)

Figure 66

Check Tab

273

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Information Displayed on the Check Tab
The Check tab is used for troubleshooting and displays the operating parameters of the
SVi1000 including:
Position

Indicates the actual valve position in % of valve opening. 0% is
always closed and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may
exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible.

Lower Stop/Upper Stop

The Lower and Upper Stop values are the A/D values measured from
the position sensor at the full travel of the valve. The Lower Stop designates the lower end of the valve travel. The raw position measurement must always be between these two numbers.

Raw Position

The A/D value measured from the position sensor.

Current (mA)

The value of the input signal in miliamps.

Raw Signal

The A/D value measured from the signal sensor.

Board Temp (C)

The internal SVi1000 temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The
SVi1000 also reports the lowest temperature and highest temperature in which it has been operating.

Min Temp (C)

This is the minimum temperature in degrees Celsius at which the
SVi1000 reports it has been operating.

Max Temp (C)

This is the maximum temperature in degrees Celsius at which the
SVi1000 reports it has been operating.

PWM

The current D/A value being sent to the I/P that controls the valve
position.

Set PWM

Use this field in conjunction with the right click menu Set I/P command to set the IP for troubleshooting.

274

Check

Check Context Menu

Check Context Menu
The Check tab context menu contains (Figure 67) the following items:
Set I/P: Uses the value in this field as a test. The LED is red while set.
Unset I/P: Unsets the I/P value.
Full Open: Moves the valve to full open. This command works by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed: Moves the valve to full closed. This command works by taking the valve
out of closed loop control and sends a high or low signal to the I/P.
Detach Trend: Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help: Displays the online help at the Check tab instructions.
To execute any Context menu task, SVi1000 must be in the Setup mode.
(See “Change Mode” on page 190.)

Figure 67 Check Context Menu

275

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

9

Optional Switch Load Limits

Output Switches
Introduction
The SVIi1000 supports two identical contact outputs, SW #1 and SW #2 (Digital Output switches),
that can be logically linked to status bits. The Digital Output switch terminals are solid state
contacts. Each switch requires its own power source and must be connected to the appropriate
connector on the Electronics Module Terminal Board.
The switches are polarity sensitive and must be connected only to a DC circuit. The switch (+)
terminal must be electrically positive with respect to the ( –) terminal. If the (+) terminal is
electrically negative with respect to the (–) terminal, then the switch will conduct.
There must be a series load in the circuit to prevent damage to the switch. If the switch is
connected directly across the power source the current will be limited only by the capacity
of the power source and the switch can be damaged.
This section discusses the necessary precautions when configuring a system.
Switch OFF
VSWITCH
ISWITCH

CAUTION

Switch ON

30 VDC max.

 1 V (Switch saturation voltage)

 0.200 mA (Switch leakage current)

1 A max.

Incorrect polarity connection results in an effectively closed connection.
Consult with qualified personnel to ensure that electrical requirements for the
switch are met.

277

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

The maximum voltage that can be applied to the digital switch outputs is 30 VDC. This is an
open circuit parameter (the digital switch is in the open state). Under open circuit conditions,
the switch current will be less than 0.200 mA.
The switch maximum current rating is 1 A. When the switch is ON, the typical voltage drop
across the switch is V. It is essential that the external circuit controls voltage such that the
switch saturation voltage is maintained.
When the switch is on (closed) the external voltage must be dropped across the load
(Figure 68).
CAUTION

The load must be designed such that the current in the circuit is
1 A at all times. Some 3rd party devices, such as incandescent
lamps or solenoids, require surge and back EMI protection to limit
current to 1 A.

Load is designed to ensure that voltage across the switch is < 1 V.
LOAD
External
Voltage
Source

SVi1000 Switch Output:

1 V with switch ON

Figure 68

Simplified Switch Installation Drawing: Correct Configuration

Without a load, when the switch is on (closed) the external voltage would be dropped across
the switch. This damages the switch (Figure 69).

Full voltage drop is
occurring across the
switch (no current
limit in place)

Figure 69

SVi1000
Switch
Output

NOT ALLOWED

External
Voltage
Source

Simplified Switch Installation Drawing: Configuration Not Allowed

278

Checking Switch Operation

Checking Switch Operation
ValVue Commands
This procedure gives an example, using the settings in Figure 70, to see if a switch is
operating:
1. Click the Configure tab, click and Figure 70 appears.

Figure 70

I/O Configure

2. Switch from Normally Opened to Normally Closed or vice versa, click OK and Apply
Changes.
3. Click the Check tab.
4. Select Command 142 Read Switches from the pulldown list and click Send Cmd.
The information field below populates with the configured switch states.
Ensure that the switch just reconfigured has changed state.

279

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

ValVue 12400 Software

ValVue 12400 Software

281

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

ValVue 12400 Work
Environment

1

What is ValVue 12400?
Welcome to ValVue 12400
Masoneilan's ValVue 12400 software is a Human-Machine Interface (HMI) software tool that
provides a powerful interface to Masoneilan’s Digital Level Transmitter,  Model 12400 that uses
HART® communication protocol.
ValVue 12400 is used to configure, calibrate and perform transmitter diagnostics with the Model
12400 (Digital Level Transmitter) utilizing HART communications protocol.
What would you like to do with ValVue 12400?
Monitor operations: See “What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 323.
Quickly set up the 12400: “What you can do on the Basic Setup Screen” on page 349.
Advanced 12400 set up: See “What you can do on the Advanced Setup Screen” on
page 367.
Calibrate the 12400: “Calibration Tools” on page 403.
Perform diagnostics on the 12400: See “What you can do on the Transmitter Diagnostics
Screen” on page 417.
“Status” on page 427 the 12400 status: “What you can do on the Status Screen” on
page 427.
Initiate a trend of the 12400 variables: See “What you can do on the Trend Screen” on
page 341.

283

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue 12400's Work Environment
After you have selected the connected device ValVue 12400 launches and displays the device
in the first ValVue 12400 screen, 12400 Monitor (Figure 71).  ValVue 12400 is a series of tabs,
with each tab representing one of ValVue 12400’s screens.  Tabs and screens are named
according to their function.
 

Figure 71

First ValVue 12400 Screen - after Connected Device Selected

284

ValVue 12400 Work

Working in ValVue 12400
Context Menu

Each ValVue 12400 screen has an associated context menu, accessed by right-clicking on
the screen.  The context menu changes from screen to screen.  Figure 72 shows the 12400
Monitor context menu.

Figure 72

12400 Monitor Screen - Context Menu

Working in ValVue 12400
ValVue 12400 is a typical Windows program, with tabs, menus, dialogs, windows and
toolbars.  After you have successfully logged into ValVue 12400 the currently selected
device appears in ValVue 12400’s Monitor screen.

Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of every ValVue 12400 screen has two menu items; Tools and Help.

285

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Tools Menu
The Tools menu changes according to the selected screen and is most often the same menu
as when right-clicking on the active screen.
For example, when on the 12400 Monitor screen the Tools menu contains the items shown in
Figure 73.

Figure 73

Tools Menu when on 12400 Monitor Screen

286

ValVue 12400 Work

Modes of Operation

When you are on the Transmitter Diagnostics screen the Tools menu contains the items
shown in Figure 74.

Figure 74

Tools Menu when on Transmitter Diagnostics Screen

Modes of Operation
There are three modes of operation available for ValVue 12400: Normal, Setup and Manual
(Controller Activation only).
Normal Operation
In the Normal mode the 12400 measures the Process Variable (PV) and transmits the PV as a
4 to 20 mA signal.  
Setup
In the Setup mode you can set configuration and calibration parameters.
Manual
In the Manual mode you can set configuration and PID calibration parameters.

287

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Change Mode
The Change Mode button located at the bottom left of all ValVue 12400 screens allows you  to
change the operating 12400 mode. When selected, you can change the 12400 mode to either
of two operating modes:
Normal - In this mode the ValVue 12400 measures the Process Variable (PV) and
transmits the PV as a 4 to 20 mA signal. The monitor displays level detection
accordingly (indicator green).
Setup - In this mode you can set calibration and configuration parameters.
In addition to the two user-selectable modes, there is an additional mode that is the result of
internal diagnostics:
Failsafe - When the 12400 cannot operate correctly the device goes into failsafe mode
and remains in the failsafe mode until you intervene. In failsafe mode, the output signal
is either below 3.6 mA or above 20.5 mA, as configured in “Advanced Setup” on
page 367.
 To change 12400 mode:
1. Click Change Mode as (Figure 75).

Figure 75

Selecting Change Mode

288

ValVue 12400 Work

Change Mode

The Change Mode dialog appears.  The active mode is indicated by the radio button.

Figure 76 Change Mode Dialog
2.  Choose the appropriate mode and click OK.

Figure 77

Choosing Setup Mode

289

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

 Setup mode is activated and all setup parameters are enabled.

Figure 78
NOTE 

Setup Mode Activated

Whenever you change modes in ValVue 12400, the screens toggle
between 12400 Monitor and Setup screens (Basic Setup and
Advanced Setup).  If changing mode from Normal to Setup, ValVue
12400 displays the Basic Setup screen (except when on the
Advanced Setup screen).  If changing mode from Setup to Normal,
 ValVue 12400 displays the 12400 Monitor screen.

Exiting in Setup Mode
If when exiting ValVue 12400, you are in the Setup mode, an error message appears.

Figure 79

Exiting in Setup Mode Error Message

Click OK to change to Normal mode and exit ValVue 12400.

290

ValVue 12400 Work

Exit

If changes have been made before exiting, an error message appears.

Figure 80

Error Message of changes made when exiting in Setup mode

 Click Yes to save changes.

Exit
Clicking Exit quits the program.

Help
There are several methods of accessing Help.  The most obvious method and the one
present on each screen is the Help button located at the bottom, right side.  Clicking the
Help button displays the help file table of contents.   See “Types of Help Available” on
page 291 for more information.

ValVue 12400 Help
Types of Help Available
Help is readily available from anywhere within ValVue 12400.  Help exists in help menus, and
in the toolbar available on every screen, and specific context sensitive help on most screens.
Main Help Menu – available by clicking on the help button, located at the bottom,
right corner of every screen.
Context Sensitive Help – available by right-clicking within the screen area.
Toolbar Help - located in the toolbar at the top of every screen, available by clicking
on Help at  the top of the screen.
F1 - the first function key opens the help page that describes the current screen.

Toolbar Help
ValVue 12400’s toolbar contains a Help menu that provides access to the help file contents
(under the Help selection) and under the Tools menu provides access to the context
sensitive help for the selected screen.

291

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Help Menu

The Help menu is the same on every screen and contains:
Help – launches the help file table of contents
Firmware Info – displays information about the firmware loaded into the 12400
About – displays information about ValVue 12400

Context Sensitive Help
Context sensitive help is available on every ValVue 12400 screen by right-clicking in the screen
area.

ValVue 12400 Screens
12400 Monitor
The 12400 Monitor screen provides at a glance access to 12400 operation.  
See “What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 323.

Figure 81

12400 Monitor Screen

292

ValVue 12400 Work

Trend

Trend
From the Trend screen you can observe the performance of the 12400 in real time.
See “What you can do on the Trend Screen” on page 341.
 

Figure 82

Trend Screen without Controller Activation

293

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 83

Trend Screen with Controller Activation

294

ValVue 12400 Work

Basic Setup

Basic Setup
The Basic Setup screen provides access to all basic setup features.  Changes to this screen
require ValVue 12400 to be in Setup mode.
 See also:
“Change Mode” on page 288
“What you can do on the Basic Setup Screen” on page 349

Figure 84

Basic Setup Screen

295

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Advanced Setup
The Advanced Setup screen provides access to all advanced setup and calibration features.
 Changes on the Advanced Setup screen require ValVue 12400 to be in Setup mode (see
“Change Mode” on page 288).
Activate the 12400 PID features by clicking Controller Activation, which enables the
Controller Monitor and the Controller Setup screens.
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using firmware
1.1.2 or later.

See:
“Change Mode” on page 288
“What you can do on the Advanced Setup Screen” on page 367

Figure 85

Advanced Setup Screen 

296

ValVue 12400 Work

Transmitter Diagnostics

Transmitter Diagnostics
The Transmitter Diagnostics screen provides access to all diagnostics.  
 See “What you can do on the Transmitter Diagnostics Screen” on page 417.
 

Figure 86

Transmitter Diagnostics Screen

297

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Status
The Status screen provides 12400 operational status information.  
See “What you can do on the Status Screen” on page 427

Figure 87 Status Screen

298

ValVue 12400 Work

Check

Check
The Check screen provides 12400 operational data.
See “What you can do on the Check Screen” on page 441

Figure 88 Check Screen

299

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Controller Monitor
The 12400 Controller Monitor screen provides at a glance access to 12400 PID operation.  This
screen only appears if Controller Activation is selected on the Advanced Setup screen.
See “What you can do with the 12400 Controller Monitor Screen” on page 303

Figure 89

12400 Controller Monitor Screen

300

ValVue 12400 Work

What you can do on the 12400

What you can do on the 12400 Controller Setup Screen
Controller Setup screen functionality includes:
“PID Controller Setpoint Range” on page 339
“PID Controller Configuration” on page 338
“PID Parameters Settings” on page 337
“PID Controller Alarms” on page 336
 For context menu items (right click menus) see 12400 Controller Monitor Context Menu.

Figure 90

12400 Controller Setup Screen

301

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Controller Monitor

2

What you can do with the 12400 Controller Monitor Screen
The 12400 Controller Monitor screen provides at a glance access to 12400 PID operation.  This
screen only appears if Controller Activation is selected on the Advanced Setup screen. Controller
Monitor screen functionality includes:
“Controller Monitor Controller Bargraphs” on page 304
“Status on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 324
Changing Tag Name: See “Tag” on page 304
“Send Command” on page 307
“PID Controller Mode” on page 309
 For context menu items (right click menus) see “12400 Monitor Context Menu” on page 310.

Figure 91

12400 Controller Monitor Screen

303

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Tag
Enter a unique name.

Controller Monitor Controller Bargraphs
Use this section of the Controller Monitor screen to manipulate the Controller Output or Level
Measurement.
The blue pointers on the Level Measurement bargraph are the Controller Alarms set on the
Controller Setup screen.
The red pointers on the Level Measurement bargraph are determined by the Range Level LRV
and URV fields on the  Advanced Setup screen. These values must be within 10% of the Alarms
fields threshold levels on the same screen.
The units for the fields are set on the Controller Setup screen.

Figure 92

12400 Controller Monitor Screen Controller Bargraphs

304

Controller Monitor

Controller Output

Controller Output
The Controller Output fields are display only.
To set the output:
1.  Click

and a dialog appears.
.

Figure 93
2. Click Yes, the
 field to the left activate.

Change to Manual Mode Dialog
button goes red  and the Controller Output slider and the entry

3. Use the slider or the field  to change to the required value. The change is reflected in the
fields above.
4. Click

to return to Auto mode and a dialog appears.

Figure 94
5. Click Yes and the

Change to Auto Mode Dialog
button goes green.

305

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Level Measurement
The Level Measurement Level (%) field is display only.
To set the level measurement:
1. Click

, if not in Auto mode, and a dialog appears.

Figure 95

Change to Auto Mode Dialog

2. Click Yes, the
button goes green and the Level Measurement slider, the entry
 field to the right and the Level Measurement Setpoint (cm) field activates.
3. Use the slider or the fields  to change to the required value. The change is reflected in all
the fields.

306

Controller Monitor

Send Command

Send Command
ValVue 12400 provides the ability to easily send HART commands to the 12400 , reads the
results, and displays them in the result box below. This function works the same from this
screen as well as from the Controller Monitor screen.
To send a command:
1. Select the command from the drop down list on the Monitor screen (Figure 96).  

Figure 96

Monitor Screen without Controller Activation

307

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 97

Monitor Screen with Controller Activation

2. Click Send Cmd. Read the results in the in the Result display.

Figure 98

Monitor Screen without Controller Activation: Results Displayed

308

Controller Monitor

PID Controller Mode

Figure 99

Monitor Screen with Controller Activation: Results Displayed

PID Controller Mode
Use this area to change the PID block from Auto to Manual and back during configuration
and operation. To change to Normal or Setup mode use the
button ( “Change
Mode” on page 288).

Figure 100

PID Controller Change Mode

309

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

12400 Monitor Context Menu
12400 Monitor Context Menu
This functions the same for the Controller Monitor screen.
The 12400 Monitor Context menu (Figure 101) provides access to the following features:
“Reset” on page 311
“Restore 12400 Data” on page 312
“Save 12400 Data” on page 313
“Reports” on page 314
“Update Configured Data” on page 334
“Detach Trend” on page 347
For further information see:
“Creating Report Files” on page 315
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Generate Report” on page 321

Figure 101

12400 Monitor Context Menu

310

Controller Monitor

Reset

Reset
Reset issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go through its startup routine and
re-initializing all of its operating parameters from non-volatile memory.
To reset an 12400 :
1. Right-click on the 12400 Monitor screen to pop up the context menu and select Reset
(Figure 102). 

Figure 102

Selecting Reset

 ValVue 12400 displays a warning message (Figure 103).

Figure 103

Reset Warning Message

2. Click OK to continue the reset.

311

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Restore 12400 Data
ValVue 12400 provides an ability to download saved parameters from a saved file to the
device.
To restore 12400 data:
1. Right-click on the 12400 Monitor screen to pop up the context menu and select Restore
12400 Data ().  

Figure 104 Selecting Restore Data
 A message appears.

Figure 105

Restore 12400 Memory Dialog

312

Controller Monitor

Save 12400 Data
2. Click OK to continue and a dialog appears (Figure 106).

Figure 106

Opening Restore Data File

3. Choose a saved file.
4. Click Open.

Save 12400 Data
ValVue 12400 provides an ability to save parameters to a device and save it as a file.
To save 12400 data:
1. Right-click on the 12400 Monitor screen to pop up the context menu and select Save
12400 Data (Figure 107).

Figure 107

Selecting Saved Data

313

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
 A message appears.

Figure 108

Saving 12400 Memory Data

2. Click OK to continue.
3. Specify the file name and click Save to store the parameters as a file (Figure 109).

Figure 109

Store 12400 File

Reports
Reports
You  can generate reports that extract information about the 12400 operation. To create a
report you must first create the setup for the report select the parameters you would
There are basically two steps to create reports:
1. Set up the report
2. Generate the report
Prior to defining the set up of the report you must have a template that is an txt, rtf or html
file.  The report template should include the fields that you would like generated in the report.

314

Controller Monitor

Reports
Creating Report Files

You  can create a custom 12400 report by creating a text or rich text format file which is laid
out in the format of the desired report.  The default template is located in:
Win7 and 2008 Server: C:\Program Data\Dresser\ValVue\12400\Report.
WinXP and 2003 Server: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Dresser\ValVue\12400\Report.
ValVue 12400 substitutes the values of 12400 parameters into the text file where ever it
finds a parameter name that matches an 12400 parameter.  For example:
Tag = $$Tag
ValVue 12400 substitutes the actual tag name from the 12400 in place of the $$Tag in the
report.
Any text can be used in a .txt file and printed with NotePad.  With WordPad or Microsoft
Word, the user can use an .rtf format file which can contain special formatting (fonts, sizes,
tabs, etc.) and can contain bitmaps.  Some .rtf formatting is accepted in Word which is not
available in WordPad - you should check the documentation of these program to determine
what options are available (e.g. right align tabs is allowed in Word but not in WordPad).
 HTML files are also allowed and can be displayed with a browser.
The allowed 12400 parameters are listed below.  You are encouraged to list the report file
(report.rtf) shipped with the application for examples.
General Information
$$Tag - Tag Name
$$Descriptor - Descriptor
$$Date - Date
$$Message - Message
Device Specific Information
$$AssemblyNumber - Assembly Number
$$MfgID - Manufacturers ID
$$DeviceType - Device Type
$$DeviceID - Device ID
$$HWRev - Hardware Revision
$$TRSRev - Transmitter Revision
$$SWRev - Software Revision

315

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
$$CmdRev - Firmware command revision
$$PollingAddress -  PollingAddress
Dynamic Information

$$Level $$LevelUnits - Level in selected units
$$Signal mA - Loop Signal
$$SignalPercent % - Signal Percent
$$CircuitTemp $$TempUnits - Temperature in selected degrees
$$Mode - Mode
$$LowLevCal pts - Low Level Cal
$$HighLevCal pts - High Level Cal
Configuration Information
$$TransType - Transmitter Type
$$Mounting - Mounting
$$Action - Action
$$ButtonLock - Buttons (Locked or Unlocked)
$$Password - Buttons Password
$$Controller - Controller Mode
$$Language - Language
 
DO_1
$$DO0Normal - Normal Position
$$DO0ModeMap - Modes Map
$$DO0AttribMap - Attributes Map
$$DO0FaultMap - Faults Map
 
DO_2
$$DO1Normal - Normal Position
$$DO1ModeMap - Modes Map

316

Controller Monitor

Reports
$$DO1AttribMap - Attributes Map
$$DO1FaultMap - Faults Map
Additional Factory Configuration
$$FactoryOptions - Options
Calibration Information
Level Service:
$$SGCal - SG Cal
$$SGLevelSer - SG Ser
 
Interface Service:
$$LSGCal - SG Cal Low
$$USGCal - SG Cal Upper
$$SGLowInfSer - SG Ser Low
$$SGHighInfSer - SG Ser Upper
 
SG Meter Service:
$$SGMeterCalib - SG Meter Cal
$$SGMeterCal - SG Cal
 
Transmitter Ranges:
$$LLevel $$LevelUnits - Low Level
$$ULevel $$LevelUnits - High Level
$$ZeroShift % - Zero Shift
$$ReducedSpan % - Reduce Span
 
Loop Current Range:
$$LowCur mA - Low Current
$$HighCur mA - High Current

317

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Alarms Information
Position Error:
$$Alarm0Activation - Activation
$$Alarm0LowAlarm - Low Alarm
$$Alarm0HighAlarm - High Alarm
$$Alarm0Time1 - Time1 (warning)
 
Position Error Fail:
$$Alarm1Activation - Activation
$$Alarm1Low Alarm - Low Alarm
$$Alarm1HighAlarm - High Alarm
$$Alarm1Time1 - Time1 (warning)
 
Range 1:
$$Alarm2Activation - Activation
$$Alarm2LowAlarm - Low Alarm
$$Alarm2HighAlarm - High Alarm
$$Alarm2Time1 - Time 1 (warning)
 
Range 2:
$$Alarm3Activation - Activation
$$Alarm3LowAlarm - Low Alarm
$$Alarm3HighAlarm - High Alarm
$$Alarm3Time1 - Time 1 (warning)
 
Continuous Diagnostic:
$$Fills - Number of Fills
$$TimeFull hrs - Time Full

318

Controller Monitor

Reports
$$TimeEmpty hrs - Time Empty
$$TimeWorking hrs - Time Working
Details:
$$dgTime0to9Percent - Time 0-9%
$$dgTime10to19Percent - Time 10-19%
$$dgTime20to29Percent - Time 20-29%
$$dgTime30to39Percent - Time 30-39%
$$dgTime40to49Percent - Time 40-49%
$$dgTime50to59Percent - Time 50-59%
$$dgTime60to69Percent - Time 60-69%
$$dgTime70to79Percent - Time 70-79%
$$dgTime80to89Percent - Time 80-89%
$$dgTime90to99Percent - Time 90-99%
Smart and Analog Filters
Input Smart Filtering Parameters:
$$WIntg s - W INTG
$$DZIntg % - DZ INTG
$$WVal s - W VAL
 
First Order Output Filter:
$$Damping s - Damping
Database
Displacer Information:
$$Displacer - Type
 
$$DisplVolume $$DisplVUnits - Volume in selected volume units
$$DisplWeight $$DisplWUnits - Weight in selected weight units
$$DisplHeight $$DisplHUnits - Height in selected height units

319

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

$$DisplDiam $$DisplHUnits - Diameter in selected units
 
Chamber Information:
$$ChamberType - Type
 
$$ChamberOptions - Options
 
Torque Tube Information:
$$TorqueTMatl - Material
$$TorqueTForce - Force
$$ArmLength - Arm Length
 
$$Options - Options
Report Setup
You must select the report template file which is either a text (.txt) or rich text (.rtf). A standard
report comes installed with ValVue 12400 but you can create new reports in other formats
(see Creating Report Files).  
The program that generates the reports can be WordPad, or Microsoft Word for text files.  Rich
text format (.rtf) files can be used with WordPad or Word to give better formatting.
1. Select the report file by clicking the browse button next to the report file edit box and then
select the proper report file.
The Report Template is located in:
Win7 and 2008 Server: C:\Program Data\Dresser\ValVue\12400\Report.
WinXP and 2003 Server: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Dresser\ValVue\12400\Report.
 A version of the report exists for:
English

French

Italian

German

Spanish

Spanish

Japanese

Portuguese

320

Controller Monitor

Reports

2. Select the program by clicking the button associated with the program for use. The
software attempts to autofind the .exe. If the .exe is not found you can use the Browse
button to manually find the .exe. WordPad is often installed in the directory C:\Program
Files\Accessories\ or in C:\windows\.  The actual location of these files or Microsoft Word
varies from computer to computer.
Generate Report
To generate a report:
On the 12400 Monitor screen select Report from the right click, context sensitive
menu. ValVue 12400 launches the report in the report template and application.
There is a text box at the top of the report where you can enter customer related
information.

Figure 110

321

Report

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

3

12400 Monitor

What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen
On the Monitor screen you can:
“Level Indicator” on page 324
“Status on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 324
“Changing Tag and Descriptor Information on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 325
“Changing Message on 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 328
“Send Command” on page 330
“Update Configured Data” on page 334
From the 12400 Monitor screen, you can view the basic functions of the 12400 including; tag and
descriptor, input signal, level and status.  For context menu items see “12400 Monitor Context
Menu” on page 310.

Figure 111

12400 Monitor Screen
323

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Level Indicator
This indicator shows the level position graphically.  The indicator consists of two parts:  
The upper part contains an indicator showing the value of the input signal.  In Normal
mode this is the position setpoint.
The center green bar shows the transmitter level where % = level detected.  The
numerical valve position is shown in the center.

Status on the 12400 Monitor Screen
The 12400 tracks many errors and fault conditions. Standard HART device status information
is displayed in the Status box (bottom left on the Monitor screen).  When there is additional
information on internal fault codes, the Status box contains Additional Status Available. To see
the additional status click the Status tab. The fault codes appear on the Status screen.  The
Status screen has multiple tabs and screens arranged according to their function.  
This functions the same on the 12400 Controller Monitor screen, but is labeled Device Status
instead.

Figure 112

12400 Monitor Screen

324

12400 Monitor

Changing Tag and Descriptor

Changing Tag and Descriptor Information on the 12400 Monitor
Screen
There are two ways to change Tag and Descriptor information using ValVue 12400:
Using Send Command on the 12400 Monitor screen
In Tag and Descriptor fields on the Basic Setup screen
 To change Tag information on the 12400 Monitor screen:
1. Select Write Tag & Descriptor from the drop down list of commands (Figure 113).
 

Figure 113

Selecting Write Tag & Descriptor Command

325

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
2.  Click Send Command (Figure 114)
 

Figure 114

Executing Send Cmd

 ValVue 12400 launches a dialog (Figure 115) for entering the new tag and descriptor data.

Figure 115

Input Tag Data Dialog

The format for Tag allows eight characters that include letters, numerals, and punctuation.
The lower case letters are converted to UPPER CASE. The following are invalid characters:
`{|}~
The format for Descriptor allows 16 valid characters.
The format for Date input must be DD/MM/YY, for example 25/11/09 shown as 25 NOV 2009.

326

12400 Monitor

Changing Tag and Descriptor
3.  Enter all Tag data and click OK (Figure 116).

Figure 116 Saving Input Tag Data
ValVue 12400 saves the tag data and display it in the Tag and Descriptor fields (Figure 117).
 

Figure 117

Tag Information Changed on 12400 Monitor Screen

327

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Changing Message on 12400 Monitor Screen
There are two ways to change Message information using ValVue 12400:
Using Send Command on the 12400 Monitor screen.
In Message field on the Basic Setup screen.
 To change Message information on the 12400 Monitor screen:
1. Select Write Message from the drop down list of commands (Figure 118).  

Figure 118 Selecting Write Message Command
 ValVue 12400 launches a dialog (Figure 119) for entering the new message data.

Figure 119

Input Value Message Dialog

328

12400 Monitor

Changing Message on 12400
2. Enter all Message data and click OK (Figure 120).  

Figure 120

Saving Input Message Data

 ValVue 12400 saves the message data and display it in the Message field (Figure 121).

Figure 121

Message Information Changed on 12400 Monitor Screen

329

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Send Command
Send Command
ValVue 12400 provides the ability to easily send HART commands to the 12400, reads the
results, and displays them in the result box below. This function works the same from this
screen as well as from the Controller Monitor screen.
To send a command:
1. Select the command from the drop down list on the Monitor screen (Figure 122).  

Figure 122 Monitor Screen without Controller Activation

330

12400 Monitor

Send Command

Figure 123

Monitor Screen with Controller Activation

2.  Click Send Cmd. Read the results in the in the Result display.

Figure 124 Monitor Screen without Controller Activation: Results Displayed

331

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 125

Monitor Screen with Controller Activation: Results Displayed

Command Selection
The HART commands available for selection are listed below:
000 Read Identifier
001 Read Primary Variable
002 Read Current
003 Read All Variables
 
011 Read ID from Tag
012 Read Message
013 Read Tag & Descriptor
014 Read Sensor Info
015 Read Device Info
016 Read Assembly Number
017 Write Message

332

12400 Monitor

Command Selection
018 Write Tag & Descriptor
019 Write Assembly Number
038 Reset Configuration Changed Flag
 
042 Reset
 
142 Read DO Switches
143 Read Temperatures
 
148 Read Filter Information
 
151 Read Specific Gravities
 
152 Read Raw Level Range Values
 
157 Read Data Base
 
160 Read Diagnostic Information
 
170 Read Configurations
 
199 Read Coupling Value
202 Read Zero Shift And Reduced Span
220 Read Raw Values
221 Read TCorrected Values
249 Read Device Mode

333

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Command Result Display
The command results appear in the command results window area, located immediately
below the HART command drop-down list.  Each time you send a HART command the old
results are cleared and the new command results appear.  If the command results are longer
than the display are, a scroll bar appears.

Update Configured Data
ValVue 12400 provides an ability to upload parameters from the device.
To update configured data:
1. Right-click on the 12400 Monitor screen to pop up the context menu.
2. Select Update Configured Data (Figure 126).

Figure 126

Update Configured Data Menu

334

Controller Setup

4

What you can do on the 12400 Controller Setup Screen
Controller Setup screen functionality includes:
“PID Controller Alarms” on page 336
“PID Controller Configuration” on page 338
“PID Parameters Settings” on page 337
“PID Controller Setpoint Range” on page 339
 For context menu items (right click menus) see “12400 Monitor Context Menu” on page 310.

Figure 127

12400 Controller Setup Screen
335

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

PID Controller Alarms
Use this section to configure the type of controller alarm and the low and high limit values
while in Setup mode.

Figure 128 Controller Alarms
Parameters include:
Alarm Type

Click either:
Absolute: Determines that alarming is performed when the difference between the Low Setpoint Value and the Low Controller
Alarm value is exceeded or the High Setpoint Value and the High
Controller Alarm value is exceeded.
Deviation: Determines that alarming is performed when the difference between the Low Setpoint Value and the Low Controller
Alarm is exceeded or the High Setpoint Value and the High Controller Alarm value is exceeded using a deviation calculation.

Low Controller Alarm Click the checkbox and enter a value for the appropriate level (s).
(&)/ High Controller
These  limits  must be within 10% of the High Setpoint value and High
Alarm (&)
Setpoint value, respectively. See PID Controller Setpoint Range.

336

Controller Setup

PID Parameters Settings

PID Parameters Settings
Use this set of fields to set the PID parameters.

Figure 129

PID Parameters Settings

Parameters include:
P

P is a dimensionless gain factor related to the proportioning action of the algorithm. It ranges from 0
to 50.

I (s)

Integral time or reset time, is the time constant of
integral control. Higher values of I cause slower integral action. Common values are 0 to 100 (10 seconds). A value of zero disables integral action.

D (ms)

Derivative time or rate time is the time constant of
derivative control expressed in milliseconds. It
ranges from 0 to 5000 msec. A value of zero disables
derivative action.

Kd

Differential gain used in PID controller for position. It
ranges from 0 to 100.

Beta

Beta is a nonlinear dimensionless gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is 0, the controller gain is
linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of error. The
larger the beta, the smaller the gain for small error.
Saves the configuration to the device.

337

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

PID Controller Configuration
Use this section to configure controller limit values while in setup mode.

Figure 130 Controller Configuration
Parameters include:
Controller Action

Click either: Direct or Reverse.

Derivative Source

Click either: PV or Error. This determines whether calculations are
based on process variable or error.

Controller Dead Zone
(%)

Enter the percentage for the control dead zone.

Output Rate Limit
(%/s)

Enter a value to limit the controller output rate.

Manual Reset Bias
(%)

Enter the percentage for the controller bias during a reset.

Controller Rate (s)

Enter the value for the time before running the process controller

338

Controller Setup

PID Controller Setpoint Range

PID Controller Setpoint Range
Use this section to configure setpoint values while in setup mode.

Figure 131 Controller Setpoint Range
 Parameters include:
Low
Setpoint
Value

Enter the desired lowest controller setpoint value. The value can fall below this as in Low
Setpoint Limit. This limit must be within 10% of the Lower Controller Alarm value.

High
Setpoint
Value

Enter the desired highest controller setpoint value. The value can go above this as in High
Setpoint Limit. This limit must be within 10% of the Higher Controller Alarm value.

Initial
Setpoint
Value

Enter the value for the power up controller setpoint.

Low
Setpoint
Limit

Enter the lowest allowable controller setpoint value.

High
Setpoint
Limit

Enter the highest allowable controller setpoint value.

339

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Setpoint Unit Use the pulldown to select the unit for use in the program:
%
mm
cm
m
liter
m3
inch
feet
Cu-in
Cu-ft
kg
g
pound
 If the setpoint units do not match the level units, the Ratio Control Activation automatically activates.
Setpoint
Tracking

Click to enable setpoint tracking. When enabled, if  the controller is changed from manual mode to normal mode, the setpoint is set equal to the current process variable.

Ratio
Control
Activation

Self-enables when setpoint and level engineering units do not match to have the program perform calculations to compensate.

Ratio Gain

Enter the gain coefficient to convert controller setpoint process variable units.

Ratio Bias
(%)

Enter the bias coefficient to convert controller setpoint process variable units.

340

5

Trend

What you can do on the Trend Screen
From the Trend screen you can observe the performance of the 12400 in real time.
These graphs are useful for tuning the 12400 parameters and monitoring performance by
showing current and level detection.  The process trend graphs may be zoomed only on the Y
axis.
The process trend can be detached from the tabbed dialog so that it can be viewed while
performing calibration and diagnostic tasks.  To detach the trend, right-click in any screen.
For more information on specific items on the screen, click on them below.  For context menu
items (right click menus) see “Trend Context Menu” on page 346.
 

Figure 132

Trend Screen without Controller Activation

341

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Trend Screen with Controller Activation
Use this screen to view trends that include Controller Setpoint trace.

Figure 133 Trend Screen with Controller Activation
 Parameters include:
Level (&)

Toggles the blue trace for this value on/off.

Signal Output (mA)

Toggles the red trace for this value on/off.

Controller Setpoint (%)

Toggles the green trace for this value on/off.

342

Trend

Trend Screen with Controller

Opens the Controller Setpoint Setting dialog where you can change the
controller setpoint and level configuration while in Normal mode.

See “What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 323 for
further information.
Opens the PID Parameters Setting dialog where you can change the
controller PID configuration while in Setup or Normal mode.

See “What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 323 for
further information.
Opens the Controller Output Setting dialog where you can change the
controller output while in Setup mode.

See “What you can do on the 12400 Monitor Screen” on page 323 for
further information.
Y Low/ Y High

Use these fields to zoom the traces along the Y axis.
Captures the entire plot to the clipboard for use in another program.
See “Capture to Clipboard” on page 347.

343

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Graph Display
The display of any of the curves on the Trend graph can be turned on or off by checking or
unchecking these boxes:
Level - blue
Signal Output - red
Controller Setpoint - green (for Controller Activation only)
 

Figure 134

Trend Screen without Controller Activation

344

Trend

Changing the Graph View

Figure 135 Trend Screen with Controller Activation

Changing the Graph View
Any portion of a diagnostic graph may be examined more closely by entering the new X and
Y scales in the proper scale edit boxes or by dragging a box across an area of the graph.  If
the mouse is dragged across an area, that area will fill the graphic window.  Right button
clicking on the graph restores the default scales.

345

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Trend Context Menu
This functions identically both with and without Controller Activation.
Functions include:
Refresh Graph: Refreshes the view by stopping the recording presentation and then
restarting.
Stop Graph: Stops the presentation of traces.
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Detach Trend” on page 347
Help - launches context sensitive help

Figure 136

Trend Context Menu 

346

Trend

Detach Trend

Detach Trend
The Detach Trend feature, when selected removes the display from the tabbed dialog and
creates a separate trend display.  You can move the detached trend anywhere on your
computer desktop.  When you close the detached Trend, the screen returns to the ValVue
12400 tabbed dialog.
 

Figure 137

Detached Trend Screen

Capture to Clipboard
Clicking this button saves an image of the graph on the clipboard.  The image (a bitmap)
may be pasted into another document (e.g. into a Microsoft Word document).

347

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

6

Basic Setup

What you can do on the Basic Setup Screen
On the Basic Setup screen you can:
Configure the “Transmitter” on page 353
Calibrate the Level Transmitter SG: See “Level Transmitter” on page 357
“Signal Range” on page 365
Set the “SG Service” on page 363
To make any changes on the Basic Setup screen the operating mode of ValVue 12400 must be in
Setup mode.
 

Figure 138

Basic Setup Screen Features
349

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Apply
After you have completed basic setup you must click on Apply to save all changes made. 

Exiting in Setup Mode
If, when exiting ValVue 12400, you are in the Setup mode, an error message appears.

Figure 139

Exiting in Setup Mode Error Message

1. Click OK to change to Normal mode and exit ValVue 12400.
If changes have been made before exiting, an error message appears.

Figure 140

Error Message of changes made when exiting in Setup mode

2.  Click Yes to save changes. 

350

Basic Setup

Changing Tag Information on the

Changing Tag Information on the Basic Setup Screen
Once in the Setup mode, you can change the Tag Information on the Basic Setup screen.  All
information fields become active (Figure 141).
 

Figure 141

Tag Information Fields Active

351

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
 To change a field:
1. Enter new text in all required fields.

Figure 142

Tag Information Fields Changed 

2. Click Apply (Figure 143) to save the changes.

Figure 143 Saving Tag Information Changes

352

Basic Setup

Transmitter

Transmitter
The Basic Setup screen allows you to configure the following parameters for the 12400:
“Transmitter Mode” on page 353
“Transmitter Mounting” on page 354
“Transmitter Action” on page 355
“Display Language” on page 356

Transmitter Mode
The 12400 can be set for the transmitter to work strictly as a level transmitter to interface
with a computer remotely.
To change the Transmitter Mode:
Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Transmitter Mode
field and select either Level or Interface.
The Transmitter Mode field is changed.

Figure 144 Selecting Transmitter Mode

353

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Transmitter Mounting
The 12400 can be mounted on either the left or the right side of the torque tube.  
To change the Transmitter Mounting:
Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Transmitter
Mounting field and select either Left Mounted or Right Mounted.
The Transmitter Mounting field is changed.

Figure 145

Selecting Transmitter Mounting

354

Basic Setup

Transmitter Action

Transmitter Action
The 12400 can be operated to transmit either direct (current increases when level increases)
or reversed (current decreases when level increases).  
To change the Transmitter Action:
Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Transmitter Action
field and select either Direct or Reversed.
The Transmitter Action  field is changed.

Figure 146

Selecting Transmitter Action

355

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Display Language
The language displayed in 12400 LCD can be changed.
To change the Display Language:
Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Display Language
field and select one of English, French, Spanish, Portuguese, Japanese, Italian and
German.
The Display Language field is changed.

Figure 147

Selecting Display Language

356

Basic Setup

Level Transmitter

Level Transmitter
Level Transmitter
If the Specific Gravity (SG) of the service liquid used for 12400 calibration is known, and is
different than the factory calibrated SG, the Level transmitter features allow you to
configure the 12400 with a new Calibration SG.  The Level transmitter features are:
“Record SG”  - enter a specific SG and save as Calibration SG
“Zero” on page 358 - set the zero value for the new Calibration SG
“Span” on page 359 - set the span for the new Calibration SG 

Record SG
ValVue 12400 allows you to enter a new Specific Gravity (SG) value for the service liquid
used with the 12400 and save the new SG as the SG used for calibration.
To enter the new SG value:
1. Enter the new SG value in the field.
2. Click Record SG (Figure 148).

Figure 148

Saving New SG Calibration

 Figure 151 appears indicating that the new SG was successfully recorded.

357

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

3. Click OK to close the message box and return to ValVue 12400.

Figure 149 New SG Saved Message

Zero
ValVue 12400 allows you to also record the zero value for the newly saved calibration liquid
Specific Gravity (SG).
To obtain a new zero SG value:
1. Click ZERO (Figure 150).

Figure 150

Selecting SG ZERO

 ValVue 12400 displays a message dialog (Figure 151).
2. Put the displacer, connected to the 12400, completely in the air.
3. Press OK.

358

Basic Setup

Span

Figure 151

SG ZERO Message

 If ValVue 12400 successfully obtains the Zero value, a dialog appears (Figure 152).
4. Click OK.

Figure 152

Zero Value Recorded Message

Span
ValVue 12400 allows you to also record the span value for the newly saved calibration liquid
Specific Gravity (SG). To obtain a new SG span value:
1. Click SPAN (Figure 153).

Figure 153

Selecting SG Span

359

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

 ValVue 12400 displays a dialog (Figure 154).
2. Immerse the displacer, connected to the 12400, completely into the new liquid.
3. Press OK to continue.

Figure 154

SG SPAN Message Box

 If ValVue 12400 successfully obtains the Span value, Figure 155 appears.
4. Click OK to close the message box and return to ValVue 12400.

Figure 155 Span Value Recorded Message

360

Basic Setup

Applying Basic Setup Changes

Applying Basic Setup Changes
When you make any changes on the Basic Setup screen, the changed field appears and the
Apply button is enabled.
To save changes, click Apply.

Figure 156 Applying Changes Made

361

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Basic Setup Context Menu
The Basic Setup Context menu (Figure 157) contains the following selections:
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Reports” on page 314
“Detach Trend” on page 347
Help - launches context sensitive help

Figure 157

Basic Setup Context Menu

362

Basic Setup

SG Service

SG Service
If the Specific Gravity (SG) of the process liquid is different than the Calibration SG, you can
set a specific SG Service.  To set the SG Service:
1. Enter a new SG value.
 

Figure 158

Selecting SG Service

363

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
2. Click Apply (Figure 159).

Figure 159

Saving SG Service

If the Service SG is not between 0.001 and 20.000 you receive the error message (Figure 160).

Figure 160

Service SG Error Message 

364

Basic Setup

Signal Range

Signal Range
The Signal Range feature on the 12400 Basic Setup screen allows you to set low (LRV) and
upper (URV) current values for the 12400 signal range, within an allowed range of the
default 4 - 20 mA.
To set the LRV or URV for the signal range:
1. Enter a value in the LRV or URV field (Figure 161).

Figure 161

Selecting LRV

365

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

2.  Click Apply (Figure 162) to save the new range.

Figure 162 Saving New Signal Range
If the LRV is less than 3.8 mA or if the URV is greater than 20.5 mA, you receive an error
message:

Figure 163

Signal Range Error Message

366

Advanced Setup

7

What you can do on the Advanced Setup Screen
On the Advanced Setup screen you can:
Configure the “Local User Interface” on page 368
“SG Meter Calibration” on page 370
Set Alarm parameters ( “Alarm” on page 374)
Set “DO Switches” on page 379
Set the Reduced Signal “Range” on page 376
Access Database function to save Displacer/Torque parameters ( “Database” on
page 382)
Access Filters and Tuning function to set Filter and Damping Time parameters ( “Filters
and Tuning” on page 395)
Access Calibration Tools to calibrate Primary and secondary Signal output currents (
“Calibration Tools” on page 403)
“Set SIL2 Settings” on page 373
Activate the 12400 PID features by clicking Controller Activation, which enables the
“Controller Monitor” on page 303 and the “Controller Setup” on page 335 screens. To
make any changes on the Advanced Setup screen, ValVue 12400 must be in Setup mode.
Activate the Torque Tube Compensation features by clicking TT Activation. Click Process
Temperature and enter a temperature at which you are targeting the process to operate.

367

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
 

Figure 164
NOTE

Advanced Setup Screen

Note: The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

Local User Interface
ValVue 12400 allows you to set access control to the 12400 through the Local User Interface
feature.
NOTE

Note: The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

Available locks selections are:
Configure Enabled - allows 12400 control through LDC display and local buttons
Configure Disabled - prevents local user from writing any changes made through
ValVue 12400.

368

Advanced Setup

Changing Configuration

Changing Configuration
The process to change configuration is simple:
1. Click the required radio button, as shown in Figure 165.

Figure 165

Selecting Button Locks - Configure Disabled

2.  If password protect is enable, a password input dialog appears after the configuration
change to make the user input a password.

Figure 166 Input Password
 The password is used to unlock the protection of local buttons.
NOTE

The password enable/disable is set via third party tools. ValVue
12400 does not support this feature.

369

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

SG Meter Calibration
Use the Specific Gravity (SG Meter) Calibration function on the Advanced Setup screen to
directly read the specific gravity of the process liquid from the 12400. SG Meter is used to
perform on site new calibration or simulation, with or without liquid.
To complete the SG Meter Calibration function you must first Zero the SG and then perform a
Span reading to arrive at the new SG Calibration.

SG Meter Calibration Zero
To Zero the SG Meter Calibration:
1. Click ZERO.
ValVue 12400 issues the dialog shown in Figure 167.
2. Empty the displacer chamber.
3. Click OK.

Figure 167 Zero SG Meter Dialog
 After the Zero reading is complete, a dialog appears (Figure 168).
4. Click OK to close the dialog and return to ValVue 12400.

Figure 168 Zero Completed Message

370

Advanced Setup

Span

Span
To complete the SG Meter Calibration execute SPAN for the new SG:
1. Click SPAN.
2. Fill the displacer chamber.
3. Click OK (Figure 169).

Figure 169 Span SG Meter Dialog
 After completing the Zero and Span operations the new SG Calibration appears in the SG
Calibration field as shown in Figure 170.

Figure 170

SG Meter Calibration Changed

371

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Reset to Factory
If you would like to restore the SG Calibration to the factory default:
1. Click Reset to Factory. ValVue 12400 displays a dialog (Figure 171).
2. Click Yes if you want to reset the calibration to the factory.

Figure 171

Reset Factory Calibration Dialog

 ValVue 12400 displays a dialog (Figure 172).
3. Click OK to close the dialog and return to ValVue 12400.

Figure 172

Calibration Reset Dialog

 The SG Calibration Factory Default displays in the SG Calibration field (Figure 173).

Figure 173

SG Calibration Reset to Factory Defaults 

372

Advanced Setup

Set SIL2 Settings

Set SIL2 Settings
Use this screen to set SIL2 settings, which include:
SIL2 Configuration - Use the pulldown to select whether the device is a SIL2 device or
not.
Fault Timeout - There are three SIL2-related faults:
Output is out of range - output exceeds -200% to 105%.
Position out of Range - level sensor fault.
Loop Current Error - mismatch between commanded and read loop output.
Diagnosed only in Normal mode.
Each of these are a failsafe producing fault. To avoid a false failsafe, you can use the Fault
Timeout field to enter a time (in 10 second increments) during which a fault is not reported.
 For example, a setting of two sets a timeout of 20 seconds.
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

Figure 174

SIL2 Settings

373

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Alarm
ValVue 12400 allows you to define conditions for when an alarm is triggered.  
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using firmware
1.1.2 or later.

There are two alarms available, with a high low value setting for each alarm and a hysteresis
value.  
 To change Alarms settings:
1. Enable an alarm by clicking the checkbox, located to the right of the Alarm name.
2. Set the alarm Threshold and Time values.

Figure 175

Setting Alarm Parameters

3. Click Apply.
If the Alarm Low time is less than one second, or greater than 600 seconds, an error
message appears (Figure 176).

374

Advanced Setup

Alarm Hysteresis

Figure 176

Alarm Low Time Error Message

If the Alarm High time is less than one second, or greater than 600 seconds, an error
message appears (Figure 176).

Figure 177

Alarm High Time Error Message

If the Alarm Low Threshold + Hysteresis is greater than Alarm High Threshold, an error
message appears (Figure 178).

Figure 178 Alarm Low/High Threshold Error Message

Alarm Hysteresis
ValVue 12400 also allows you to adjust the hysteresis value for alarms.
To change the Alarm Hysteresis:
Enter the new Alarm Hysteresis value.
If you enter an Alarm Hysteresis value less than 0.49% or greater than 50%, an you error
message appears (Figure 179).

Figure 179

Alarm Hysteresis Error Message

375

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Range
For an application where the level change is smaller than the displacer height, it is possible to
obtain the full signal range by adjusting the range parameters: Level LRV (Low Range Value)
and Level URV (Upper Range Value).
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using firmware
1.1.2 or later.

Change Level LRV or URV Setting
To change the setting:
1. Enter a new value in the Level LRV or Level URV field.
2. Click Apply.

Figure 180

Changing LRV

376

Advanced Setup

Changing Level Units
 

Figure 181 LRV Error Message

Figure 182

Upper Level Error Message

Changing Level Units
To change the Level Units:
Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Level Units field
and select: %, cm,  Cubic Inches, CuFt, CuMtr, ft, grams, in, kg, lb, liter, meter or
mm.
The Level Units field changes.

Figure 183

Changing Level Units

377

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Zero Shift
To change the Zero Shift % setting:
1. Enter a new Zero Shift value in the field.
2. Click Apply.

Figure 184

Zero Shift Error Message

Reduced Span
To change the Reduced Span setting:
1. Enter a new value in the Reduced Span field.
2. Click Apply.
 

Figure 185 Reduced Span Error Message

378

Advanced Setup

DO Switches

DO Switches
DO Switches
The 12400 supports two identical contact outputs which can be logically linked to status
bits. The two output switches can be opened or closed in response to conditions that the
12400 detects. These conditions are:
 Always In Normal Position - the switch is not controlled by the 12400 and remains in it’s
default position.
 Failsafe - the switch is activated when the 12400 is in failsafe mode.
Reset - the switch is activated whenever a reset has occurred and the switch remains
activated until the 12400 status is cleared.
Not Normal Mode- the switch is activated whenever operating mode is anything but Normal.
Time Working - the switch is activated only for 12400 working time.
Low Level_1 - the switch is activated whenever the 12400 detects the low level of this switch
control.
Low Level_2 - the switch is activated whenever the 12400 detects the low level of this switch
control.
High Level_1 - the switch is activated whenever the 12400 detects the high level of this
switch control.
High Level_2  - the switch is activated whenever the 12400 detects the high level of this
switch control.
Fault Detected - the switch is activated whenever a fault is detected.
Local UI Off - the switch is activated whenever the local UI is Off.
 The switch can be configured to default as normally open or normally closed. 

379

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configuring DO Switches
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using firmware
1.1.2 or later.

To configure the DO Switches:
1. Select if the switch is normally closed or open by clicking the associated radio button.

Figure 186

Selecting Switch Closed or Open

380

Advanced Setup

Configuring DO Switches
2.  Use the drop down list to select the function.

Figure 187

Selecting Switch Function

 The newly selected switch function appears in the switch field.

381

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Database
Database
The ValVue 12400 Database feature allows you to save to a database, and all the Displacer
and Torque Tube specifications associated with the 12400.
To start the Database feature:
Click Database.
ValVue 12400 launches the Database window (Figure 188).

Figure 188

Database Window

Displacer
The Database window allows you to specify the following Displacer parameters:
Displacer Volume
Volume Units
Displacer Weight
Weight Units
Displacer Height
Displacer Diameter

382

Advanced Setup

Displacer
Displacer Volume
To change the Displacer Volume:
Enter a new Displacer Volume.

If you enter a Displacer Volume less than zero liter (zero Culn) and greater than 40 liter
(2441 Culn), you receive the error message (Figure 189).

Figure 189 Displacer Volume Error Message
Volume Units
To change the Volume Units:
Use the drop down list to select: Culn or liter.
The Volume Units field are changed.

Figure 190

Selecting Volume Units

383

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Displacer Weight
To change the Displacer Weight:
Enter a new Displacer Weight.

If you enter a weight less than zero kg (zero gram, 0lb) or greater than 100 kg (100000
gram, 220.46 lb) you receive the error message (Figure 191).

Figure 191

Displacer Weight Error Message

Displacer Weight Units
To change the Displacer Weight Units:
Use the drop down list to select: gram, kg, or lb.
The Displacer Weight Units field is changed.

Figure 192

Selecting Weight Units

384

Advanced Setup

Displacer
Displacer Height
To change the Displacer Height:

Use the drop down list to select: 14", 32", 48", 60", 72", 84", 96", 120", or Custom (in
inch). If selecting Custom (in inch) you must type in the value in the Displacer Height
field.
The Displacer Height field is changed.

Figure 193

Selecting Displacer Height

If you entered a Displacer Height less than 0.0 in. or greater than 3937.0 in., an error
message appears (Figure 194).

Figure 194

Displacer Height Error Message

385

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Displacer Diameter
To change the Displacer Diameter:
Enter a new  Displacer Diameter.

If you enter a value less than 0 in. or greater than 19.6850 in., an error message appears.

Figure 195

Displacer Diameter Error Message

Displacer Type
The Database window allows you to select the following Displacer Type parameters
(Figure 196):
With Displacer
Non Standard
Stainless
Extension Rod

Figure 196

Displacer Type Parameters

386

Advanced Setup

Torque Tube and Chamber
 To change any of the Displacer Type parameters:
Select or de-select the appropriate checkboxes (Figure 197).

Figure 197

De-selecting Displacer Type Checkbox

Torque Tube and Chamber
The Database window allows you to specify the following Torque Tube and Chamber
parameters:
Chamber Type
Torque Tube Matl.
Torque Tube Force
Arm Length

387

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Chamber Type
To change the Chamber Type:

Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Chamber Type field
and select: No Chamber, 12400, 12401, 12402, 12403, 12404, 12405, 12406,
12407,12408 or 12409.
The Chamber Type field is changed.

Figure 198

Selecting Chamber Type

388

Advanced Setup

Torque Tube and Chamber
Torque Tube Matl.
To change the Torque Tube Material:

Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Chamber Type
field as and select: No Torque Tube, Inconel/Carbon, Inconel/Stainless, Inconel/
Special, Stainless/Carbon, Stainless/Stainless, Stainless/Special, Monel/Carbon,
Monel/Stainless, Monel/Special, Special/Carbon, Special/Stainless, or Special/
Special.
The Torque Tube Matl. field is changed.

Figure 199

Selecting Torque Tube Material

389

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Torque Tube Force
To change the Torque Tube Force:

Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Torque Tube Force
field and select: Non Standard, 1, 2, or 4.
The Torque Tube Force field is changed.

Figure 200

Selecting Torque Tube Force

390

Advanced Setup

Torque Tube and Chamber
Arm Length
To change the Arm Length:

Click on the arrow of the drop down list, located at the right of the Arm Length field
and select: Non Standard, 4", 8", or 16".
The Arm Length field is changed.

Figure 201

Selecting Arm Length

391

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Chamber Options
The Database window allows you to select the following Chamber Options:
Special Steel
Carbon Steel
Stainless Steel
To change the Chamber Options:
Select the required radio button, located to the left of the appropriate chamber option
material.

Figure 202

Changing Chamber Options

 Figure 203 shows the newly selected Chamber Option.

Figure 203

Chamber Option Changed 

392

Advanced Setup

Options

Options
The Database Options include:
Extension HT/LT: Activates or deactivates the extension.
Process Temperature: Activates and deactivates the temperature field used to take
into account the composition of the torque tube.
To change the options:
1. Select or de-select the checkbox located to the left of the Extension HT/LT parameter.

Figure 204

Extension HT/LT Selected

2. Select or de-select the checkbox located to the left of the Process Temperature
parameter, enter a temperature in °C and click Set.

393

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Applying Database Changes
After you have made displacer, torque tube, and chamber changes in the Database window
they must be saved to the database.
To save changes:
Click Apply.
To cancel any changes made, click Cancel.  All parameters in the revert to previous
values.

Figure 205

Saving Database Changes

394

Advanced Setup

Filters and Tuning

Filters and Tuning
Filters and Tuning
ValVue 12400 allows you to filter the output of the Hall effect sensor before the signal is
digitally processed.  Filter parameters are accessed on the Filters and Tuning window.
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

To start the Filters and Tuning feature:
Click Filters and Tuning (Figure 206).

Figure 206

Starting Filters and Tuning

395

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

 ValVue 12400 launches the Filters and Tuning window (Figure 207).

Figure 207

Filters and Tuning Window

Smart Filter Enable
The Smart Filter eliminates noise from the Hall effect sensor output.
To enable the Smart Filter:
Click on the checkbox, located to the left of Smart Filter Enable.

Figure 208

Activating Smart Filter Parameters

396

Advanced Setup

Filter Parameters

Filter Parameters
The filter parameters are always available to edit: Filter Time Constant, Deadzone, and
Validate window. Once Smart Filter has been enabled, the smart filter parameters are ready
for use.
Filter Time Constant
To change the Filter Time Constant:
1. Click Smart Filter Enable.
2. Enter a new value in Filter Time Constant.
3. Click Apply.

Figure 209

Changing Filter Time Constant

If you enter a Time Constant less 0.1 sec and greater than 60 sec., an error message
appears (Figure 210):

Figure 210

Filter Time Constant Error Message

397

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Deadzone
To change the Deadzone:
1. Click Smart Filter Enable.
2. Enter a new value in Deadzone.
3. Click Apply.

Figure 211

Changing Deadzone Variable

If you enter a Deadzone variable less 0.01 % and greater than 100.00%., an error message
appears (Figure 212):

Figure 212

Deadzone Error Message

398

Advanced Setup

Filter Parameters
Validate Window
To change the Validate Window:
1. Click Smart Filter Enable.
2. Enter a value in Validate Window.
3. Click Apply.

Figure 213

Changing Validate Window

 If you enter a Validate Window time less 0.06 sec and greater than 60.00 sec., an error
message appears (Figure 214):

Figure 214

Validate Window Error Message 

399

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Autotune
ValVue 12400 provides an Autotune feature on the Filters and Tuning window.
To start Autotune:
Click Autotune (Figure 215).

Figure 215

Starting Autotune

 The Autotune process begins and a progress dialog appears (Figure 216):

Figure 216 Running Procedure Dialog 

400

Advanced Setup

Damping

Damping
The Damping Time is always available to edit. Once Damping Time has been enabled, the
Filter Time Constant is really practice into use.
Damping Time
To change the Damping Time:
1. Click Damping Time Enable (Figure 217).

Figure 217

Click Damping Time Enable

2. Enter a new  Damping Time and click Apply.
 If you enter a Damping Time variable less 0.10 sec and greater than 60.00 sec, an error
message appears (Figure 218).

Figure 218

Damping Time Error Message

Applying Filters and Tuning Changes
When you make any changes in the Filters and Tuning window, click Apply to save.

Calibration Filter
It is ratio filter and  always available to edit when OOS mode.

401

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Filter Parameter
To change the Damping Time :

Enter a new value in Filter Time Constant.

Figure 219

 Entering a Filter Constant

If you enter a Filter Time Constant variable less 0.10 sec and greater than 60.00 sec, an
error message appears (Figure 220).

Figure 220  Filter Error Message

402

Advanced Setup

Calibration Tools

Calibration Tools
Calibration Tools
ValVue 12400 allows you to calibrate each of the Analog Output (AO) signal.  Calibration
tools are accessed on the Calibration Tools window.
NOTE 

The milliammeter must have an accuracy rating better than that
of the Model 12400 Level transmitter (0.5% of span). The meter
accuracy rating must be better than 8 microamperes.

Connect the transmitter Primary Signal (or Secondary Signal) with a milliammeter in series
with a 12 to 30 VDC supply.  When the circuit is interrupted to insert the milliammeter, the
power is interrupted and the transmitter starts up in Normal mode; it must be changed to
Setup mode before opening the Calibration Tools.
To start the Calibration Tools:
Click Calibration Tools (Figure 221).
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

Figure 221

Starting Calibration Tools

403

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
WARNING

This procedure causes the output current of the transmitter to
change. Always put the control system in Manual before
performing this operation. The 12400 Level transmitter must be in
Setup mode to proceed.

ValVue 12400 launches the Calibration Tools window (Figure 222).

Figure 222

Calibration Tools Window

Signal Selection
ValVue 12400 allows you to calibrate either Primary Signal or Secondary Signal.
To select the signal:
Click on the radio button, located to the left of the signal name (Figure 223).

Figure 223

Selecting Signal

404

Advanced Setup

4 - 20 mA Calibration

4 - 20 mA Calibration
The Calibration Tools window provides the ability to calibrate the 4 - 20 mA source for the AO
signal.
4 mA Calibration
To calibrate Zero at 4 mA:
1. Click on 4 mA as (Figure 224).

Figure 224

Starting 4 mA Calibration

 Once 4 mA calibration is started, the 4 mA button grays out.

Figure 225 4 mA Calibration Active
2. Read the value from the precision milliammeter.

405

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

3. Enter the reading from the milliammeter into the field and click Set (Figure 226).

Figure 226

Setting 4 mA Calibration

 ValVue 12400 displays the dialog (Figure 227).
4. Click Yes to confirm setting the 4 mA calibration.

Figure 227

Saving 4 mA Calibration

If the range is outside that shown in Figure 228, an error message appears.

Figure 228

4 mA Calibration Error Message

406

Advanced Setup

4 - 20 mA Calibration
20 mA Calibration
To calibrate Span at 20 mA:
1. Click on 20mA (Figure 229).

Figure 229

Starting 20 mA Calibration

 Once 20 mA calibration is started, the 20 mA button is greyed out.

Figure 230

20 mA Calibration Active

2. Read the value from the precision milliammeter.

407

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

3. Enter the reading from the milliammeter into the field and click Set (Figure 231).

Figure 231

Setting 20 mA Calibration

 ValVue 12400 displays the dialog (Figure 232).
4. Click Yes to confirm setting the 20 mA calibration.

Figure 232

Saving 20 mA Calibration

If the range is outside that shown in Figure 233, an error message appears.

Figure 233

20 mA Calibration Error Message

408

Advanced Setup

4 - 20 mA Calibration
Correct Calibration Error

If you receive an error message (Transmitter specific error or Parameter value too large)
(Figure 234), it means that AO is calibrated incorrectly, and the read-back signal is out of
range. And the calibration process is aborted.

Figure 234

HART Error Message For Improper Calibration
 

The solution is:
1. Click Reset to factory.
2. Redo calibration. 
Set Current Generating
The Calibration Tools window also allows you to generate an output current for checking the
current loop and to check 12400 calibration.
To generate output the desired current:
1. Enter the current output value in the Set Current field.
2. Click on Set Current.

Figure 235

Setting Current Output

 A dialog appears (Figure 236).
3. Verify that the current output is correct with a precision milliammeter in series with the
AO output.

409

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
4. Click OK to return to Calibration Tools.

Figure 236 Current Output Verification Dialog
If the range is outside that shown in Figure 237, an error message appears.
 

Figure 237

Current Output Error Message

Coupling
The Calibration Tools window allows you to check and adjust  the coupling of the instrument
to the torque tube. See the instruction EU 12400 for details of the mechanical method that
must be performed. Coupling adjustment is normally performed in the workshop when the
instrument is assembled to the torque tube.  
The adjustment  may be inspected using ValVue and a special weight.  The displacer must be
removed and the instrument removed from service to perform the check.
To start the coupling calibration:
1. Change the mode to Setup.
2. Tighten the adjustment screw. (For a standard displacer (907 cm3, 1362 gr), hang 727.1 gr
on the torque arm. See the instruction for a special displacer.).

410

Advanced Setup

Calibration Reset
3. Click Coupling method (Figure 238).

Figure 238

Starting Coupling

4.  Pull the indexing flexure until it is centered by the pin.
ValVue 12400 displays the coupling value. The reading must be between -5% and +5%.
If the reading is beyond the limits, an adjustment is required. (Refer to the instruction for
the workshop method.)
5. Click Stop Coupling to complete.

Figure 239

Stop Coupling

Calibration Reset
The Calibration Tools window provides the ability to reset the AO Main and AO Optional to
the factory defaults.

411

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Resetting All
To reset both AO Main and AO Optional:

1. Select the checkbox, located to the left of Reset All (Figure 240).

Figure 240

Selecting Reset All

2.  Click Reset to Factory (Figure 241).

Figure 241

Resetting to Factory

 ValVue 12400 displays the dialog (Figure 242).
3. Click Yes to reset to the factory default.

Figure 242 Confirming Reset

412

Advanced Setup

Calibration Reset
 If Reset has been executed, a dialog appears (Figure 243).

Figure 243 Reset Succeeded
Resetting AO Main
To reset AO Main:
1. Select the checkbox, located to the left of AO Main.
2. Click Reset to Factory (Figure 244).

Figure 244

Selecting Reset AO Main

 A dialog appears (Figure 245).
3. Click Yes to reset to the factory default.

Figure 245 Confirming Reset

413

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

 If Reset has been executed, ValVue 12400 displays a dialog shown (Figure 246).

Figure 246 Reset Succeeded
Resetting AO Optional
To reset AO Optional:
1. Select the checkbox, located to the left of AO Optional (Figure 247).
2. Click Reset to Factory (Figure 247).

Figure 247 Selecting Reset AO Optional
 A dialog appears (Figure 248).
3. Click Yes to reset to the factory default.

Figure 248 Confirming Reset

414

Advanced Setup

Advanced Setup Context Menu

 If Reset has been executed, ValVue 12400 displays a dialog (Figure 249).

Figure 249 Reset Succeeded

Advanced Setup Context Menu
The Advanced Setup context menu (Figure 250) contains the following selections:
Report Setup
Report
Detach Trend
Help - launches context sensitive help
NOTE

The SIL2 feature (see fields in red box) is available using
firmware 1.1.2 or later.

Figure 250

Advanced Setup Context Menu

415

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Applying Advanced Setup Changes
When you make any changes on the Advanced Setup screen, the changed field appears and
the Apply and Cancel buttons activate.
To save changes, click Apply.
To cancel any changes made, click Cancel.  All parameters on the screen revert to
previous settings. 

416

8

Transmitter
Diagnostics
What you can do on the Transmitter Diagnostics Screen

The Transmitter Diagnostics screen provides diagnostic data at a glance and allows you to:
View continuous diagnostic data ( “Continuous Diagnostic Data” on page 418)
Reset continuous diagnostic data ( “Continuous Diagnostic Data” on page 418)
View Diagnostic Data in a graphical format ( “Detail” on page 419)
Reset Service Time ( “Service Time” on page 420)
Set Service Time Interval ( “Service Time” on page 420)
“AO1/AO0/Signal Trim in Raw Count” on page 422
“Calibration Raw Range” on page 423
Test Specific Gravity Meter ( “Specific Gravity Meter” on page 424)

Figure 251

Transmitter Diagnostics Screen
417

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Continuous Diagnostic Data
The Continuous Diagnostic Data area of the Transmitter Diagnostics screen provides a live
view of transmitter diagnostics that you can reset and view in a graphical format.

Reset Data
ValVue 12400 allows you to reset continuous diagnostic data collection.
To reset data:
1. Click Reset Data (Figure 252).

Figure 252

Selecting Reset Data

 A warning dialog appears (Figure 253).
2. Click OK to continue the reset.

Figure 253

Reset Diagnostic Data Dialog

418

Transmitter

Detail

Detail
ValVue 12400 provides a detailed graphical format of the diagnostic data.
To view the diagnostic data detail:
Click Detail.

Figure 254

Selecting Diagnostic Data Detail

 ValVue 12400 displays the data in a graphical format (Figure 255).

Figure 255 Diagnostic Data Detail

419

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Service Time
The Service Time area of the Transmitter Diagnostics screen allows you to reset the service
time and change the service interval.

Reset
To reset the Service Time:
1. Click Reset (Figure 256).

Figure 256

Selecting Reset

A warning dialog appears (Figure 257).
2. Click OK.

Figure 257 Reset Service Time Dialog

420

Transmitter

Set Interval

Set Interval
To set the Service Time interval:
1. Click Set Interval (Figure 258).

Figure 258 Selecting Set Interval
 ValVue 12400 launches a data input dialog (Figure 259).

Figure 259 Service Time Interval Dialog

421

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

2.  Enter the new Service Time interval, in seconds and click OK to save.

Figure 260

Service Time Interval Set

AO1/AO0/Signal Trim in Raw Count
Transmitter Diagnostics screen provides a live view of AO1/AO0/Signal trim in raw count.

Figure 261

AO1/AO0/Signal Trim in Raw Count

422

Transmitter

Calibration Raw Range

Calibration Raw Range
ValVue 12400 provides a live view of calibration raw range.
CalibLRV
CalibURV
SGMeterLRV
SGMeterURV

Figure 262

Raw Range of Calibration

423

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Specific Gravity Meter
ValVue 12400 allows you to start the Specific Gravity Meter from the Transmitter Diagnostics
screen to assist in diagnosing transmitter problems.
When the meter is not running the button, located to the right of the meter field, will be grey.
To start the Specific Gravity Meter:
Click Meter On/Off (Figure 263).

Figure 263

Starting Specific Gravity Meter

424

Transmitter

Specific Gravity Meter

 The Specific Gravity Meter is now working, indicated by the green button (Figure 264).

Figure 264

Specific Gravity Meter On

425

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Transmitter Diagnostics Context Menu
The Transmitter Diagnostics context menu (Figure 265) contains the following selections:
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Reports” on page 314
“Detach Trend” on page 347
Help - launches context sensitive help

Figure 265

Transmitter Diagnostics Context Menu

426

9

Status

What you can do on the Status Screen
The Status screen allows you to see at a glance the operating and internal status of the 12400.
The screen is divided into a series of tabs that provides active faults, log only, annunciate, and
fail safe.
On the Status screen you can reset the Current Faults or All Faults (Current and Historical).  You
can also select and clear an individual fault.
The window has selectable tabs that display the associated parameters for each tab when
selected; e.g. when you select Log Only tab the Log only status and fault codes appear.
When you are on the Active Faults tab the current active faults appear (Figure 266).  The
status codes are then partitioned into their respective 12400 functional areas.

Figure 266

Status Screen
427

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Active Faults
The Active Faults status tab (Figure 267) displays all current faults.

Figure 267

Status Screen Active Faults Tab

428

Status

Log Only

Log Only
The Log Only status tab (Figure 268) displays all faults that have been logged.

Figure 268 Status Screen Log Only Tab

429

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Annunciate
The Annunciate status tab (Figure 269) displays all faults that have been annunciated.

Figure 269

Status Screen Annunciate Tab

430

Status

User Faults 2

User Faults 2
The User Faults 2 status tab (Figure 270) displays user related, position sensor and
temperature read/sensor faults. The Fail High and Fail Low fields are not active for a SIL2
device.

Figure 270

Status Screen User Faults 2 Tab

431

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Failsafe
The Failsafe status tab (Figure 271) displays failsafe faults. If configured as a SIL2 device the
three faults in the red box appear.

Figure 271

Status Screen Failsafe Tab

432

Status

User Faults 1

User Faults 1
The User Faults 1 status tab (Figure 272) displays user related, current sensor and loop
output faults. The Fail High and Fail Low fields are not active for a SIL2 device

Figure 272

Status Screen User Faults 1 Tab

433

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Clearing Faults
ValVue 12400 has three types of fault clearing available:
Clear Fault - clears an individual, entered fault
Clear Current Faults - clears only current faults
Clear All Faults - clears all faults

Clearing Individual Fault
The Status screen allows you to select and clear an individual fault in the Active Faults tab that
has a HART fault code, digits enclosed in parentheses, located to the right of the text
describing the fault (Figure 273).  
To clear an individual fault:
1. Enter the HART number for the fault  in the text box  located to the right of Clear Fault.

Figure 273

Entering Fault HART Number

434

Status

Clearing Individual Fault
2. Click Clear Fault (Figure 274).

The selected fault is cleared from the Active Faults list and the Clear Fault button returns
to an inactive state.

Figure 274

Clearing Fault

435

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Clear Current Faults
Use Clear Current Faults to reset the status in the 12400 for all current faults only. The buttons
on the Status screen indicating the current faults revert to green, if the condition is no longer
valid.
To clear current faults:
Click Clear Current Faults (Figure 275).

Figure 275

Clearing Current Faults

436

Status

Clear All Faults

Clear All Faults
Use the Clear All Faults button to reset the status bit in the 12400 for all faults, both historical
and current. The buttons on the Status screen indicating the current and historical faults
revert to green.
To clear all faults:
Click Clear All Faults (Figure 276).

Figure 276

Clearing All Faults

437

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Set Fail High/Fail Low
On the User Faults 2 and User Faults 1 tab on the Status screen you can set whether position
sensor, temperature readings, temperature sensor, current sensor, or loop output testing fail
at the predefined high or low level.  The Fail High and Fail Low fields are not active for a SIL2
device.
To change this setting:
1. Enter Setup mode.
2. Click on the correct radio button; Fail High or Fail Low. In Figure 277, Fail Low has been
selected.

Figure 277

Fail Low Selected

438

Status

Set Fail High/Fail Low
3.  Click Set to save Fail Low.

Figure 278

Fail High/Low Changed

439

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Status Context Menu
The Status context menu (Figure 279) contains the following selections:
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Reports” on page 314
“Detach Trend” on page 347
Help - launches context sensitive help
 

Figure 279

Status Context Menu

440

10

Check

What you can do on the Check Screen
The Check screen provides the user a method for monitoring some of the basic parameters.  This
screen is used primarily for troubleshooting.  
The Check screen (Figure 280) has two areas of data:
Temperature-Corrected Values
Calibration Raw Range
The only active area of the Check screen is the Context menu. 

Figure 280 Check Screen
441

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Check Context Menu
The Check Context menu (Figure 281) contains the following selections:
“Report Setup” on page 320
“Reports” on page 314
“Detach Trend” on page 347
Help - launches context sensitive help

Figure 281

Check Context Menu

442

ValVue VECTOR Software

ValVue VECTOR Software

Instruction Manual
Product description
t
 WirelessHART technology
t
 Provides 24/7 monitoring
t
 One Port wireless adapter
t
 Local/Direct power option

443

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

1

Introduction

Introduction
The ValVue VECTOR is a user friendly interface that facilitates ValVue wireless setup and
diagnostics.

Figure 282 ValVue VECTOR

445

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue VECTOR Software
ValVue VECTOR provides the ability to:
Quickly and easily perform initial set up of the VECTOR on the network. See “Setup
Wizard Screen” on page 465.
Configure VECTOR operations. See “Configure Power Tab” on page 474.
Monitor VECTOR operation. See “Status Screen: General” on page 505.
Diagnose some problems using the ValVue VECTOR’s event configuration, monitoring
capabilities and maintenance. See “Status Screen: General” on page 505 and
“Maintenance Tab” on page 501.

About This Manual
These instructions are intended to help a field engineer install and setup a VECTOR in the most
efficient manner possible. If you experience problems that are not documented, contact GE or
your local GE representative.

Conventions Used in This Manual
Conventions used in this Manual are as follows:
Italicized letters are used when referencing a term used in the software, for emphasis
on important items and for fields where data appears or for user entered data.
Actions performed on buttons, checkboxes, etc. appear bolded.
Indicates important facts and conditions.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided could
result in property damage or data loss.

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation, which if not avoided could
result in death or serious injury.

446

2

Installation

Installation
Requirements
The ValVue installation procedures require basic knowledge of Microsoft Windows operating
systems and the VECTOR (V1100). For additional information describing the VECTOR, consult the
V1100 Instruction Manual.
Hardware and Operating System Requirements
Listed below are the hardware and software requirements for the computer used with ValVue:
Hardware
Processor:

PC with minimum 1 GHz Intel Pentium or compatible

RAM:

Minimum 1 Gig

Disk:

Application Component: 15 M
Database Component: 30 M minimum

Software
OS:

Windows XP SP2, Window Server 2003 SP1 or Window Server 2003 R2, or Windows Server 2008

HART Related Issues
Before installing ValVue software, determine which port the computer uses for serial (RS 232 or
USB) communication. The HART modem uses this port for communication with the VECTOR.

447

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
HART Compliance

The VECTOR requires a HART compliant communications loop. The HART protocol specifies the
noise level, impedance requirements, and configuration of the loop. Conventional
communications loops consisting of the following components meet requirements for HART
compliance.
Quality current source having low noise and high impedance
Minimum loop impedance of 250 Ohms
Twisted pair cable suitable for 4 to 20 mA current loops
When a safe barrier separates the communicating devices, a HART compliant barrier must be
used.
Some Distributed Control System output circuits are incompatible with the
HART protocol. Connecting a HART modem to such a circuit can cause a
process upset. Use a HART filter. Consult the DCS manufacturer to verity
that the DCS is compatible with HART, before connecting a HART modem
and using the ValVue VECTOR.
Communicate Failure
If the PC (using a modem) fails to communicate with the HART or ValVue the message No
Devices Found appears in the Overview screen. If the device communications fails during the
session, the message HART I/O Failed appears. Communication failure prevents the PC from
establishing a link. Possible causes of communications failure related to installation include:
Insufficient Loop Current and Voltage
Poor wiring contacts
Improper connection of the HART modem to the computer
Incorrect serial port
Using the VECTOR with another HART master terminal in service
Insufficient loop impedance (a minimum of 250 Ohms is required)
Field device has a nonzero polling address (Set the VECTOR to multidrop)
If HART compliance problems are suspect prepare a detailed description of the loop, including
all devices on the loop, type of wiring used, loop length, and presence of any possible
interference sources before contacting the factory for assistance.

448

3

ValVue VECTOR
Operational Overview
Operational Overview

After you have selected the connected device ValVue launches and the device appears in the
first Overview tab (Figure 283).

2

1

3

4

Figure 283

VECTOR Work Environment

449

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue is the main interface for connected devices. Once a connected
device is selected the VECTOR software launches.

Buttons and Fields
Tag fields

Adapter Status

Send Cmd button
4 Status

Tag
Long Tag
Descriptor
Message
Date
Assembly Number
This data can be changed on the “Setup Wizard Screen” on
page 465 and in “Configure Adapter Info Tab” on page 495.
PV Loop Current: Displays the detected loop current.
PV: Displays the process variable.
Direct Power Voltage: Displays the voltage if the device is configured for direct voltage.
Electronics Temperature: Displays the board temperature
detected by the device.
Device Status: Displays the device status as text and in a colored status bar, where:
Green means the connection is good.
Red means the connection is bad.
Wireless Status: Displays the status of the wireless
connection, some of which include Idle, Searching, Joining,
Operational and Join Failed. LED color indicates:
Green means the join succeeded.
Red means the join failed.
Beige means the process is idle or in the process of
searching or joining.
Click to make a request for the display of various
system data in the box below.
The VECTOR tracks operation and provides several health indicators. When there is a fault code available in the VECTOR, this box
contains Additional Status Available. The LED is gray for OK or red
when a flag is set.

450

ValVue VECTOR

Overview Tab Tools Menu and
Setup Wizard button

Click to open the “Setup Wizard Screen” on page 465.

Sub devices ... button

Click to scan for network sub devices and have
them listed in 299 “Scan Result” on page 468. See “Scan for
Devices” on page 468.

Overview Tab Tools Menu and Context Menu
The Overview tab Tools menu consists of:
“Reset” on page 451

“Report Setup” on page 452

“Report” on page 454

“Save SVI Data” on page 454

“Restore SVI Data” on page 455

“Update Configured Data” on
page 455

“Detach Trend” on page 455

Help

Reset
Use this feature to perform a master reset of the VECTOR to default values.
Remove the loop from automatic control before proceeding.

To do this:
1. Select Tools > Reset and Perform Master Reset appears.

Figure 284 Perform Master Reset

451

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
2. Click

and a second dialog appears.

3. Click

again and a dialog that says Device reset OK appears.

4. Click
again and a dialog that says NOTE Loop may be returned to
automatic control appears.
5. Click

.

Report Setup
One of the functions available on the Overview tab is the ability to generate reports. ValVue
VECTOR provides the ability to extract information about the VECTOR operation and dump the
information into a report format. When extracted the information from a device requires a
template file into which to dump the data. To generate a report with ValVue VECTOR you must
first create a report template file that includes the parameters you would like to include in the
report as well as personalization.
How to Create Reports
There are three basic steps to create reports:
1. Set up the report: Create a report template file.
2. Select the report setup (report template file): Using the Report Setup command from the
Monitor context menu.
3. Generate the report: Using the Report command from the Tools or context menu.
Creating Report Template Files
You can create a custom report by creating a rich text format (RTF) file which is laid out in the
format of the desired report. The default template is located in:
Win7 and 2008 Server: C:\Program Data\Dresser\ValVue\VECTOR\Report.
WinXP and 2003 Server: C:\Documents and Settings\All Users\Application
Data\Dresser\ValVue\VECTOR\Report.
Prior to selecting the set up of the report you must create the report template file in an rtf
format. The report template includes the operation parameters that you would like populated
in the report.
ValVue VECTOR substitutes the values of parameters into the text file where ever it finds a
parameter name that matches a VECTOR parameter. For each parameter you would like
included in the report place $$ in front of the parameter name.
For example:
Tag = $$Tag

452

ValVue VECTOR

Overview Tab Tools Menu and

VECTOR substitutes the actual tag name from the unit in place of the $$Tag in the report.
When creating the report template file, use an application that can save the report template
file to an rtf or text file such as WordPad, Microsoft Word, or Notepad.
rtf files are preferred as you can apply special formatting to the file that can contain
fonts, sizes, tabs, etc. and bitmaps. Some .rtf formatting is accepted in Word which is
not available in WordPad.

To set up the report:
1. Right click on the Overview tab and select Report Setup or select it from the Tools
menu.
The Report Setup dialog appears.
2. Click Browse and navigate to the desired folder for Report Template File Name.
3. Click Browse and navigate to the desired folder for Report Program to use or click the
desired button and the Auto Find feature will find the program for you.

Click to
automatically
use Wordpad
for reports.

Click to
automatically
use Word for
reports.

Figure 285

Report Setup

453

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Report
To generate a report:

1. On the Overview tab right click and select Report.
2. Click OK.
ValVue populates the report template. An example of a report is shown in Figure 286.

Figure 286

Report Sample Using Template

Save SVI Data
Saves the VECTOR internal parameters in a file that can be read and restored.

454

ValVue VECTOR

Overview Tab Tools Menu and
Restore SVI Data

Restores the contents of a dump file to a Masoneilan device. This can be used to clone a
VECTOR into a new VECTOR.
Items like tag should be unique.

Update Configured Data
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 287

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.
Detach Trend
Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

455

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Working in ValVue VECTOR
ValVue VECTOR is set up as a typical Windows program, with tabs, menus, dialogs, windows
and toolbars. After logging into ValVue the currently selected device appears in Overview tab.
You can either perform operations on the Overview tab or select another tab.

Toolbar
The toolbar at the top of every tab has two menu items: Tools and Help. The Tools menu
depends on the tab and is explained with that tab.

Modes of Operation
The VECTOR has two modes of operation:
Active Search: In this mode the software is searching for networked devices.
Join Network: In this mode the VECTOR is joined to the network.

Exit
Clicking Exit quits the program.

ValVue VECTOR Help
Help is readily available from anywhere within the program, including:
Main Help menu: Available by clicking Help, located at the bottom, right corner of every
tab.
Context Sensitive Help: Available by right clicking within the tab area.
Toolbar Help: Located in the toolbar at the top of every tab, available by clicking Help
at the top of the tab.

Help Menu
The Help menu is the same on every tab and contains:
Help: Launches the help file table of contents.
Firmware Info: Displays information about the firmware loaded into the VECTOR.
About: Displays information about ValVue VECTOR.

456

ValVue VECTOR

ValVue VECTOR Tabs

ValVue VECTOR Tabs
Overview Tab
From the Overview tab, you can view the basic functions of the VECTOR including tag and
identification, input signal, setpoint, operational voltages, and device status. You can also
run the Setup Wizard, scan for subdevices and send HART commands and view results.

Figure 288

457

Overview

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend Tab
From the Trend tab you can observe real time valve performance. These process trend graphs
are useful for monitoring loop current and direct power voltage.

Figure 289

458

Trend

ValVue VECTOR

Configure Tab

Configure Tab
Use the Configure tab to configure all aspects of VECTOR operations.

Figure 290 Configure

459

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Maintenance Tab
Use the Maintenance tab to perform maintenance-related resets, self tests and network
scans for subdevices and network device disconnect.

Figure 291 Maintenance

460

ValVue VECTOR

Status Tab

Status Tab
Use the Status Tab: Device_Status tabs to see the VECTOR operating and internal status.
There are eight tabs, which include:
“Active Faults”: Use this subtab to view a list of active faults, the Start Date, Start
Time and Alert Description.
“Device_Status”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for overall device faults.
“IO_and_Subdevice_Status”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for subdevices.
“Ext_Device_Status”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for extended device
status, when available.
“WirelessHART_Status”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for the
WirelessHART connection.
“Device_Diagnostic_Status_0”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for the
device diagnostic tests.
“Device_Specific_Status_0”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for data that
has field device status information relating to: failures / warnings / status of
process's.
“Device_Specific_Status_1”: Use this subtab to view all current faults for the wireless
setup.

Figure 292

Status Tab: Device_Status

461

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Communication Tab
Use the Communication tab offers tools to track and analyze wireless communications status
and performance.

Figure 293

Communication

462

ValVue VECTOR

Alerts Tab

Alerts Tab
Use the Alerts tab to see a list of alerts, both pending and historical with related
information.

Figure 294

463

Alerts

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Battery Tab
Use the Battery tab to configure battery settings and view battery data.

Figure 295

464

Battery

4

Setup Wizard

Setup Wizard Screen
From the Setup Wizard screen you can setup the VECTOR by configuring:
Tag, Long Tag, Descriptor and Message.
Power type and associated characteristics
Wireless Network ID and Join Key
Report & Backup

Figure 296

Setup Wizard

465

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Buttons and Fields
Tag

Enter up to eight characters long and is used to identify the VECTOR in the
system and appears throughout the program. This can reflect a label from a
plant drawing or a control system.

Long Tag

Same as Tag, but you can enter up to 32 characters.

Descriptor

Enter up to 16 characters to describe the user of the valve.

Message

Enter with up to 32 characters for any information.

Configure Power
Mode checkbox

Check this box to enable the Power Mode pulldown list.

Power Mode

Use this pulldown list to select the type of adapter power:
Loop Powered - Low (1V)
Loop Powered - Medium (1.5 V)
Loop Powered - High (2.0 V)
Loop Powered - Highest (2.5 V)
Direct Powered - High Power
Direct Powered - Power Saving
Direct Powered - External Battery

Join Device to
Network checkbox

Click to validate that the Join Key is correct and to add the device to the network by clicking Apply.

Network ID

Enter a unique ID using digits only from 0 to 36863.

Join Key

Enter four characters in both boxes for each of the eight fields.

Report & Backup

Click and when Setup Wizard completes a report of settings appears using
the selection made in Report Setup.

466

Setup Wizard

Run Setup Wizard

Run Setup Wizard
To run the Setup Wizard:
1. Click

and Figure 296 appears.

2. Enter text into the Tag, Long Tag, Descriptor and Message field, as required.
3. Click Configure Power Mode and use the Power Mode pulldown to select a setting.
4. Click Join Device to Network and enter a Network ID and the four Join Keys
5. Click

and a dialog appears, Figure 297, listing the items for execution.

Figure 297 Setup Wizard Selected Items
6. Click OK and the tasks are completed and Setup Wizard Complete appears. If Report &
Backup is selected a dialog appears; click OK.

467

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Figure 298

Setup Wizard Complete

7. Click Continue.

Scan for Devices
To scan for network subdevices:
1. Click

and Scan Result appears listing the devices found.

Figure 299

Scan Result

2. Click OK.

468

5

Trend

Trend Tab
Use the Trend tab (see Figure 300) to observe real time VECTOR performance. These trend
graphs are useful for monitoring loop current and direct power voltage. The graphs can be
manipulated only on the Y axis.
You can detach the trend as a separate window for viewing while changing power. To detach the
trend:
Right click in any tab select Detach Trend.

Figure 300

Trend Tab Displaying All Parameters

469

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Trend Graph Features
The display of any of the curves on the Trend graph may be turned on or off by checking or
unchecking these boxes:
Loop current: blue
Direct Power Voltage: black
Trend: Y Low/High

The Y axis of the trend graph can be set by entering the values in
these edit boxes. Enter a number and hit Tab or Enter key to set
the scale.

Changing the Graph View
Any portion of a graph may be examined more closely by entering the new Y scale in the
proper scale edit box or by dragging a box across an area of the graph. If the mouse is
dragged across an area, that area fills the graphic window. Right clicking or double clicking on
the graph restores the default scales. The X scale cannot be resized.

Capture to Clipboard
Clicking this button saves an image of the graph on the clipboard. The image (a bitmap) may
be pasted into another document (e.g. into a Microsoft Word document).

470

Trend

Trend Right Click and Context Menu

Trend Right Click and Context Menu
When you right click on the grey area of the Trend tab (but not in the graph area), the Trend
Context Menu appears. The following items appear:
Refresh Graph

Restarts the sampling of the trend graph.

Stop Graph

Stops the sampling of the trend graph. It can be restarted by
selecting Refresh Graph.

Open

Opens an Open Trend Data File dialog to select a .tre file for viewing.

Save

Opens an Save Trend Data File dialog to save a file (.tre).

Detach Trend

Removes the display from the tabbed dialog and creates a separate trend display.

Help

Displays the help file at the Trend tab instructions.

Figure 301

Trend Context Menu

471

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

6

Configure

Configure Screen: Overview
The Configure screen and its subtabs has an overall purpose of configuring all VECTOR settings.
It is comprised of eight subtabs:
“Configure Power Tab” on page 474

“Configure Wireless Tab” on page 477

“Configure Wired Tab” on page 479

“Configure 4-20 mA Tab” on page 481

“Configure Burst Settings Tab” on
page 484

“Configure Event Notification Tab” on
page 490

“Configure Adapter Info Tab” on
page 495

“Configure Adapter Info Tab” on
page 495

473

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configure Power Tab
Use this screen to configure power type and associated characteristics.

Figure 302

Configure Power

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

474

Configure

Configure Power Tab
Buttons and Fields
Adapter Power
Setting

Use this pulldown list to select the type of adapter power:
Loop Powered - (1V)
Loop Powered - (1.5 V)
Loop Powered - (2.0 V)
Loop Powered - (2.5 V)
Direct Powered - High Power
Direct Powered - Power Saving
Direct Powered - External Battery

Field Device Power
Control

When used in a direct power configuration, the VECTOR can activate a
switchable terminating resistor between the HART and the RETURN signal
wires. This eliminates the need for an external terminating resistor in some
installations, allowing for a switchable field device power and controlled
automatically by the VECTOR.
Off: Sets so the field device power control switch is never connected.
On: Sets so the field device power control switch is always connected.
You can then choose the enable the Field Device Cutoff Enable
feature.
Switching: Sets the device to switching mode controlled by the
VECTOR.
The VECTOR powers on and off HART field devices as needed by the
network operation for measurements. Use this when running off a
limited power source, such as an external battery or solar cell.
When used in combination with Burst mode, the VECTOR schedules
measurements from the connected HART devices, and turns on the
loop when a scheduled measurement is needed.
For this mode to work properly, you must determine and configure
Field Device Turn On Time parameter for the connected wired HART
field devices.
Switching mode has two possible configurations:
With Field Device Cutoff Enable disabled. This requires setting Field
Device Turn On Time.
With Field Device Cutoff Enable enabled. This requires setting Field
Device Turn On Time and Field Device Cutoff Voltage.

Field Device Turn On
Time

Enter the lag time between when a loop is turned on and when communications with subdevices commences.

475

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Field Device Idle
Time

Enter the time in seconds for the device to remain powered after an
unscheduled event. This event could be a HART query over the WirelessHART
handheld or detection of another HART master trying to communicate (such
as a wired HART handheld). This prevents the VECTOR from powering off a
field device when some other master is attempting communication with the
field device. Generally best left at the default of 60 seconds.

Field Device On Estimated Percent

Enter the estimated time for the field device to be powered during normal
operation. This is a calculation based upon the Field Device Turn On Time and
the VECTOR burst mode ( “Configure Burst Settings Tab” on page 484) settings. The lower this value is, the less power used. Display only.

Field Device Cutoff
Enable

Use this pulldown to enable or disable whether a Field Device Cutoff Voltage
is used.

Field Device Cutoff
Voltage

Enter the voltage below which power to the field devices is cutoff.

Read button

Click this to read parameters into ValVue from the VECTOR.
These can then be used as a basis for further configuration.

476

Configure

Configure Wireless Tab

Configure Wireless Tab
Use the Configure Wireless to configure the wireless connection attributes, connect and
disconnect from the network and enable or disable over-the-air radio upgrade function.

Figure 303

Configure Wireless

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

Buttons and Fields
Wireless
Network ID

Enter a unique ID using digits only from 0 to 36863.

477

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Join Mode

Use the pulldown list to select the join method:
Don’t attempt to join: No attempt is made to join the network.
Join Now: Attempt to join as soon as you click

.

Attempt to join immediately on powerup or reset: Defers join until one
of these conditions occurs.
Radio Power Output

Use the pulldown to select the VECTOR's radio transmit power:
0 dBm
+10 dBm

Radio Upgrade
Over the Air Upgrade Use the pulldown to select enabled or disabled to allow over the air

programming.

478

Configure

Configure Wired Tab

Configure Wired Tab
Use the Configured Wired to configure the HART connection characteristics and the
subdevice scan characteristics.

Figure 304

Configured Wired

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

479

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Buttons and Fields
Hart Master
Master Mode

Use the pulldown list to select the HART mode as either:
Primary: This the default
Secondary
This is the HART Master mode used by the VECTOR when communicating as a HART
master with wired-HART devices.

Retry Count

Enter the number of retries to establish communication before failure.

Device Scan Mode
Sub-Device Scan On
Power-up

Use the pulldown list to enable or disable scans automatically on powerup.
When enabled, the VECTOR scans the 4-20 mA loop for attached HART devices on
power-up or when the VECTOR is reset. These devices are added to the list of supported sub-devices for the VECTOR and are communicated to the WirelessHART
gateway.
The VECTOR can support a maximum of eight sub-devices. If more than eight
wired-HART devices are detected, only the first eight devices are used.

Scan Start Address

Enter the start address for the scan.

Scan Start Address

Enter the stop address for the scan.

Sub-Device Time
Sync

Use the pulldown list to set so that when you scan you synchronize the subdevice
times with the scanning device.

Polling Address

Enter the address. This is the HART polling address used to communicate to the VECTOR on the wired-HART interface using a HART capable host (such as a HART communicator or PC with HART modem).
By default, the VECTOR is at HART polling address 15. Range: 0 and 63.

480

Configure

Configure 4-20 mA Tab

Configure 4-20 mA Tab
Use the Configure 4-20 mA to configure the parameters related to 4-20 mA current loop.

Figure 305

Configure 4-20 mA

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

481

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Buttons and Fields
PV Units

Use the pulldown to select the engineering units for use in representing PV-related
values.

PV Linearization
Mode

Use the pulldown to select the transformation function applied to the field device
output and percentage range:
Linear
Special Curve
Use the PV Linearization Table to configure the curve characteristics. See “Create a
PV Linearization Table”.

PV Damp

Enter a damping constant in seconds.

PV Upper Range
Value

Enter a value for the upper operational endpoint. This defines operational 100%
mark.

PV Lower Range
Value

Enter a value for the lower operational endpoint. This defines operational 0% mark.

Upper Fault Current

Enter a value to set the maximum current output of the loop when in a fault
condition.

Lower Fault Current

Enter a value to set the minimum current output of the loop when in a fault condition.

Upper Limit of Proportional Range

Enter a value for the proportional range upper limit.

Lower Limit of Proportional Range

Enter a value for the proportional range lower limit.

PV Linearization
Table

Use the PV Linearization Table to set the linearization characteristics. This is settable
at all times, but is only applied when Special Curve is selected.

482

Configure

Create a PV Linearization Table

Create a PV Linearization Table
Use the pulldown to select the transformation function applied to the field device output
and percentage range. There are 32 points each comprised of:
Index: Lists values of 1 to 32 that correlate to an mA Value and to the Eng Value for
that number.
mA Value: Enter a mA value for the curve.
Eng Value: Enter a engineering value for the curve (input current).
To create a custom linearization:

Figure 306 PV Linearization Table
3. Enter values for the desired number of related mA Indexs and Eng Indexs.
4. Click Apply or Apply All.

483

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configure Burst Settings Tab
When you open this screen, the main screen appears ( Burst Settings: Automatic). Use this tab
to configure the Automatic Update Rate, the Automatic Commands and manual burst settings
anytime a new device appears on the network it is sent the burst data.

Figure 307 Burst Settings: Automatic

484

Configure

Configure Burst Settings Tab

Figure 308

Burst Settings: Manual

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,

Buttons and Fields
Auto Burst

Use this area to set the burst settings automatically sent to new sub-devices
when they join the network. You can:
turn the update on,
set the automatic burst update rate
and choose which preconfigured command sets for use.

Automatic Update
Rate

Use the pull down to set automatic update off or to select and update time
rate.

485

GE Oil & Gas
Automatic
Commands

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Use the pull down to select from the preconfigured commands for use. The
commands include a command (s) sent to the sub-device and a set of two
commands sent to the VECTOR:
Sub-device: Cmd3, VECTOR Cmd3 & Cmd 48
Sub-device: Cmd3, VECTOR Cmd9 & Cmd 48
Sub-device: Cmd3 & Cmd 48, VECTOR Cmd3 & Cmd 48
Sub-device: Cmd3 & Cmd 48, VECTOR Cmd9 & Cmd 48

Mode

Use the pulldown to enable or disable manual burst mode.

Subdevice Tag

Use this pulldown to assign the long tag to the burst configuration or to
leave it unassigned.

486

Configure

Configure Burst Settings Tab
Burst Command

Use the pulldown to select a burst command to manually send:
Cmd 1: PV: Read the primary variable value and its units code.
Cmd 2: % range/current: Reads the loop current and its associated
percent of range. The loop current always matches the current that
can be measured by a milli-ammeter in series with the field device;
this includes the loop current under alarm conditions.
Percent of range always follows the loop current even if it is set to a
value. The upper and lower range values map the loop current value
to the percent of range. As a result the percent of range is not limited
to values between 0% and 100%, but tracks the loop current to
transducer limits when they are defined.
Cmd 3: Dyn vars/current: Reads the loop current and up to four
predefined dynamic variables. The loop current always matches the
current measurable by a milli-ammeter in series with the field device;
this includes alarm conditions and set values. The items configured
are set in Device Variable field of the Burst Message Settings dialog (
“Configure Manual Burst” on page 489) and include:
245 Percent Range
245 Loop Current
246 Primary Variable
247 Secondary Variable
248 Tertiary Variable
249 Quaternary Variable
250 Not Used
Cmd 9: Device vars w/ Status: Requests the value and status of up to
eight device or dynamic variables.
Cmd 33: Device variables: Requests the value of up to four device
variables. Each slot accepts any device variable supported by the
device.
Cmd 48: Read Additional Device Status: Returns device status
information not included in the response code or device status. This
command also returns the results of Command 41, Perform Self Test.
In addition, this command contains status information regarding
analog channel 1 through analog channel 8. Bits in Analog Channel
Saturated are set when the electrical limits established by the field
device are exceeded for the corresponding Analog Channel. Bits in
Analog Channel Fixed are set when the corresponding Analog
Channel is directly (e.g, using Command 40 or 66) or indirectly (e.g.,
using Command 79) being manually controlled.
Cmd 778: Read Battery Life: Reads the current battery status.

487

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Trigger Options
Trigger Mode

Use the pulldown list to select the trigger event for the manual burst:
Continuous: Publish the burst message continuously at least at the
Update Period.
Window: Triggers the burst message when the source value deviates
more than the specified Trigger Level.
Rising: Triggers the burst message when the source value rises above
the specified Trigger Value.
Falling: Triggers the burst message when the source value falls below
the specified Trigger Value.
On-change: Triggers the burst message when the source value falls
below or rises above the specified Trigger Value.

Trigger Options
Trigger Level

Enter a trigger level in mA.

Trigger Options
Update Period

Use the pulldown to select the period between automatic burst updates.

Trigger Options Max
Update Period

Use the pulldown to select the maximum time before an automatic burst
updates. Burst messages are always be published at least as often as the
Maximum Update Period.

Burst Data Burst
Command

Displays the last burst command sent.

Burst Data Value

Displays the value from the last burst command sent, if applicable.

Burst Data Units

Displays the engineering units of the value from the last burst command
sent, if applicable.

Burst Data
Timestamp Date

Displays the date of the last received burst data.

Burst Data
Timestamp Time

Displays the time of the last received burst data.

Device Variable
Variable

Use these fields to supplement the device's array of device variables to allow
access to the process measurements and loop current returned in Command 3.
245 Percent Range
245 Loop Current
246 Primary Variable
247 Secondary Variable
248 Tertiary Variable
249 Quaternary Variable
250 Not Used

488

Configure

Configure Auto Burst
Read button

Click this to read burst setting from the device.

Apply Burst Message
button

Click this to send a burst using the manual burst settings.

Apply Auto Burst
button

Click this to send a burst using the auto burst settings.

Configure Auto Burst
To configure a Auto Burst:
1. Use the Automatic Update Rate pulldown to select a rate and the Automatic Commands
pulldown to select a command set.
2. Click Apply Auto Burst or Apply All.

Configure Manual Burst
To configure a Manual Burst:
1. Use the Mode pulldown to select Enabled.
2. Use the Subdevice Tag pulldown to select the longtag or leave unassigned.
3. Use the Burst Command pulldown to select a command.
4. Set the Trigger Options.
5. Click Apply Burst Msg.
6. Use the Mode pulldown to select Off. Use the Automatic Update Rate pulldown to reset
for auto burst.

489

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configure Event Notification Tab
Use the Configure Event Notification to create an event message profile related to a series of
user-configured parameters. This tab is comprised of four areas where you configure event
notifications and access a subtab where you view and clear notifications ( “Event Status
Subtab” on page 494).

Figure 309

Configure Event Notification

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

490

Configure

Configure Event Notification Tab
Buttons and Fields
Event Message
Number

Use the pulldown to select a number between 0 and 8 or 0 and 3 (depends on the
number of event messages supported). This number can then optionally be linked to
the Subdevice Tag and is linked to parameters configured on the remaining three
tabs.

Status button

Click to open the Event Status Subtab dialog where you view and clear
notifications.

Subdevice Tag

Use the pulldown list to select a tag to which you link the Event Message Number.

Mode

Use the pulldown to select either Enabled or Off for the configured Event Message
Number.

Event Timing
Retry Time

Enter the number of seconds to wait before a retry.

Debounce Interval

Enter a time in seconds for which a debounce interval is enforced before a second
event for the message number is allowed. The debounce interval is the minimum
time period over which the bit must remain changed (i.e., the time the event must
persist) in a device before the event notification is sent. If the this interval does not
conform to the allowed values the device adjusts them accordingly and returns the
corrected values.

Max. Update Time

Enter a number of seconds, which is the maximum time beyond which the software
must check to see if the configured parameters have been matched.

491

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Standard Event Mask Check all boxes for inclusion in the message event as viewed on the “Event Status
Subtab” on page 494 as screen LEDs:
Process applied to the primary variable is outside the operating limits of the field
device: Check to set an event when PV moves outside of field device limits. The
PV limits are defined in the 4-20 mA tab (PV Upper Range Value/PV Lower Range
Value). See “Configure 4-20 mA Tab” on page 481.
Process applied to the non-primary variable is outside the operating limits of the
field device: Check to set an event when a variable moves outside of field device
limits.
PV Analog Channel Saturated: Check to set an event when the electrical limits
established by the field device are exceeded for the corresponding analog
channel.
PV Analog Channel Fixed: Check to set an event when the corresponding analog
channel is directly or indirectly in manual control.
Field device has more status available: Check to set an event when more status
information is available via command 48.
A reset or self test of the field device has occurred, or power has been removed
and reapplied: Check to set an event when any of these events occur.
A modification has been made to the configuration of the field device: Check to
set an event when any change is made to the field device configuration.
Field device has malfunctioned due to a hardware error or failure: Check to set an
event when a hardware failure occurs.
Maintenance required: Check to set an event when the device has not malfunctioned, but requires maintenance. This is set if any of the Alert messages is
active or is in the history. You must clear all the alerts to reset.
Device variable alert: Check to set an event when the PV goes out of range.
Critical power failure: Check to set an event when a power failure causes a
reboot.
Secondary Analog Channel Fixed: Check to set an event when the corresponding
analog channel is directly or indirectly in manual control.
Tertiary Analog Channel Fixed: Check to set an event when the corresponding
analog channel is directly or indirectly in manual control.
Quaternary Analog Channel Fixed: Check to set an event when the corresponding analog channel is directly or indirectly in manual control.
Quinary Analog Channel Fixed: Check to set an event when the corresponding
analog channel is directly or indirectly in manual control.
Secondary Analog Channel Saturated: Check to set an event when the electrical
limits established by the field device are exceeded for the corresponding analog
channel.

492

Configure

Configure Event Notification Tab

Tertiary Analog Channel Saturated: Check to set an event when the electrical
limits established by the field device are exceeded for the corresponding analog
channel.
Quaternary Analog Channel Saturated: Check to set an event when the electrical
limits established by the field device are exceeded for the corresponding analog
channel.
Quinary Analog Channel Saturated: Check to set an event when the electrical
limits established by the field device are exceeded for the corresponding analog
channel.
Simulation Active: Check to set an event when a simulation runs.
Non-Volatile memory failure: Check to set an event when there is a non-volatile
memory failure.
Volatile memory failure: Check to set an event when there is a volatile memory
failure.
Watchdog reset executed: Check to set an event when a watchdog timer resets.
Voltage conditions out of range: Check to set an event when device voltage goes
out of range. This is set when the device is in battery powered mode and the
battery state reaches Critical.
Environmental conditions out of range: Check to set an event when conditions go
out of range. This is set when unit temperature is below -54 °C or above +89 °C.
Electronic failure: Check to set an event when there is any electronics failure.
Subdevice list changed: Check to set an event when any additions or deletions
occur to the subdevice list.
Duplicate master detected: Check to set an event when a second master is
detected on the network.
Capacity Denied: Check to set an event when a the device has been denied a
request for network capacity (bandwidth) to perform a function. Check the burst
mode settings ( “Configure Wireless Tab”).
Bandwidth allocation pending: Check to set an event when a gateway requested
bandwidth allocation is made but not yet completed.
Block transfer pending: Check to set an event when a block transfer is in process.
Block transfers are used for asset management or large data transfers.
Device-Specific Event Use this tab to enable/disable various events so that they are active for alarming.
The alarms are reflected on the “Event Status Subtab” as screen LEDs.
Mask 1 and 2
Fld dev stat

Check to set an event when the device-specific item is out of range.

493

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Event Status Subtab

Use this tab to view and to clear notifications.

Figure 310

Event Status Subtab

Buttons and Fields
Configuration
changed event
pending

Illuminates to indicate that a configuration change is pending.

Device status event
pending

Illuminates to indicate that a device status event is pending.

More status available Illuminates to indicate that an event containing status updates from command 48 is
event pending
pending.
Date of First Unak
Event Triggered

Displays the date the first unacknowledged event was triggered.

Time of First Unak
Event Triggered

Displays the time the first unacknowledged event was triggered.

Clear button

Click this button to clear all screen items. The screen remains clear
until the next triggering event occurs.

494

Configure

Configure Adapter Info Tab

Configure Adapter Info Tab
Use the Configure Adapter Info to configure adapter nameplate data, engineering units and
write protect the VECTOR.

Figure 311

Configure Adapter Info

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

495

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Buttons and Fields
Adapter Information
Tag

Enter up to eight characters long and is used to identify the VECTOR in the system
and appears throughout the program. This can reflect a label from a plant drawing
or a control system.

Long Tag

Same as Tag, but you can enter up to 32 characters.

Descriptor

Enter up to 16 characters for VECTOR-related information.

Message

Enter up to 32 characters as a device-related message.

Assembly Number

Enter an overall field device identity number.

Manufacturer

Enter the manufacturer.

Model

Enter the model.

Device ID

Enter the Device ID.

Device Serial Number

Enter the VECTOR serial number.

Date

Enter a date in dd/mm/yyyy format.

MAC Address

Enter the VECTOR MAC address.

Univ Cmd Rev

Enter the HART Command revision.

Hardware Rev

Enter the hardware revision.

Trans Cmd Rev

Enter the transmitter revision.

Software Rev

Enter the ValVue VECTOR software revision.

Country

Use the pulldown to select the country where the VECTOR is installed:
America
Japan
Germany
France
Spain
Russian
China

SI Unit Control

Use the pulldown to select either:
None: The application uses English units.
SI Only: The application uses only SI units.

Electronics Tempera- Use the pulldown to select the temperature scale:
ture
degC
degF
Kelvin
Write Protected

496

Configure

Configure Adapter Info Tab
Write Protected pulldown

Use the pulldown to select Enabled to write protest the VECTOR; only read operations are allowed.

Software Revision
Software Build

Displays the present build number Displays the revision as scanned using the Read
button.

Software Bootloader
Revision

Displays the present bootloader number Displays the revision as scanned using the
Read button.

Software Build Date

Displays the software build date Displays the revision as scanned using the Read
button.

Wireless Module
Manufacturer ID

Displays the manufacturer’s ID Displays the revision as scanned using the Read button.

Device Type

Displays the device type ID Displays the revision as scanned using the Read button.

Device Revision

Displays the device revision as scanned using the Read button.

Software Revision

Displays the revision as scanned using the Read button.

Hardware Revision

Displays the revision as scanned using the Read button.

Read button

Click this to read parameters into ValVue from the VECTOR. these
can then be used as a basis for further configuration.

497

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Configure Time Screen
Use the Configure Time to view time and date related values.

Figure 312

Configure Time

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes from the selected tab only,
or
to apply changes made on all tabs.

Buttons and Fields
Time
Current Date

Displays the current date from the field device.

Current Time

Displays the current time from the field device.

498

Configure

Configure Tab Tools and Context
Uptime
System Uptime

Displays the running time since the last power on.

Read button

Click this to read parameters into ValVue from the VECTOR. these
can then be used as a basis for further configuration.

Configure Tab Tools and Context Menu
There is no context menu for this tab.
Update Configured Data
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 313

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.
Detach Trend
Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

499

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

7

Maintenance

Maintenance Tab
The Maintenance Tab tab offers tools to connect/disconnect the VECTOR from the network and
perform simple maintenance.

Figure 314

Maintenance Tab

501

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Buttons and Fields
Master Reset button

Click to reset the VECTOR.

Self Test button

Click to perform a limited VECTOR self test.
The adapter performs continuous self tests as it operates. The self test forces all of
the status bits to read new values and update the device status / alert data.

Factory Reset button

Click to reset the VECTOR to factory default values.

Disconnect the
Device from the Network button

network.

Click to disconnect the wireless device from the

Advertise to New
Devices button

Click to send this wireless device’s data to the network
for recognition by other devices.

Maintenance Tab Tools and Context Menu
Update Configured Data
Available on the Tools menu only.
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 315

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.

502

Maintenance

Maintenance Tab Tools and Context
Factory Reset
Use this command to reset the VECTOR to factory default values.
Detach Trend

Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

503

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

8

Status

Status Screen: General
Use the Device Status screen to see the VECTOR operating and internal status. The tab is divided
into a series of tabs that provide status, alarm, and fault information in a graphical form for all
aspects of the system.
Each alarm condition is color coded according to the criticality of the alarm:
Red indicates an alarm (fault) has occurred
Green indicates no faults
On each screen the Configure Change Count field indicates the number of times the device
configuration or calibration has been changed by a host application or from a local operator
interface.
The Status screen is split into eight subtabs:
“Active Faults” on page 506

“Device_Status” on page 507

“IO_and_Subdevice_Status” on
page 508

“Ext_Device_Status” on page 509

“WirelessHART_Status” on page 510

“Device_Diagnostic_Status_0” on
page 511

“Device_Specific_Status_0” on page 512

“Device_Specific_Status_1” on page 513

505

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Active Faults
The Active Faults tab displays all current faults.

Figure 316

Active Faults

506

Status

Device_Status

Device_Status
The Device_Status tab displays all current faults for overall device faults.

Figure 317

Device_Status

507

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

IO_and_Subdevice_Status
The IO_and_Subdevice_Status tab displays all current faults for subdevices.

Figure 318

IO_and_Subdevice_Status

508

Status

Ext_Device_Status

Ext_Device_Status
The Ext_Device_Status tab displays all current faults for extended device status, when
available.

Figure 319

Ext_Device_Status

509

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

WirelessHART_Status
The WirelessHART_Status tab displays all current faults for the WirelessHART connection.

Figure 320 WirelessHART_Status

510

Status

Device_Diagnostic_Status_0

Device_Diagnostic_Status_0
The Device_Diagnostic_Status_0 tab displays all current faults for the device diagnostic
tests.

Figure 321 Device_Diagnostic_Status_0

511

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Device_Specific_Status_0
The Device_Specific_Status_0 tab displays all current faults for data that has field device
status information relating to: failures / warnings / status of process's.

Figure 322

Device_Specific_Status_0

512

Status

Device_Specific_Status_1

Device_Specific_Status_1
The Device_Specific_Status_1 tab displays all current faults for the wireless setup.

Figure 323

Device_Specific_Status_1

513

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Communication

9

Communication Tab
The Communication tab offers tools to track and analyze wireless communications status and
performance.

Figure 324

Communication

515

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Buttons and Fields
Wireless Status
Join Details
Wireless Mode

Displays the wireless mode.

Join Mode

Displays the join mode.

Join Duty Cycle

This is a percentage measurement of progress in the join cycle.

Join Time

Time in seconds elapsed since the join request.

Advertisement Count Number of advertisement packets received.
Neighbor Count

Number of available neighbors detected.

Join Attempts

Number of join attempts. After five attempts, the join is marked as failed and the
Alert message is set. The radio module resets and tries again for five more times,
this repeats indefinitely until a join is successful.

Burst Service Status
Burst Service
Requested

Lists the number of times a burst request occurs.

Burst Service
Granted

Lists the number of times a burst request is granted.

Join Status

A series of LEDs that illuminate as each part of the join process is completed.

Wireless Statistics
Generated Packets

Number of packets generated by this device.

Terminated Packets

Number of packets terminated by this device.

CRC Errors

Number of CRC errors detected.

DLL Failures

Number of data link layer MIC (Message Integrity Check) failures detected.

NL (sessions) Failures Number of network layer data link layer MIC failures detected.
Nonce Count Value

Numbers of nonces used. Reset when a new wireless join occurs.

Wired Statistics
Wired Slave Statistics The adapter can perform as a wired slave, when being configured by a wired host
(such as a handheld).
STX Count

Number of messages sent from the host to the adapter in this wired slave mode.

ACK Count

Number of messages sent from the adapter to the host in this wired slave mode.

BACK Count

Number of Wired Burst messages sent from the adapter to the host in wired slave
mode. The adapter does not support wired Burst message, so this field is always
zero, however, the HART spec requires this count value to be included in the device.

Wired Master
Statistics

The adapter can perform as a wired master when communicating with sub-devices.

516

Communication

Communication Tab
STX Sent

Number of messages initiated by the adapter to other wired slaves.

ACK Received

Number of message responses received by the adapter from the wired slave, from
request messages originated from the adapter.

OSTX Received

Number of STX messages sent from the other master on the HART bus. The O stands
for the Other Master.

OACK Received

Number of ACK messages sent from wired HART slaves to the other master on the
HART bus.

BACK Received

Number of BACK messages heard on the bus. A wired HART slave device can support a Burst mode where it continuously sends data to masters on the bus.

Parity Errors
Received

Count of parity error messages received by the I/O system on this channel.

Framing Errors
Received

Count of framing error messages received by the I/O system on this channel.

Checkbyte Errors
Received

Count of checkbyte error messages received by the I/O system on this channel.

Gap Errors Received

Count of gap error messages received by the I/O system on this channel.

517

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas

Communication Tab Tools and Context Menu
There is no context menu for this tab.
Update Configured Data
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 325

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.
Detach Trend
Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

518

10

Alerts

Alerts Tab
Use this tab to view a list of historical faults (non-active) and active alerts, the Start Date, Start
Time Stop Date, Stop Time and Alert Description. Additionally, you can select an alert and click
Clear to remove it from display.

Figure 326

Alerts Status

519

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

GE Oil & Gas
Buttons and Fields
Alert Global Status
Alert Occurred

Gray indicates no alert occurred; red indicates active alerts or alert history.

Active Alerts

Gray indicates no alert occurred; red indicates active alerts or alert history.

Alert Status
Start Date and Time

Displays the start date and time for each alert.

Alert Name

Displays the alert name.

Stop Date and Time

Displays the stop date and time for each alert.

Alert Description

Displays a description associated withe the alert.

Re Select button

Remove all the checked items and provide reselect space.

Select All button

Selects all alerts which can be cleared.

Clear Alerts button

Clears selected alerts.

Alerts Tab Tools and Context Menu
There is no context menu for this tab.
Update Configured Data
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 327

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.
Detach Trend
Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

520

11

Battery

Battery Info Screen
Use the Battery Settings to configure battery settings and view battery data.

Figure 328 Battery Settings

521

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

.

Once you configure any item, click:
to apply changes.

Buttons and Fields
Battery Settings
Battery Capacity

Enter the battery capacity in mAh.

Battery Low Voltage

Enter the voltage at which the battery voltage sets an alarm.

Battery Critical Voltage

Enter the voltage at which the battery voltage sets a critical alarm.

Battery Changed
Date

Enter in dd/mm/yyyy format the date the battery was changed.

Battery Stats
Power Status

Displays whether the status is Nominal, Low, Critically Low, Recharging – Low,
Recharging – High.

Battery Life Remaining

Displays the calculated battery life remaining.

Battery Consumption Displays the calculated battery consumption rate.
Rate
Battery Capacity
Used

Displays the amount of mAh used.

Battery Capacity
Remaining

Displays the amount of mAh remaining.

Last Battery
Changed

Displays in dd/mm/yyyy format the date the battery was changed.

522

Battery

Battery Tab Tools and Context Menu

Battery Tab Tools and Context Menu
There is no context menu for this tab.
Update Configured Data
Use this command to upload device data to ValVue VECTOR to synchronize the two.
To do this:
1. Use the right click or tools menu and select Update Configured Data and appears.

Figure 329

Update Configured Data

2. Click Yes.
Detach Trend
Removes the Trend display from the anchored tab format and creates a separate trend
display.

523

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

ValVue HDLT Software

ValVue HDLT Software

525

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Monitor Tab

Monitor Tab
The Monitor tab displays the level of liquid or the interface reported by the device, status
information, and mode information. From this tab, you can send commands to read
calibration and configuration information.

Figure 1

Monitor Tab

Tag Information
Displays the tag information from the HDLT including the Tag, Descriptor, Message, Date, and
Assembly Number.
Tag Name

This is a user-entered value. It may be up to eight characters long
and is used to identify the HDLT within the plant. HART communication can use the tag name to verify that it is communicating to
the desired valve.

Descriptor

This is a user-entered value. It may be up to 16 characters long and
may contain any text.

Message

This is a user-entered value. It may be up to 32 characters long and
may contain any text.

527

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Date

This field contains a user entered date value. The value is stored
inside the device. It can be used however you wish and is often used
to track the date of the last maintenance.

Assembly Number

This field contains a user-entered number. You can assign the
assembly a unique number for their internal use.

Other Fields
Level

The value of the level of liquid measurement in its engineering units.
The units can be selected by the user in the calibration-parameters
tab. The signal is converted to engineering units based on the
parameters entered on the calibration tab.

Signal (mA)

The value of the output signal from the HDLT expressed in
milli-ampere.

Send CMD

Sends the command that is selected in the drop down box to the
HDLT. The response from the HDLT is printed in the response box.

Write Assembly Number

Selecting this command brings up a dialog which lets you enter an
assembly number which are written to the HDLT.

Write Message

Selecting this command brings up a dialog which lets the user enter
a message of up to 32 characters which will be written to the HDLT.

Write Tag and Descriptor

Selecting this command brings up a dialog which to enter a tag
name, descriptor, date. This data is written to the HDLT.

Device ID

Each HDLT manufactured by Masoneilan is assigned a unique identification number. HART uses the manufacturer’s ID, Manufacturer’s
Device Type, and the Device ID to uniquely identify a HART device. No
two devices will have the same values for these three parameters.

Manufacturer's ID

Masoneilan’s manufacturers ID for HART devices is 101. This number
is built into the device.

Device Type

The HDLT device code is 100. This number is built into the device.

Hardware Revision

This value indicates which revision of the hardware is used inside the
HDLT. LevelVue and other software that must communicate with the
HDLT uses the software revision number to know how to correctly
communicate with the device.

Status
The HDLT tracks internal errors and fault conditions. When there is information on fault codes
available in the HDLT, this box will contain Additional Status Available. To retrieve fault codes:
1. Select Read Status from the drop down list.
2. Click Send CMD. The results appear in the lower left box.
The status block also contains other status codes returned by HART. These include
Configuration Changed, Device malfunction, and Variable out of limits.

528

Status
Clear Status
Clears the status flags. See “Status Code List ” on page 531.
Send Commands
Clicking on the arrow presents a list of HART commands that may be sent to the HDLT. To do
this:
1. Click on a command to select it.
2. Click Send Message to send the message to the device.
3. The response appears in the Response box.
Commands:
000 Read Identifier

Returns the unique identifier from the device including the device
ID, device type, and the manufacturers ID.

001 Read Primary Variable

Returns the level of liquid or the level of interface.

002 Read Current

Returns the current signal in mA.

003 Read All Variables

Returns the current signal, the level position, the circuit temperature and the local controller setpoint.

011 Read ID from Tag

Prompts the user for a tag name. The tag name is sent in a HART
command and if received by a device with a matching tag name,
the ID of the device is returned. The format of the ID is the same as
command 001 Read Identifier.

012 Read Message

Reads the message that was stored in the device when it was configured.

013 Read Tag and Descrip

Reads the tag name, date and the descriptor that was stored in the
device when it was configured.

016 Read Assembly
Number

Reads the final assembly number that was stored in the device
when it was configured.

017 Write Message

Writes the Message.

018 Write Tag and
Descriptor

Writes the Tag and Descriptor.

019 Write Assembly
Number

Writes the Assembly Number.

038 Reset Configuration
Changed Flag

Clears the HART status bit Configuration Changed. The configuration changed bit is set each time the user changes any configurable parameter.

529

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

148 Read Status

Reads and displays the status flags. These flags describe error conditions that have occurred since the last time they were cleared. See
“Status Code List ” on page 531 for a complete list of possible codes.

149 Clear Status

Clears message status codes.

150 Read Fault History

Displays the faults that have occurred since the last full power up or
since the faults were cleared with a Clear status command. The faults
recorded with a Read status are cleared on a reset but those
recorded in fault history are not.

138 Read Configuration

Displays the configuration of the HDLT including level or interface
mode, direct or reverse action, button locks, alarm settings, fail current.

140 Read Displacer Data

Displays the volume, weight, length and diameter of the displacer.

142 Read Transmitter Data Describes the material and options of the torque tube and chamber.
150 Read Continuous Diag. Displays the continuous diagnostic data including the number of fills,
Data
time empty, time full, and time working.
014 Read PV Sensor Info

Displays the sensor data including the sensor serial number, sensor
upper and lower limits, and span. Not used by the HDLT.

015 Read PV Output Info

Displays the level output information including full and empty levels
(engineering units) and the damping coefficient.

132 Read Alarms

Displays the settings of the alarm limits.

134 Read Level Specific
Gravity

Displays the specific gravity used for calibration and in service for
level measurement.

136 Read Interface Specific Displays the specific gravities used for calibration and in service for
Gravity
interface measurement.
152 Read Specific Gravity
Meter

Displays the specific gravity meter calibration values and the specific gravity if the tank is full.

200 Read Signal Calib

Displays the low and high current signal calibration values.

202 Read Zero and
Reduced Span

Displays the zero shift and the reduced span values.

170 Read Raw Data

Returns information from the HDLT that is useful to Masoneilan technicians for diagnostic purposes.

Read Controller
Configuration

Displays the controller configuration information including setpoint
scales and controller rate. Available only in version 5.11 and higher.

Read Controller Parameters Displays the process controller operating parameters ( “Calibration
1
Parameters Tab” on page 542). Available only in version 5.11 and
higher.
Read Controller Parameters Displays the process controller ratio control parameters. Available
2
only in version 5.11 and higher.

530

Status
Read Controller PID

Displays the process controller PID parameters: P, I, Kt, Kd, and
Beta. Available only in version 5.11 and higher.

Read Setpoint Scale

Displays the controller setpoint scale. Available only in version 5.11
and higher.

Response
The HART command response from the HDLT is displayed in the response box.
Status Code List
The following status messages report events since the last time the status codes were
cleared.
Startup – The level was powered off and restarted or a reset occurred.
Sensor Disconnected – The sensor was disconnected.
Sensor Fault – An invalid sensor reading was detected.
Torque Sensor Error – An invalid sensor reading was detected.
TCIR Reference Error – An invalid internal reference voltage was detected.
Torque Sensor Range Error – The torque sensor measurement was out of range.
EEProm Write Error – An attempt to save data to the non-volatile memory failed.
Data Overrun Error – An internal software/hardware error occurred.
Timeout Error – An internal software/hardware error occurred.
Circuit Temperature Error – The circuit temperature was outside of the operating
range.
Circuit Temperature Sensor Error – An invalid temperature sensor measurement was
detected.
Software Error – An internal software/hardware error occurred.
No Refresh – An internal software/hardware error occurred.
LOW ALARM – The level is lower than the lower alarm setting.
HIGH ALARM – The level is higher than the upper alarm setting.
Displacer Height Error – The displacer position was out of range.
Mounting Error – The level head is mounted incorrectly (compared to calibration and
configuration settings).
Specific Gravity Out of Range – The measured specific gravity is out of range.
Displacer Error – An invalid displacer measurement was detected.
Calibrate Failed – Calibration failed, probably due to an invalid data entry.
Low Alarm Occurred – The level was lower than the lower alarm setting (but may be
above the limit currently).

531

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
High Alarm Occurred – The level was higher than the upper alarm setting (but may be
below the limit currently).
Specific Gravity Meter Error – An invalid measurement was detected.
Stack Reset – An internal software error occurred and a stack overflow was detected.
RTD Standard Error – The RTD reference measurement was incorrect.
Zero Standard Error – The Zero reference measurement was incorrect.
RTD Sensor Error – The RTD sensor measurement was incorrect.
Abort – An internal software/hardware error occurred.
Factory Error – Invalid factory data was detected.

Read Additional Status
When displayed, there are status codes set in the HDLT that indicate events or faults that have
occurred since the last time they were cleared. Send the HDLT a Read Status message and the
status codes appear in the response box. Sending the HDLT a Clear Status message clears the
status codes (if the problem no longer exists) and the Read Additional Status message
disappears. See “Status Code List ” on page 531 for a complete list of possible codes.

Change Mode
This allows you to change the mode of the HDLT.
Calibrate Mode
Allows calibration of the HDLT. The calibrate mode has three tabs to set up various aspects of
the transmitter:
“Calibration Tab” on page 540
“Calibration Parameters Tab” on page 542
“Calibration Tools Tab” on page 544
Normal Operating Mode
In the Normal operating mode and in level or interface transmitter, the HDLT measures the
level of liquid or the interface and sets the output current to the appropriate value according
to the parameters set in configuration and calibration. In Controller mode, the HDLT measures
the level of liquid or the interface and sets the output current (controller output) accordingly to
the controller parameters set in Configuration and in the Controller tab.
The HDLT needs to be set in normal Operating mode before leaving this mode for Hart
communication to work properly.
The Normal mode tab displays the current level of liquid or the interface, signal values and
HDLT' status. In addition it allows you to send hart commands to the HDLT that displays the
configuration and calibration data.

532

Report
Manual Mode
The Manual mode is an intermediate mode used before going to Configure Calibrate or
Diagnostic modes. This mode allows you to drive the controller output for a HDLT working in
Controller mode.
Configure Mode
Allows you to configure the HDLT. The configure mode has two tabs to set up various
aspects of the transmitter:
“Configuration Tab” on page 536
“Configuration DataBase Tab” on page 551

Report
Generates a report of the HDLT parameters using the template selected in Report Setup.
Report Setup
You must select the report template file which is either a text (.txt) or rich text (.rtf) or a
browser (.htm) file. A standard report comes installed with ValVue but you can create new
reports in other formats.
To select the report file:
1. Click the browse button next to the report file edit box.
2. Select the proper report file.
The program that generates the reports can be WordPad, or Microsoft Word for text files.
Rich text format (.rtf) files can be used with WordPad or Word to give better formatting.
HTML files can be used with Word or Internet explorer.
To select the program:
1. Click the browse button next to the program edit box.
2. Select the program to use.
NotePad and WordPad are often installed in the directory c:\Program Files\Accessories\
or in c:\windows\. The actual location of these files or Microsoft Word varies from
computer to computer.
Alternately, you can click either the MS Word or Word Pad checkbox and the software
finds the appropriate .exe for you.

533

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu - Monitor
When you right-click on the Monitor tab, a context menu appears. The items that appear
depend on the HDLT mode:
Reset - Selecting this issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go through its
startup routine and re-initializing all of its operating parameters from non-volatile
memory.
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program ( “Report
Setup” on page 533).
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Save HDLT Data - Saves the HDLT internal parameters to a disk file that can be read by
the ValVue.
Restore HDLT Data - Reads data that has been saved with a SaveHDLT Data command
and sends HART commands to set the HDLT to match the data read. This is used to
clone an HDLT into a new HDLT. Note: Items like tag, which should be unique, and
calibrations which differ on each device are not cloned. This command is available only
in Manual mode.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

534

Trend Tab

Trend Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.
You to turn on or off the graphical display of Level, Level Setpoint, and signal Output. The
scale for the output signal is on the right hand side.

Figure 2

Trend Tab

Trend Graph
Displays the last 180 seconds of level, signal output and level setpoint if the HDLT is in
controller mode.
Clicking Refresh clears the graph and starts recording again.
Clicking Stop freezes the graph.
The Y scale can be changed by entering new values or by dragging the mouse over the
selected area. Right-click in the graph to return it to the default scale.
The scale can also be change by dragging over the range of scale that you want to display.

535

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Capture to Clipboard copies a picture of the Trend tab to the clipboard. From the clipboard, it
can be pasted into other applications (e.g. Microsoft Word).

Menu - Trend
When you right-click on the Trend tab (but not in the graph area - see zooming), a context
menu appears:
Refresh Graph - Restarts the sampling of the Trend graph.
Stop Graph - Sops the sampling of the trend graph. It can be restarted by selecting
Refresh Graph.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Trend tab instructions.

Configuration Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 3

Configure Tab

536

Configuration Tab
Fields
Polling Address

HART can communicate with up to 15 devices on a single pair of
wires. These devices are distinguished by their polling address,
which is a number from 0 to 15. If there is a device at polling
address 0, it must be the only device on the loop. There may be up
to 15 devices with non-zero polling addresses on the loop (subject
to power and intrinsic safety constraints). Devices which operate
4-20 mA are generally required to have polling address 0.
Any transmitter with a polling address set between 1 and 15 have
their the current output fixed to 4mA.Never set a polling address
between 1 and 15 when the HDLT is working in controller mode.

Transmitter
Transmitter Mode

Allows you to select either level or liquid interface measurement:
In the level indicator mode, the signal indicates the level of
the liquid in the tank of a known specific gravity fluid.
In the interface indicator mode, the signal indicates the
position of the interface between two liquids of different
specific gravities.

Transmitter Mounting

Selects whether the HDLT head is mounted at the left or at the right
position versus the displacer.

Transmitter Action

Selects direct or reverse acting transmitter:
In direct acting transmitter, the current increases when the
level or the interface of the liquid increases.
In reverse acting, the current decreases when the level or
the interface of the liquid decreases.

Display Language

Selects the display language of the HDLT as French or English. Only
the LCD display on the HDLT is affected (not the PC software).

Lock Out Buttons

When selected this option prohibits access to manual, calibration
and configuration modes. You need to enter a password (for HDLT
revisions greater than 4.12) through the push buttons to access all
modes.
The password must be a number between 1 to 255.
The HDLT is automatically locked when it comes back in normal
operating mode.

Controller
Controller Enable

Click the checkbox to enable/disable the fields below.

537

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Low Setpoint/High Setpoint Controller low/high setpoint values corresponding to the low/high
level or interface values (set in calibration parameters). If the setpoint
unit is:
The same as the level or interface unit, the controller low/high
setpoint values must be the same as the low/ high level or
interface values.
Not the same as the level or interface unit, the controller low/
high setpoint values can be different from the level or
interface values. In this case you must activate a ratio control
flag to force the controller to define the transformation
function to level units.
Initial Setpoint

On startup, the controller setpoint is set with the initial setpoint value.

Setpoint Units

Engineering units of the controller setpoint. If the setpoint units are
not the same as the level or interface unit, then the ratio control flag
must be activated and the ratio gain/ratio bias value calculated
properly using setpoint low/high values versus low/high level or
interface values. The transformation function is:
Setpoint in level/interface unit = ratio gain * Setpoint in its unit + ratio
bias.

Controller Rate

Determines how often the controller calculates the output signal.
The value must be set between 0.2s and 20s.

Alarms and Failsafe
Low Alarm (in)/High Alarm
(in)

If the Low Alarm box is selected and the level or the interface of liquid is lower than the low alarm value for more than the Time 1 value
in seconds, the low alarm is set.
If High Alarm box is selected and the level or the interface of liquid is
greater than the high alarm value for more than the Time 1 value in
seconds, the high alarm is set.

Time 1 (sec)/ Time 2 (sec)

If either High or Low Alarm box is selected and the level or the interface of liquid is outside of the alarms ranges for more than Time 1,
then the alarm is set. If the level remains outside of the alarms
ranges for more than Time 2, then the HDLT is set to failsafe mode.
If either Time 1 or Time 2 are set to a negative number this is understood by the HDLT as not used.
Time 2 must be greater than Time 1. The maximum time value is
1000 seconds.

538

Menu - Configure
Failsafe Current

If Failsafe Current is not selected and the HDLT goes to failsafe
mode, the current remains at the last current value sent before the
failsafe mode activation.
If Failsafe Current is selected and the HDLT goes to failsafe, the current is set to the value entered in the edit box.
The Failsafe Current values must be between 3.6 to 23 mA.

Apply

Sends all of the changes made to entries on the tab immediately to
the DLT.

Menu - Configure
When you right-click on any of the Configuration tabs, a context menu appears. The items
that appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

539

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Calibration Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 4

Calibration Tab

540

Level Transmitter Calibration

Level Transmitter Calibration
To calibrate the level transmitter:
1. Enter the specific gravity of calibration and press the Record SG button.
2. Empty the tank (or attach the proper weight for dry calibration) and click ZERO.
3. Fill the tank (or attach the proper weight for dry calibration) and click SPAN.

Interface Transmitter Calibration
To calibrate the level interface transmitter:
1. Enter the specific gravities of calibration for the two liquids (Low SG Calibration and High
SG Calibration) and click Record SG Low/High.
2. Fill the tank with the low specific gravity liquid (or attach the proper weight for dry
calibration) and click ZERO.
3. Fill the tank with the high specific gravity liquid (or attach the proper weight for dry
calibration) and click SPAN.

Specific Gravity Meter Calibration
To calibrate the specific gravity meter:
1. Enter the specific gravity of the known liquid in SG Calibration.
2. Empty the tank (or attach the proper weight for dry calibration) and click ZERO.
3. Fill the tank with the known liquid (or attach the proper weight for dry calibration) and
click SPAN.

Menu - Calibrate
When you right-click on any of the Calibrate tabs, a context menu appears. The items that
appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

541

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Calibration Parameters Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 5

Calibration Parameters Tab

Fields
Ranges
Low level, High Level and
Level units

The low and high values of liquid level and the engineering units that
appear when the tank is respectively empty and full.
The low and high values of the interface and the engineering units
that appear when the tank is filled with the low specific gravity and
filled with the high specific gravity.

Zero Shift (%)

The value in percentage of calibration scale to shift the zero.

Damping (seconds)

Output current filtering. The value is expressed in seconds and corresponds to T63% for a first order filter.

Low Current (mA) and High The signal that is sent by the transmitter corresponding to the low
Current (mA)
and high level or interface level for direct transmitter action or the
high and low level or interface level for reverse transmitter action.

542

Menu - Calibrate
Reduced Span

The value in percentage of calibration scale to reduce the span.

Interface Transmitter:
Low SG/ High SG

For an interface transmitter: This specific gravity of service is normally the same as the low-high specific gravity used during the
calibration, but can be changed here if the specific gravity of the
process has changed and is not equal to the low-high values of the
calibration.

Level Transmitter: SG
Service

For a level transmitter: The specific gravity of service is normally
the same as the specific gravity of the calibration but can be
changed here if the specific gravity of the process has changed
and is not equal to the calibration values.

Apply

Sends all of the changes made to entries on the tab immediately to
the DLT.

Menu - Calibrate
When you right-click on any of the Calibrate tabs, a context menu appears. The items that
appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

543

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Calibration Tools Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 6

Calibration Tools Tab

4-20 mA Calibration
CAUTION

The HDLT comes from factory calibrated and should normally not
require signal calibration. This should be done only if absolutely
necessary.

1. Click 4mA or 20mA to set the current output from the HDLT to 4 or 20 mA.
2. Measure the actual value of the current in the loop, enter it in the appropriate box, and
click Set. This recalibrates the signal to the entered value.
Entering a value in the lower box and clicking Set Current causes the HDLT to output the
entered current for testing purposes.

544

Coupling

Coupling
Coupling is used when adjusting the coupling between the electronic head and the torque
tube. To adjust:
1. Click Coupling Method and the coupling appears and is updated.
2. Adjust the physical coupling until this value is between +/- 5%.
3. Click Coupling Method a second time to turn off the coupling measurement.

Menu - Calibrate
When you right-click on any of the Calibrate tabs, a context menu appears. The items that
appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

545

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Controller Parameters Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 7

Controller Parameters Tab

Fields
Ratio Control

Click to enable/disable ratio control for the system.

Setpoint Tracking

If setpoint tracking is selected, when the controller is changed from
the manual mode to local mode, the setpoint is set to equal the current process variable. In that case, the process will not be upset by
the change from manual to local mode (operating mode).

Derivative Source

Determines whether the derivation action is done on a change in
process variable or a change in error (setpoint - process variable).

Alarm Type

Determines whether the alarms are absolute or deviation.

Controller Action

Determines whether the controller is direct or reverse acting.

546

Controller Parameters Tab
Ratio Gain and Bias

In ratio control, the setpoint and process variable may be in different engineering units or on different scales. The relationship
between the setpoint in process variable units and the raw setpoint is given by:
Setpoint (in process variable units) = Ratio Gain x Setpoint (in its
units) + Ratio Bias

Setpoint Low and High
Limit

The setpoint is constrained to be between the low and high limits.
The limits are entered in the same engineering unit as the controller unit.

Proportional Gain

The ratio of controller output to the error. The relationship between
the Proportional Gain and the Proportional Band is: PB in % = 100 /
PG. The range is 0 to 50. The Proportional Gain can be adjusted by
the Beta coefficient.

Integral Time (s)

Or reset time, is the time constant of integral control. The range is 0
to 1000 second.

Derivative Time (ms)

Derivative time or rate time is the time constant of derivative control. The range is 0 to 5000 millisecond.

Derivative Gain

This is a parameter to control the Derivative Time. The range is 0 to
100. This coefficient act as a first order filter on the Derivative Time.

Beta (non-linear)

This is non-linear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When 0, the
controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of error.

Low Alarm Limit and High
Alarm Limit

Define when the alarm lights on the controller view are lit. If absolute alarms are selected and the process variable is not between
the low and high alarm limit, the alarm light is on. If deviation
alarms are set and the difference between the setpoint and the
process variable is not between the low and high alarm limit, the
alarm light is on. The alarm limits are entered in the same units as
the process variable.

Manual Reset Bias (%)

This mainly applies to P or PD control or unstable (integrator) process. It is the process controller output at a typical operating
steady state. If the controller outputs range goes from 30 to 50%
at normal operation, the Manual Reset Bias should be set at 40% in
order to minimize steady state error.

Output Rate limit (%/s)

Limits how fast the controller output can change. It is expressed as
the percent of full controller output range per second and can be
set up to 500%/s.

Controller Dead Zone (%)

When the difference between the setpoint and the process variable is less than the dead zone, the controller takes no action to
change this output. The range is 0% to 20%.

547

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Apply PID

Sends the displayed PID information to the HDLT, changing the PID
used for control. Unlike the Apply button, this button only sends the
PID information but does not require that the HDLT change out of
operating mode.

Apply

Sends all of the changes made to entries on the tab immediately to
the DLT.

Menu - Controller
When you right-click on the Controller tab, a context menu appears. The items that appear
depend on the HDLT mode:
Local Setpoint – Puts the controller in local setpoint mode. You can adjust the setpoint
in this mode.
Set Manual Mode – Puts the controller in Manual mode.
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate Trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

548

Controller Tab

Controller Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 8

Controller Tab

Fields
Output

Allows you to directly set the value of the controller output in manual mode.

Setpoint

Allows you to enter a setpoint directly.

Setpoint with units

Displays the controller setpoint value in its setpoint unit.

Setpoint in Level Units

Displays the controller setpoint value converted to level or interface unit.

549

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Controller Alarms

This box displays the status of the process variable alarms. The
alarms may be absolute or deviation alarms:
Absolute alarms: If the process variable is below the lower
alarm limit or above the upper alarm limit, the alarm light
turns on.
Deviation alarms: If the difference between the setpoint and
the process variable is below the lower alarm limit or above
the upper alarm limit, the alarm light turns on.

Controller Level/Setpoint
Display

This graphical display shows the current value of the level or the
interface as a green bar and the setpoint as a triangle. From this display, you can drag the triangle to change the setpoint when the controller is in normal operating mode (local mode).

Controller Local/Manual

If the controller is in Normal operation mode (local mode), you can
change the setpoint from LevelVue by dragging the indicator on the
Level/Setpoint display or by entering a setpoint directly. The controller adjusts the output signal to try to match the process variable with
the new setpoint.
In Manual mode, the controller output is locked to a constant value.
You can change that value by dragging the indicator on the output
display or by entering a value directly.

Controller On/Off

Turns the process controller on or off:
If not enabled (off), the HDLT operates as a normal transmitter.
If enabled (on), the HDLT performs the function of a controller
and the 4-20 output is a control signal to control a valve.

Controller Output

Displays the output of the controller in percent.

Menu - Controller
When you right-click on the Controller tab, a context menu appears. The items that appear
depend on the HDLT mode:
Local Setpoint – Puts the controller in local setpoint mode. You can adjust the setpoint
in this mode.
Set Manual Mode – Puts the controller in Manual mode.
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate Trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

550

Configuration DataBase Tab

Configuration DataBase Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 9

Configuration Database Tab

Fields
Displacer
Displacer Volume and
Volume Units

Defines the displacer volume and its engineering units.

Displacer Height, Displacer Defines the displacer height and diameter and their engineering
Diameter, and Height Units units.
Displacer Weight and
Weight Units

Defines the displacer weight and its engineering units.

Torque Tube and Chamber

Defines the HDLT Chamber Type, the Torque Tube Matl, the Torque
Tube Force and the Arm Length.

Displacer Type

Defines options available for the displacer: With Displacer, Non
Standard, Stainless, Extension Rod.

Chamber Options

Defines the options available on the chamber.

551

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Options

Defines the options linked to the high temperature design and the
dangerous areas.

Menu - Configure
When you right-click on any of the Configuration tabs, a context menu appears. The items
that appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

552

Transmitter Diagnostics Tab

Transmitter Diagnostics Tab
See “Monitor Tab” on page 527 for nameplate data configuration.

Figure 10

Transmitter Diagnostics Tab

Smart Filtering Coefficients
These three parameters suppress the noise, the waves in the displacer chamber or the
mechanical vibration to smooth the current output:
W Integ: Integration window expressed in seconds. The value must be between 0.1
and 32.0 seconds.
DZ Integ: Dead Zone Integration is expressed in percent of zero/span calibration. The
value must be between 0.01% and 10.0 %.
W Val: Validation window is expressed in seconds. The scale must be between 0.1
and 32.0 seconds.

553

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu - Diagnostics
When you right-click on the Transmitter Diagnostics tab, a context menu appears. The items
that appear depend on the HDLT mode:
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the HDLT parameters.
Detach Trend - Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.
Fields
Continuous Diagnostic
Data

Displays data useful for prediction of life of the transmitter and other
components of the process affected by the liquid flow. The HDLT
tracks the amount of time the tank is empty, full, or working (powered on). In addition the HDLT sums the increases in tank level. When
used in a batch process where the tank is not filled and emptied at
the same time, this measurement is a tank totalizer.

Reset Data

Causes the continuous diagnostic data to be set to 0. Any values
stored before the reset are lost.

Auto Tune

Clicking Auto Tune runs a routine that determines the best parameters for smoothing the output signal from the HDLT.

Save Coef.

Clicking the Save Coefficients button saves the three Smart Filtering
Coefficients above into the HDLT non-volatile memory.

Sensor Test

Performs a sensor self test. This procedure must be run ONLY IF THE
LIQUID LEVEL IS STABLE to avoid going to failsafe mode. This test is
performed when the level is out of service.

Specific Gravity Meter

When on, the meter displays the specific gravity continuously if the
specific gravity meter has been calibrated.

554

Menu Bar and Footer Buttons

Menu Bar and Footer Buttons
File Menu

Allows you to exit the level portion of the program to the device
selection list.

Exit Button

Exits the program.

Help Button

Displays the online help table of contents. Right-clicking on any tab
displays a menu that includes help – the menu help displays help
for the particular tab.

Help Menu

Allows you to view online help for the LevelVue program or for the
ValVue program (of which LevelVue is a part). Software Revision:
This value indicates which revision of software is used inside the
HDLT. As software is updated, this value changes. LevelVue and
other software that must communicate with the HDLT use the software revision number to know how to correctly communicate with
the device.

Mode

Displays the mode of the DLT – Operating, Manual, Configure, Calibrate, Diagnostic, or Failsafe.

Online/Offline

In the offline mode, LevelVue reads values for all of the variables
from a file (rather from a real HDLT device). The offline mode can be
used to examine the variable values that have been saved with the
Save DLT Data command and is useful as a demo/learning tool.

555

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

ValVue SVI Software

ValVue SVI Software

557

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Monitor Tab

Monitor Tab
From the Monitor tab, you can see the basic functioning of the SVI including the valve
position, the input signal, actuator pressure, and the mode. This tab allows you to change
the valve position (when in manual mode) by dragging the position indicator.

Figure 1

Monitor Tab

Fields
Tag

A user-assigned name for the valve with maximum eight characters. The value is displayed in many views but can only be changed
from the “Configure Tab” on page 571 or with commands sent
from the Monitor tab.

Descriptor

A user-defined field with up to 16 characters. This field is commonly used to describe the user of the valve. The value appears in
many views but can only be changed from the “Configure Tab” on
page 571 or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

Message

A user-defined field with up to 32 characters. This field may be
used for any information the user wants. The value is displayed in
many views but can only be changed from the “Configure Tab” on
page 571 or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

559

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Date

A date that can be used however you want. The preferred format is
dd MMM yyyy (e.g. 14 NOV 2001). The program also accepts dates
formatted as dd/mm/yy (e.g. 14/11/01). Years greater than 70 are
assumed to be in the 1900's with years 70 or less assumed to be in
the 2000's. The day precedes the month. Dates as dd/mm/yyyy are
also accepted. The value appears in many views but can only be
changed from the “Configure Tab” on page 571 or with commands
sent from the Monitor tab.

Assembly Number

A user assigned number value may be between 0 and 16,777,215.
The value is displayed in many views but can only be changed from
the “Configure Tab” on page 571 or with commands sent from the
Monitor tab.

Status

The SVI tracks some errors and fault conditions. When there is information on fault codes available in the SVI, this box contains Read
Additional Status.

Signal

The value of the input signal expressed as the position it indicates. It
is scaled in percent and is characterized if necessary.

Position

The current position of the valve in percent open. 0% is always closed
and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible (see Open Stop
Adjustment on the “Calibrate Tab” on page 581).

Setpoint

When in operating mode, the setpoint is the position indicated by the
input signal (characterized if necessary).
In manual mode, it is the position to which the SVI is controlling the
valve. The manual setpoint may be changed by dragging the lower
Thumb on the position indicator.

Position Indicator

This indicator shows the valve position graphically. The indicator
consists of three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator that shows the value of
the signal. In Operating mode this is the position setpoint. In
Manual mode. this is the position that the valve moves to if
operating mode is selected.
The center green bar shows the valve position with full left as
closed and full right as open. The numerical valve position is
shown in the center.
The lower part contains an indicator (thumb)that shows the
valve setpoint. In Operating mode this is the same as the
signal. In Manual mode it is the valve setpoint. You can drag
the thumb to change the valve setpoint. While dragging. the
number in the center bar shows the manual setpoint that will
be selected when you release the thumb.

560

Monitor Tab
You can also change the manual setpoint by right-clicking in the
indicator. A dialog box appears where you enter the exact setpoint
for use.
Pressure

The actuator pressure, which can be reported in psi, bar, or kPa.
You can select the units from the “Configure Tab” on page 571.

Send Command

Sends the selected Hart command to the SVI, reads the results,
and displays them in the result box to the left.

Setup Wizard

From the Setup Wizard you can rapidly setup the SVI by configuring some basic parameters. By selecting the appropriate check
boxes the you can set the device identification, select the air
action, perform a travel calibration, and an autotune. Used primarily for rapid setup of standard application valving the Setup Wizard
dramatically reduces commissioning time in the field.
The task list shows what processes will run. When started from the
Setup Wizard, several tasks can be listed and are performed in
order For processes started from the “Configure Tab” on page 571
or “Diagnostics Tab” on page 589, only one task is listed and
started.

Figure 2 Setup Wizard

561

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Wizard Step 1
When selected, you can modify the device Tag, Descriptor, and Message.

Wizard Step 2
When selected you can modify the air action or return the device to factory default settings.

Wizard Step 3
When selected, you can perform a Travel Calibration. To determine valve position, the
positioner must measure the closed and open positions of the valve. The SVI first exhausts the
actuator and measures the position, then fills the actuators and measures the position. From
these measurements the valve position is determined.

562

Mode
Wizard Step 4
When selected, you can perform an Auto Tune. The SVI positioner is a PID servo control
device with special parameters unique to valve positioners. Because the SVI can be put on a
wide variety of valves, the values of the parameters must be changed to match each valve.
The SVI can determine a good set of parameters automatically. When the Auto Tune
procedure is run, the SVI performs a series of open and closed loop tests to determine
values for P, I, D, Padj, Beta, Position Compensation, and DeadZone.
The values determined should give good general operation of the valve, however these
values are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVI. You may
want performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID values
differently than determined by Auto Tune. This can be done on the “Calibrate Tab” on
page 581.

Wizard Step 5
Click and when Setup Wizard completes a report of settings appears using the selection
made in Report Setup.

Mode
The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating

In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal and positions the
valve appropriately (indicator green).

Manual

In this mode the valve does not respond to the input signal. Instead
it remains stable in one position which is the position that the valve
was when manual mode was entered or a new position selected
by the user (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).

Configure

In this mode you can set configuration parameters of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).

Calibrate

In this mode you can set calibration parameters of the positioner
(indicator yellow).

Diagnostic

In this mode you can run response time tests, step response tests,
and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).

Bumpless transfer

This is a transition mode when you select operating mode from
manual mode (see Bumpless Transfer) (indicator red).

563

GE Oil & Gas
Failsafe

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device goes to the failsafe
position and remains in the failsafe mode until the user intervenes
(indicator red).

Figure 3

Change Mode

Command Result Display
This box displays the SVI's response to HART commands. The following commands may be sent to
the SVI:
000 Read Identifier

Returns the unique identifier from the device including the Device ID,
Device type, and the Manufacturers ID.

001 Read Primary Variable

Returns the position in percent open.

002 Read Current

Returns the input signal in mA.

003 Read All Variables

Returns the input signal and the position in percent open.

011 Read ID from Tag

Prompts you for a tag name. The tag name is sent in a HART command and if received by a device with a matching tag name, the ID
of the device is returned. The format of the ID is the same as command 001 Read Identifier.

012 Read Message

Reads the message that was stored in the device when it was configured.

013 Read Tag & Descriptor

Reads the tag name, date, and the descriptor that was stored in the
device when it was configured.

016 Read Assembly
Number

Reads the final assembly number that was stored in the device when
it was configured.

017 Write Message

This command allows you to enter a message (up to 32 characters)
to store in the SVI.

018 Write Tag & Descriptor This command allows you to enter a tag name (up to eight characters) and a description (up to 16 characters) to store in the SVI.

564

Command Result Display
019 Write Final Assembly

This command allows you to enter an identifying number (0 to 16
million) which is stored in the SVI.

038 Reset Configuration
Changed Flag

Clears the HART configuration changed flag.

210 Read Configuration

Reads the configuration data from the device and displays it in the
response box. The data includes all of the data describing the
device set on the “Configure Tab” on page 571 including
Air-To-Open/Air-To-Close, Tight Shutoff status, Software Position
Limit Stops, etc.

212 Read Error Limits

Reads and displays the position range and time-outs associated
with position and pressure errors.

213 Read Calibration Data

Reads and displays the input signal that corresponds to the open
and closed position of the valve.

216 Read PID

Reads and displays the valve tuning parameters.

136 Read Status

Reads and displays the status flags. These flags describe error conditions that have occurred since the last time they were cleared.
See Status Code List for a complete list of possible codes.

138 Clear Status

Clears the status flags. See also Status Code List.

137 Read Limit Switches

Reads the status of the contact switches.

139 Read Continuous
Diagnostic Data

Reads and displays the continuous diagnostic data including number of full strokes the valve has made, the number of cycles (direction changes), the time the valve has spent open, the time the valve
has been closed, and the time the valve has spent throttling near
the seat.

191 Read Signature Results Displays the results of the last run standard valve signature test.
The results include friction, response time, supply pressure, and
spring range. The last run data remains in the positioner until a
power off and then it is lost.
Therefore this data will not be meaningful if the diagnostics have
not been run since the last power off.
221 Read Configuration 2

Displays the values of the parameters that define the configuration of the process controller.

217 Read Loop PID

Displays the values of the process controller’s PID parameters.

218 Read Loop Parameters Displays the values of the parameters used by the process control1
ler.
219 Read Loop Parameters Displays the values of the parameters used by the process control2
ler for ratio control.

565

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

220 Read Loop Mode

Displays the process controller mode for the setpoint and process
variable: either remote (measured from the primary and auxiliary
input channels respectively) or local (set by HART command and
remains constant until changed by another HART command).

141 Read Raw Data

Returns information from the SVI that is useful to Masoneilan technicians for diagnostic purposes. The information includes the input
current on the auxiliary input channel, the A/D values from the pressure, signal, and position measurements, the D/A value of the signal
to the I/P, and the internal SVI temperature.

Auto Tune
The SVI positioner is PID servo control device with special parameters unique to valve
positioners. Because the SVI can be put on a wide variety of valves, the values of the
parameters must be changed to match each valve.
The SVI can determine a good set of parameters automatically. When the Auto Tune
procedure is run, the SVI performs a series of open and closed loop tests to determine values
for P, I, D, Padj, Beta, Position Compensation, and Dead Zone. A progress dialog appears while
the autotune process is running.
The values determined should give good general operation of the valve; however these values
are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVI. You may want
performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID values differently
than determined by Auto Tune. This can be done on the Calibrate tab.
Progress Dialog
Some processes that ValVue can start can be lengthy. These processes include find stops,
autotune, diagnostics, and the setup wizard. While these processes run, a dialog is provided to
show the progress and allow you to cancel the process early if necessary.

Figure 4 Progress

566

Read Status

Read Status
The SVI tracks some errors and fault conditions. When there is information on fault codes
available in the SVI, this box contains Read Additional Status. To retrieve the fault codes
1. Select Read Status from the drop down list.
2. Click Send. The results appear in the lower left box.

Menu - Monitor
When you right-click on the Monitor tab, a context menu appears (the items that appear
depend on the SVI mode):
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command work by taking the valve
out of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Cancel Transfer – Stops the bumpless transfer and puts the device in Manual mode.
Available only when bumpless transfer is on and the device has been instructed to go
to Operate mode from Manual mode.
Reset - Clicking this button issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go
through its startup routine and re-initializing all of its operating parameters from
non-volatile memory.
Report Setup – Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report – Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Save SVI Data – Saves the SVI internal parameters to a disk file that can be read by
the ValVue.
Restore SVI Data – Reads the internal parameter values from a saved file and writes
them to the SVI. This changes the configuration and calibration parameters. Only
available in Manual mode.
Detach Trend – Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help – Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

567

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend Tab
From the Trend tab you can watch the performance of the valve and the process controller as
it operates.
These graphs are useful for tuning the PID parameters and monitoring valve performance.
The process trend graphs may be zoomed only on the Y axis.
The process trend can be detached from the tabbed dialog so that it can be viewed while
performing calibration and diagnostic tasks.

Figure 5

Trend Tab

Fields
Position, Manual Setpoint,
Signal Setpoint and
Pressure

The display of any of the four curves on the Trend graph can be turned on
or off by checking or unchecking these boxes. The available curves are
position, position setpoint, and if the controller is on the process variable
and the process setpoint.

Y Low/High

The Y axis (position) of the trend graph can be set by entering the values in
these edit boxes. Enter a number and hit tab to set the scale. The axis can
be changed with the mouse by zooming and can be returned to the original scale by right-clicking in the graph.

568

Trend Tab
Position Indicator

This indicator shows the valve position graphically. The indicator
consists of three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator that shows the value
of the signal. In Operating mode this is the position setpoint.
In Manual mode. this is the position that the valve moves to
if operating mode is selected.
The center green bar shows the valve position with full left
as closed and full right as open. The numerical valve
position is shown in the center.
The lower part contains an indicator (thumb)that shows the
valve setpoint. In Operating mode this is the same as the
signal. In Manual mode it is the valve setpoint. You can drag
the thumb to change the valve setpoint. While dragging.
the number in the center bar shows the manual setpoint
that will be selected when you release the thumb.
You can also change the manual setpoint by right-clicking in the
indicator. A dialog box appears where to type the exact setpoint for
use.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration
parameters of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters
of the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator
yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless
Transfer) (indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe
mode until the user intervenes (indicator red).

569

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Capture to Clipboard

Clicking this button saves an image of the graph on the clipboard. The
image (a bitmap) can be pasted into another document (e.g. into a Microsoft Word document).

Zooming
Any portion of a diagnostic graph can be examined more closely by entering the new X and Y
scales in the proper scale edit boxes or by dragging the mouse across an area of the graph.
lithe mouse is dragged across an area, that area fills the graphic window Right button clicking
on the graph restores the default scales.

Menu- Trend
When you right-click on the Trend tab (but not in the graph area -see zooming), a context
menu appears:
Refresh Graph- Restarts the sampling of the Trend graph.
Stop Graph- Stops the sampling of the Trend graph. It can be restarted by selecting
Refresh Graph.
Report Setup -Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report- Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend- Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help- Displays the help file at the Trend tab instructions.

570

Configure Tab

Configure Tab
From the Configure tab you can set the information that tells the SVI how the valve/actuator
is configured.

Figure 6

Configure Tab

Fields
Polling Address

HART can communicate with up to 15 devices on a single pair of
wires. These devices are distinguished by their polling address
which is a number from 0 to 15. If there is a device at polling
address 0, it must be the only device on the loop. There may be up
to 15 devices with non-zero polling addresses on the loop (subject
to power and intrinsic safety constraints). Devices which operate
4-20 mA are generally required to have polling address 0, however
with split range valve positioners, several4-20 mA devices may be
wired in series. These devices should be set up with non-zero polling addresses.

Switches

The SVI can measure the status of too contact switches (open or
closed). See the operating manual for connection information.

571

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Language

The SVI can display its menu in English or French. The AMS Snap-on
program is not affected. Separate language versions of AMS
Snap-on are available.

Pressure Units

The pressure reported by the SVI can be in psi, bar, or kpa units. If the
pressure units are changed after the unit has been fully set up, the
SVI automatically converts all of its internal parameters to the
appropriate units. Diagnostic and memory dump data saved to a file
is not converted.

Position Fault Limits

You can configure how position errors are handled. A position error
occurs when the valve position differs from the requested position
(from the input signal in Normal operating mode or the Manual setpoint in manual mode) by more than the Position Error Band for more
than the Position Error Time 1. When this occurs, a status flag is set is
reported during the next HART message (Only that a flag is set is
reported. You must send a Read Status message to find out the
cause of the status flag). If the error persists for Position Error Time 2,
the valve is put in failsafe position. This Iater action may be disabled
by unchecking the Enable box next to the Time 2 entry.
For practical considerations, Time 2 (if enabled) must be larger than
Time 1 by at least two seconds. Time 1 must be at least as long as
the time required to open the valve fully or unnecessary position
errors are reported. The maximum time is 327 seconds.

Characterization

Control valves are often characterized to give a specific relationship
between flow capacity (Cv) and percent opening of the valve. The
valve can be characterized with special purpose trim or with the SVI
positioner Several characterizations are available:
Linear: Causes the valve to open proportionally with the input
signal. This option should be selected if non-linear trim is used
in the valve.
Equal Percentage (50) and Equal Percentage (30): Two equal
percentage characterizations are available, one with R=50
and the other with R=30.
Quick Opening: The quick opening characterization is the
inverse to the Equal Percentage (50) characterization curve.
Custom Configuration: Selecting this option displays an
additional dialog where to enter or draw a custom
characterization curve. The curve can have up to nine points
and points in between are linearly interpolated.

Air-to-Open I Air-to-Close

You must select whether the valve is an air to open valve or an air to
close valve. This selection determines whether an increasing signal
opens or closes the valve.

572

Configure Tab
Single/Double Acting
Actuator

Select whether the actuator is a single or double acting actuator.

Button Lock

The SVI comes with an optional local display and buttons for data
entry. These buttons can be used to perform basic SVI setup without the need for ValVue or a handheld. It may, however, be desirable after initial setup to lock the buttons so that the SVI
parameters cannot be inadvertently changed from the buttons.
Several level of locks are provided:
Allow Local Buttons (level 3): Buttons on the SVI are enabled.
Lock Out Local Cal. - Config. (level 2): You can use the
buttons to perform operations in normal operating mode
and manual mode, however you cannot go to configure or
calibrate mode.
Lock Out Local Manual (level 1): You can examine variables
in normal operating mode but cannot put the valve in
manual mode (and therefore cannot get to calibrate or
configure modes).
Lock Out All Buttons (level 0): The buttons are disabled.

Bumpless Transfer

This option provides a means to maintain smooth valve control
positioning when changing to Normal mode from Manual or Setup.
Without Bumpless Transfer, when changing to Normal mode, the
setpoint could vary in a manner that causes a significant process
disturbance. Bumpless Transfer moves the controller signal to
match the valve position so that smooth resumption of control
with little disturbance results.
When Bumpless Transfer is selected, returning to Normal mode
from Manual or Setup mode is deferred until the input signal
matches the current valve position. Either the input signal or the
valve position can be changed to match. If nothing is done, the system slowly changes the position until it matches the signal setpoint. The time taken to move to the position is determined by the
Transfer Time, which is a number between 0 and 255 and is
approximately the number of seconds required to move the valve
100%.

Near Closed

This value determines the value of position below which the valve
is considered near closed by the continuous diagnostic calculations.

Tight Shutoff

When selected, if the input signal of the valve would position the
valve below the tight shutoff value (entered in the edit box to the
right), full supply pressure or atmosphere pressure is supplied to
the actuator as needed to close the valve with full seating force.

573

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Position Limit Stops:
Position Lower Limit /
Position Upper Limit

The SVI allows you to establish software limit stops. If enabled, during correct operation of the SVI, the control functions of the SVI will
not allow the valve position to be lower than the lower position limit
or above the upper position limit This option does not provide
mechanical stops for the valve. In an electrical or air failure the valve
goes to the fail safe position without regard to the software limit
stops. The full open and full closed buttons similarly ignore the settings of the software limit stops.

Apply

Clicking Apply saves to the SVI any changes that have been made to
configuration or calibration parameters.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint) (indicator
yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration parameters
of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters of
the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests, step
response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless Transfer)
(indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe mode
until the user intervenes (indicator red).

574

Custom Characterization

Custom Characterization
A custom characterization defines the relationship between the input signal and the output
position of the valve. It can contain up to nine.
XY pairs and the position is linearly interpolated between the pairs.
The first position must be 0,0 and the last position 100,100. Both are in percent and neither
count toward the 9 points allowed.
Add points to the curve by clicking the mouse at the position where the point is to be added.
Delete points by clicking on it with the right mouse button.
Move points by dragging them to their new position.
The characterization curve must be non-decreasing and the program will not allow a point
to be added or moved to a position that would create a decreasing segment.
To enter exact positions:
1. Enter a value in the edit boxes at the bottom of the tab.
2. Hit TAB.
3. Click OK to save the changes and returns to the Configuration tab. Clicking Cancel
returns to the Configuration tab without saving.

Figure 7

Custom Characterization

575

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Custom Linearization
When mounted on a reciprocating valve, a small non-linearity in the reported valve position
versus actual valve position can result from the linkage configuration. This non-linearity can
be corrected using a custom characterization that matches the specific linkage used. The
custom linearization procedure automatically generates this custom characterization.
Custom characterization must be the selected configuration option to use the generated
curve. This option is selected automatically when you click OK to accept the displayed curve.
Two types of linkages are modeled: simple and compound. Most Masoneilan linkages use the
compound linkage system.
Clicking Cancel on the Custom Linearization tab returns to the Configuration tab without changing
the characterization.

Figure 8 Custom Linearization
Linkage Parameters
Stroke Length - The distance of stem movement from 0% to 100% position.
Lever 1 Length - The length of the lever connected to the rotating element of the SVI2.
Position at horizontal - The valve position when Lever 1 is horizontal (for normally
positioned valves).
Lever 2 Length - The length of the 2nd lever in a compound lever. This lever connects
the 1st lever to the valve stem.
Offset - The horizontal distance from the connection between the two levers and the
connection of the 2nd lever to the stem.
Lever 2 Above/Below - Select above if Lever 2 points toward the open position and
below if it points toward the closed position.

576

Menu -Configure
Simple - Compound Linkage Configuration
SIMPLE LEVER
The simple lever has the pivot point (the potentiometer in the SVI) mounted a fixed distance
(L1) from the valve stem pickup point. To compute the proper correction curve:
1. Enter the stroke length, the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup point and
the valve position at horizontal.
2. Click Simple to compute the correction and display the curve.
COMPOUND LEVER
The compound linkage has two lever segments attached at one end to the pivot (the
potentiometer in the SVI) and the other end to the valve stem pickup point. To compute the
proper correction curve:
1. Enter the stroke length, first lever segment length (L1), second lever segment length (L2),
the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup (L3), the valve position at horizontal.
2. Click Compound to compute the correction and display the curve.
Most Masoneilan linkages use a linkage with L3 equal to L1, i.e. the second lever arm is
vertical when the first lever arm is horizontal. The correction computation correctly
computes the correction curve when L3 is not equal to L1, however L3 must be greater than
0 which requires that the valve stem pickup not be lined up with the pivot and that the
pickup be on the same side of the pivot as the link between the first and second lever
segments.

Menu -Configure
When you right-click on the Configure tab, a context menu appears:
Custom Linearization- Displays the Custom Linearization tab to allow correction for
linkage non-linearity. This tab creates a custom characterization that linearizes the
valve movement with respect to the input signal.
Report Setup -Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report- Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend- Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help- Displays the help file at the Configure tab instructions.

577

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Controller Configure Tab
From the Controller Config tab you can set the information that tells the SVI how the process
controller is to be configured.

Figure 9

Controller Config Tab

Fields
Controller Startup Mode

This option determines whether the setpoint is in local or remote
mode on start up. As an option, it can startup in the mode that it was
in before power was lost.
Some configurations allow the setpoint to be only local. This box
allows that configuration to be set.
Direct/Reverse
You must select whether the SVI is a direct or reverse instrument. A
positioner is direct if increasing the input signal increases the output
pressure to the actuator and is reverse if increasing the input signal
decreases the output pressure. Reverse mode operation may be
accomplished by hardware or software means. Hardware reverse is
an option that must be ordered from the factory (the device cannot
be converted to hardware reverse in the field).

578

Controller Configure Tab
Reverse mode is a rarely used option and may cause unexpected
results in the event of a power or air failure. Be sure you understand the operation of the SVI in reverse mode before selecting
either hardware or software reverse. Call Masoneilan’s technical
support if you are unsure of the proper use of reverse modes.
Air-To-Open

Electrical Failure

Air Failure

Sensor Failure

Direct

Closed

Closed

Configurable

Hardware Reverse

Open

Closed

Configurable

Software Reverse

Closed

Closed

Configurable

Air-To-Close

Electrical Failure

Air Failure

Sensor Failure

Direct

Open

Open

Configurable

Hardware Reverse

Closed

Open

Configurable

Software Reverse

Open

Open

Configurable

In the software reverse mode, care must be taken to insure that
the controller does not output a signal less than 3.8 mA. As the
input signal drops, the air pressure to the actuator increases. However, below 3.8 mA, the SVI would not have sufficient power to run.
When power is insufficient to run, the output to the I/P would drop
to 0 and the air pressure would go to atmosphere pressure. See
also Fail Low / Fail High.
Fail Direction
This selection determines whether the SVI fails to low output signal
or to high output signal. It is used almost exclusively in the hardware reverse mode. Fail low is the normal mode, but for hardware
reverse instruments, fail high may be preferred. Where fail high
results in a low actuator pressure. In an electrical failure, the SVI no
longer operates and cannot fail high.
Process Controller On/Off

This option allows operation of the process controller when
checked. If selected, the process variable must be connected to the
auxiliary input channel and some hardware connections must be
changed (see operating manual). This option can only be selected if
the device has been purchased with the process controller option.
If the device is not used as a process controller uncheck the box.
When OFF, limit switches can be attached to the second input terminal (see operating manual for connection details). The SVI
reports whether the limit switches are open or closed.

579

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Initial Setpoint

When power is applied to the SVI after being off longer than three
seconds the SVI performs a cold start where its memory is restored
from parameters stored in non-volatile memory. This parameter
determines the setpoint if the startup mode is local. Local setpoints
are entered in process variable units. lithe SVI is in ratio control
mode, these units may be different from the setpoint units.

Controller Period

The controller can process the setpoint and process variable data
every 0.15 seconds (6.7 times per second) to 10 seconds. At 0.15 seconds the display and button response is degraded. For fast processes, a rate of 0.2 would be a reasonable value and for slow
processes 2 seconds is common.

Ratio Control

This option turns ratio control on or off. In ratio control, the setpoint
and process variable may be in different engineering units or on different scales. The relationship between the setpoint in process variable units and the raw setpoint is given by:
Setpoint (in process variable units)=Ratio Gain x Setpoint +Ratio Bias.
The setpoint in process variable units is used in the PID calculation to
compute error.

PV Units Code / Remote SP
Units Code

You can select the units for the process variable and setpoint. HART
defines units codes for many commonly used units. The AMS
snap-on is programmed to recognize many of these and you can
select them from the list box. If the units used is not in the list box,
enter the HART units code in the list box. In which case the program
only reports the code, not the text version of the units.

Menu -Controller Configuration
When the user right-clicks on the Controller Configuration tab, a context menu appears. The
following items may be on the menu (the items that appear depend on the SVI mode).
Report Setup -Allows the user to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report-Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend- Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help-Displays the help file at the Controller Monitor tab instructions.

580

Calibrate Tab

Calibrate Tab
From the Calibrate tab you can calibrate the stop positions and the feedback control
parameters.

Figure 10

Calibrate Tab

Fields
Signal- Low/High

The low and high signal defines at what input values the valve will
be fully open or fully closed. The low signal value must always be
lower than the high signal value. The AMS Snap-on software identifies which value represents closed and which represents open
from the configuration data.
The values are typically 4 and 20 mA but may be any values
between 3.8 and 22 mA. lithe valve is split ranged, values of 4 and
12 or 12 and 20 may be entered for example. These entries are the
proper method of split ranging the SVI (rather than with a custom
characterization curve).

P

Proportional gain P(%) is the ratio of proportional action (part of
controller output) to error. Common values for the positioner are 50
for small valves, up to 4000 for large valves.

581

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

I

Integral time or reset time (0.1 sec), is the time constant of integral
control. Higher values of I cause less integral action, however a value
of 0 gives no integral action. Common values are 10 to 200.

D

Derivative time or rate time (msec) is the time constant of derivative
control. Common values are 10 to 100.

PAdj

Valves often have significantly different response when filling verses
exhausting. The proportional gain is adjusted by adding Pad}(%) to P
when the valve is exhausting.

DeadZone

When the valve position is within the setpoint +/-the dead zone, no
additional position control is performed. This value is normally 0%,
however for high friction valves (e.g. valves with graphite packing) a
higher dead zone (%) helps avoid limit cycling due to the stick/slip
action of the valve. In these cases, the dead zone chosen might be
0.5% to 1%.

Beta

Beta is nonlinear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is 0,
the controller gain is linear Otherwise the gain is the function of error
The larger the beta, the smaller the gain for small error. Typical beta
value for a valve position controller is 7 or 8.

Position Compensation
Coefficient

The response of the valve is different when the valve is nearly closed
than when the valve is nearly open. The position compensation coefficient, which is a number between 0 and 9, allows you to make
adjustments to try to equalize the valve response. The normal value
is 6.

Damping Coefficient

The valve response may be made slower for some applications. A
value of zero gives no damping, and a value of nine gives maximum
damping of valve motion.

Apply

Clicking Apply saves to the SVI any changes that have been made to
configuration or calibration parameters.

High Pressure

Enter the air supply pressure in this edit box. This value is used only
for scaling the input pressure signal to engineering units and need
not be exact.

Low PV /High PV

If the process controller option is ON, you must enter the engineering
units for the process variable that corresponds to 4.0 mA and 20.0
mA. The SVI uses these values to convert the auxiliary input signal to
engineering units.

Low Remote SP /High
Remote SP

If the process controller option is ON, you must enter the engineering
units for the setpoint that corresponds to 4.0 mA and 20.0 mA. The
SVI uses these values to convert the primary input signal to engineering units.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:

582

Calibration Value
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration
parameters of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters
of the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator
yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless
Transfer) (indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe
mode until the user intervenes (indicator red).

Calibration Value
This value is used when recalibrating the signal measurement. To do this:
1. Set the source current to a known value.
2. Enter that value in the Calibration Value edit box.
3. Select Set Low Signal Cal or Set High Signal Cal appropriately.

Calibration Value- 2nd input Signal
To calibrate the auxiliary signal input (used for the process variable when the controller is
on):
1. Connect a 4ma or 20ma signal to the input.
2. Enter the value in this edit box.
3. Select Set Low Signal2 Cal or Set Low Signal1 Cal, respectively from the menu.
See the operating manual for instructions on connecting the auxiliary signal to the SVI.

583

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Calibration Value- Pressure
The pressure sensor is calibrated at the factory. To recalibrate it in the field:
1. Set the pressure to a low value (less than nine psi).
2. Enter the value in this edit box.
3. Select Set Low Pressure Cal from the menu.
4. Calibrate the upper range of the sensor by setting the pressure to a high value (between
10 and 120 psi).
5. Enter the value in this edit box.
6. Select Set High Pressure Cal from the menu.

Open Stop Adjustment
In some valves the stem travel exceeds the nominal valve travel. The SVI allows you to
compensate for this so that the valve position reads 100% at the nominal travel. To make this
correction:
1. Enter 100 in the Open Stop Adjustment edit box.
2. Select Run Find Stops from the context menu. This calibrates the position with the full
valve travel.
3. Return to the Manual mode and adjust the valve to its nominal travel and note the position
reading.
4. Return to Calibrate mode.
5. Enter the position that was measured at nominal travel into the Open Stop Adjustment edit
box.
6. Select Run Find Stops from the menu. This calibrates the value so that the nominal travel
reads 100%.

Pressure Calibration Procedure
The Calibrate tab allows you to recalibrate the pressure sensor in the SVI. The sensor is
calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog
provides a convenient method. The Reset to Factory button returns the calibrations to those
that were set before delivery of the SVI.
The currently measured value of the pressure sensor is displayed and can be compared to
reference measurements to see if recalibration is necessary.
The procedure for recalibration is:
Zero Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Pressure button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 0 in the Pressure Value field.
584

Signal Calibration Procedure
3. Turn the air off and click Set Low Pressure.
Gain calibration
1. Right-click and from the popup menu select Full Open (on an ATO valve).
2. Click the Calib. Pressure button. A dialog appears.
3. Enter the supply pressure in the Pressure Value field.
4. Click Set High Pressure.

Signal Calibration Procedure
The Calibrate tab allows you to recalibrate the signal sensor in the SVI. The sensor is
calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog
provides a convenient method. The Reset to Factory button returns the calibrations to those
that were set before delivery of the SVI.
The currently measured value of the primary input is displayed and can be compared to
reference signals to see if recalibration is necessary. Calibrating the primary signal can be
done most easily with a variable current source.
The procedure for recalibration is:
Low Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 4 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 4.00 mA and click Set Low Signal.
High Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 20 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 20.00 mA and click Set High Signal.

585

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Auxiliary Signal Calibration Procedure
The Calibrate tab allows you to recalibrate the auxiliary signal sensor in the SVI. This sensor is
used as the process variable input when the SVI is used as a controller. The Reset to Factory
button returns the calibrations to those that were set before delivery of the SVI.
The currently measured value of the auxiliary input appears and can be compared to
reference signals to see if recalibration is necessary. Calibrating the auxiliary signal can be
done most easily with a variable current source.
The procedure for recalibration is:
Low Calibration
1. Click the Calib. 2nd Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 4 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 4.00 mA and click Set Low Signal.
High Calibration
1. Click the Calib. 2nd Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 20 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 20.00 mA and click Set High Signal.

Find Stops
The Find Stop routine attempts to move the valve through out it’s full range to measure the
mechanical stroke of the valve. The calibration routine succeeds if the mechanical motion
measured by the travel sensor rotates more than the minimum required span and if the value
measured at both stops is within the limits of the travel sensor (18 deg. To 120 deg for
standard SVI or 9 to 60 degrees for short stroke version of SVI). A progress dialog appears
while the find stops process is running.
Correction can be made for nominal valve travel if it is less than full travel (see Open Stop
adjustment).
The following affects the Find Stop routine from succeeding:
Insufficient or inadequate air supply to the positioner
Improper adjustment of the reversing relay (if present)
Steady state cannot be achieved at one or both mechanical stops
External accessories (such as solenoids, trip valve, lock up valve, etc) restricting the flow
to the actuator
Defective travel sensor
Inadequate travel sensor rotation or rotation beyond the sensor’s limits.

586

Find Stops
On a failure of the Find Stop routine, verify the following in this order:
1. Turn on the air supply and make sure that it is at least 5 psig more than the upper spring
range value.
2. If any, adjust the reversing relay in accordance to the manufacturer’s specifications of
the reversing relay.
3. Secure all linkages connecting the travel sensor to the actuator motion.
4. Using the Status tab, verify that the alarm position sensor error isn’t enabled. In the case
that it is enabled, re-adjust the lever per the SVI’s instruction manual to insure that the
lever arm is rotating in the appropriate quadrant.
5. Verify that the minimum travel span is 4900 counts and that the sensor counts is less
than 32000 counts and more than 1 (see procedure below).
Procedure for verifying the sensor counts using Valvue2:
1. Change the mode of the SVI to Calibrate.
2. Click on the Calibrate tab.
3. Right-click in the tab or click on the Tools menu, and select Full Close.
4. Select the Check tab and note the value of RawPosition.
5. Right-click in the tab or click on the Tools menu, and select Full Open.
6. Select the Check tab and note the value of RawPosition.

Figure 11

Find Stops Lever Orientation

Maximum lever arm swing for Standard SVI version (short stroke Version is +/- 30 deg from
mid-point)

587

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Manual Find Stops
On some very large valves or valves with non-Masoneilan actuators, it is possible that the
automatic Find Stops procedure will not find the correct end positions of the travel. A
semi-automatic method of calibrating the stop positions is provided.
To calibrate the position:
1. Select Full Closed from the menu to close the valve.
2. When the valve is fully closed, select Set as Closed Stop.
3. Select Full Open from the menu to open the valve.
4. When the valve is fully opened, select Set As Open Stop
For some valves the open position stop exceeds the nominal travel of the valve. By entering a
value in the Open Stop Adjustment the position calibration can be adjusted to nominal travel.

Menu - Calibrate
When you right-click on the Calibrate tab, a context menu appears.
Run Find Stops

Runs the automatic position calibration process.

Manual Find Stops

Allows you to set full open and full closed and wait for the valve to
complete these operations before the SVI accepts the stop position.
This allows for setting the stops on very large valves which may not
work properly with the automatic find stops routine.

Run Auto Tune

Automatically finds appropriate PID parameters for the valve.

Full Open

Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve
out of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.

Full Closed

Moves the valve to full closed. This command work by taking the
valve out of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the
I/P.

Reset to Factory Cal

Resets the signal calibration to their factory setting. Report Setup –
Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.

Report

Generates a report of the SVI parameters.

Detach Trend

Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.

Help

Displays the help file at the Calibrate tab instructions.

588

Diagnostics Tab

Diagnostics Tab
From the Diagnostic tab you can run response time tests, step response tests, and positioner
signatures.

Figure 12

Diagnostics Tab

Fields
Continuous Diagnostic Values:
Strokes, Cycles, Time Open,
Time Closed, Time Near
Closed

Displays the continuous diagnostic data including number of full strokes
the valve has made, the number of cycles (direction changes), the time
the valve has spent open, the time the valve has been closed, and the
time the valve has spent throttling near the seat.

Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Types: Response
Test, Step Test, Positioner
Signature

The SVI allows four diagnostic tests to be performed: Standard actuator
signature, Step Response test, Extended actuator signature test, and Positioner Signature test. The test to be performed is selected in this selection box.

Diagnostic Parameters: Start
Position, Stop Position,
Time

The parameters needed by the diagnostic tests are dependent upon which
test is selected:

589

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Standard Actuator Signature: Measures the position vs.
pressure response of the valve when increasing pressure and
when decreasing pressure. The test is made from 10%
position to 90% position with data points taken every 10%.
This test produces a pressure vs. position graph where the
actuator pressure is first increased slowly then decreased
slowly. The graph displays data from 10% to 90% in 10%
increments, both increasing and decreasing.
Speed – A number from 1 (slowest) to 9 (fastest). The speed
should generally be as slow as possible where the test
finishes in a reasonable amount of time. As a rule of
thumb, the speed can be the size of the valve in inches but
not less than 2 or more than 9.

Figure 13 Standard Actuator Signature Test
Positioner Signature: The valve signal is slowly changed from
the starting current to the ending current and then back. The
number of points indicated are sampled equally spaced in
each direction). A Positioner Signature produces an input
signal vs. position graph for both increasing and decreasing
signal. The signal is a simulated signal so linearity cannot be
checked. The positioner is slowly moved from the starting
position to the ending position and back and the two curves
(up and down) are measured and displayed.
Starting current (mA)
Ending current (mA)

590

Diagnostics Tab
Number of points to sample
Step Profile: Measures the position response over time of
the valve to a request to change position. o Starting position
(%). This test produces a time vs. position graph where the
valve is requested to change position. The graph can
contain data for 2 to 10 seconds of data with data every 0.1
seconds.
Ending position (%)
Sample time – Number of seconds to sample at each
step

Figure 14

Step Response Test Results
Extended Actuator Signature: The same test as the standard
actuator signature except that you can specify a position
range for the test and that sample data is taken more
frequently. (every 0.1 seconds). This provides a much more
detailed signature. The ending position may be less than 0
(e.g. –5.0%) which allows a signature to examine the seating
response of the valve.
An Extended Actuator Signature test produces a pressure vs.
position graph where the actuator pressure is first
increased slowly then decreased slowly. The graph displays
data for the user selected position range both increasing
and decreasing with data sampled every 0.1 seconds.
Starting position (%)
Ending position (%)

591

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Speed – A number from 1 (slowest) to 9 (fastest). The speed
should generally be as slow as possible where the test
finishes in a reasonable amount of time. As a rule of
thumb, the speed can be the size of the valve in inches but
not less than 2 or more than 9. When the test range
(starting position minus ending position) is small, a slower
speed may be used.

Perform Diag.

Clicking Perform Diag. causes the selected diagnostic procedure to
start A progress dialog appears while the diagnostic process is running.

View Saved Diagnostic

Previously run and saved diagnostics are viewed by clicking View
Saved Diagnostic. This option is available in all modes of operation.
Choose Signature Curve
This allows diagnostic graphs that have been saved previously to be
displayed. Two graphs (plus the current graph if one has just been
run) can be displayed at once in order to compare the results:
None: Removes the curve.
Current Signature: Displays the last run standard actuator
signature (note: the last run Standard Signature in the SVI
is lost if power to the SVI is lost).
Saved Signature: Displays the standard actuator signature
saved in the SVI (if any).
Baseline Signature: Displays the standard actuator
signature saved as the baseline signature in the SVI (if any).
Current Signature from dp1 File: Select a dp1 file for this or
another SVI. The current standard actuator signature from
that file is displayed.
Saved Signature from dp1 File: Select a dp1 file for this or
another SVI. The saved standard actuator signature from
that file is displayed.
Baseline Signature from dp1 File: Select a dp1 file for this or
another SVI. The baseline standard actuator signature
from that file is displayed.
Signature from dgn File: Select a file that contains saved
diagnostic graphs from this or another SVI. You can then
select any of the saved diagnostic graphs.

592

Diagnostics Tab

Figure 15

Choose Signature Curve

Clicking the Export button creates a comma separated value file
(.csv) of the diagnostic data being shown on the graph. CSV files
can be read directly into Excel where you can create graphs or perform other analysis.
Show Data Points
Selecting this option will show a+ at each data point on the graph.
Show Diagnostic Info
Clicking this button opens a window that shows the friction and
spring range of each standard actuator signature on the diagnostic graph. No information is shown for diagnostic graphs that are
not standard actuator signatures.
Results

The results of the Response Time test are displayed in the results
box.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration
parameters of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters
of the positioner (indicator yellow).

593

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests, step
response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless Transfer)
(indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe mode
until the user intervenes (indicator red).

594

Diagnostic Reports

Diagnostic Reports
To create this report:
1. Right-click on the Diagnostic tab and select Diagnostic Report and a dialog appears:

Figure 16

Open

2. Select a .dgn file, click Open and the Pick Diagnostic Data dialog appears:

Figure 17

Pick Diagnostic Report

595

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

3. Select specific group data (up to three of the same type) for presentation on a report, click
OK and the report appears:

Figure 18

Diagnostic Report

This report can be printed or saved under a user designated name for later use.
Report Preferences
You must select the report file which is either a text (.txt) or rich text (.rtf) file. A standard report
template comes installed with ValVue but you can create new reports in other formats (see
Creating Report Files).
To select the report file:
1. Click the browse button next to the report file edit box.
2. Select the proper report file.
The program that generates the reports can be NotePad, WordPad, or Microsoft Word. Rich
text format (.rtf) files can be used with WordPad or Word to give better formatting.
To select the program:
1. Click the browse button next to the program edit box.
2. Select the program to use.
NotePad and WordPad are often installed in the directory c:\Program Files\Accessories\ or in
c:\windows\. The actual location of these files or Microsoft Word varies from computer to
computer.

596

Diagnostic Reports
Creating Report Files
You can create a custom SVI report by creating a text or rich text format file which is laid out
in the format of the desired report. This snap-on substitutes the value of its parameter into
the text file where ever it finds a parameter name that matches an SVI parameter. For
example:
Tag=$$Tag
The snap-on substitutes the actual tag name from the SVI in place of the $$Tag in the
report.
Any text can be used in a .txt file and printed with NotePad. With WordPad or Microsoft
Word, you can use an .rtf format file which can contain special formatting (fonts, sizes, tabs,
etc.) and can contain bitmaps. Some .rtf formatting is accepted in Word which is not
available in WordPad – check the documentation of these program to determine what
options are available (e.g. right align tabs is allowed in Word but not in WordPad).
The allowed SVI Parameters are listed below. List the report file (report.rtf) shipped with the
application for examples.
$$Tag - Tag Name
$$Descriptor - Descriptor
$$Date - Date
$$Message - Message
$$AssemblyNumber - Final Assembly Number
$$MfgID - Manufacturers ID (101 for Masoneilan)
$$DeviceType - DeviceType (200 for the SVI)
$$DeviceID - Hart DeviceID
$$HWRev - Hardware Revision
$$SWRev - Software Revision
$$PollingAddress - PollingAddress
$$Position - Position
$$Pressure - Actuator Pressure
$$Signal - Input signal
$$Setpoint - Process Setpoint
$$ProcessVar - Process variable
$$Temperature - Circuit board temperature
$$Bias - Internal I/P bias
$$Output - Output from the process controller

597

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
$$Mode - SVI mode
$$ControllerModeSP - Local/Remote
$$ControllerModePV - Real/Simulated process variable
$$SignalPercent - Input signal as percent
$$AirAction - Air-to-open/Air-to-close
$$ActuatorType - Single/double acting actuator
$$ControllerSwitch - Controller on/off
$$DirectReverse - Direct or reverse positioner
$$ReverseType - Software or hardware reverse
$$FailDirection - Fail to low/high I/P signal
$$PosErrorBand - Position error band
$$PosErrorTime - Time until position error
$$PosErrorFailtime - Time until position error produces failsafe action
$$Charact - Characterization (linear, equal percentage, etc.)
$$CustomCharact - Displays the custom characterization constants
$$ButtonLock - Button lock level
$$Bumpless - Bumpless Transfer on/off
$$TightShutoff - Tight shutoff on/off
$$TSValue - Tight shutoff value
$$ULimitStop - Upper position limit on/off
$$ULSValue - Upper position limit
$$LLimitStop - Lower position limit on/off
$$LLSValue - Lower position limit
$$NearClosed - Value below which is considered near closed
$$PresUnits - Pressure units of measure
$$PosUnits - Position units of measure (always %)
$$Language - SVI display language
$$LowSignal - Low calibration value
$$HighSignal - High calibration value
$$HighPres - Pressure calibration value
$$P - Proportional gain in positioner
$$Padjust - gain adjustment of positioner

598

Diagnostic Reports
$$I - Integral action of positioner
$$Beta - Step size adjustment in positioner
$$D - Derivative action of positioner
$$PosComp - Position range compensation of positioner
$$DeadZone - Dead zone of positioner
$$Damping - Damping coefficient of positioner
$$Travel - Total strokes of the valve
$$Cycles - Total cycles of the valve
$$TimeOpen - Total time open of the valve
$$TimeClosed - Total time closed of the valve
$$TimeNearClosed - Amount of time valve was nearly closed
$$Friction - Friction computed by standard diagnostic
$$ResponseOpen - Time require to open valve
$$ResponseClosed - Time required to close valve
$$LSpringRange - Lower spring range (measured)
$$USpringRange - Upper spring range (measured)
$$Signature - Displays the data from the valve signature
$$SigSavedSpeed - The speed used to run the saved signature
$$LSprRngSaved - The lower spring range of the saved signature
$$USprRngSaved - The upper spring range of the saved signature
$$SigSaved - Displays the data from the saved valve signature
$$SigFactorySpeed - The speed used to run the factory signature
$$LSprRngFac - The lower spring range of the factory signature
$$USprRngFac - The upper spring range of the factory signature
$$SigFactory - Displays the data from the factory valve signature
$$PVUnits - Process variable units of measure
$$SPUnits - Process setpoint units of measure
$$StartupMode - Controller startup mode local/remote
$$InitialSetpoint - Initial setpoint for local startup
$$ControllerRate - Controller cycle time
$$RatioControl - Ratio control on/off
$$ContrDirRev - Controller action direct/reverse

599

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
$$LowPV - Low calibration for process variable
$$HighPV - High calibration for process variable
$$LowSP - Low calibration for setpoint
$$HighSP - High calibration for setpoint
$$ContP - Controller P
$$ContI - Controller I
$$ContTD - Controller D
$$ContKD - Controller D gain
$$ContBeta - Controller beta
$$LSPLimit - Lower setpoint limit
$$USPLimit - Upper setpoint limit
$$LowAlarm - Low alarm value
$$HighAlarm - High alarm value
$$ManResetBias - Manual reset bias
$$OutRateLim - Controller output rate limit
$$ContDZ - Controller dead zone
$$DevSource - Derivative source
$$AlarmType - Alarm type absolute/deviation
$$SPTracking - Setpoint tracking on/off
$$FreezeOnBad - Freeze on bad value on/off

Menu - Diagnostics
When you right-click on the Diagnostics tab, a context menu appears (the items depend upon
what diagnostics have been run):
View Diagnostic Graph – Views the data from the last run diagnostic procedure.
Save Diagnostic Data – Saves the data from the last run diagnostic into a disk file. The
disk file can be imported into spreadsheets or read with ValVue.
Diagnostic Report - Opens a dialog to select a .dgn file and specify specific group data
(up to three of the same type) for presentation on a diagnostics report.
Save Signature in SVI – Saves the last run signature in the SVI.
Save Signature as Baseline – Saves the last run signature as the baseline signature in
the SVI. You must have administrator level privilege to select this option.
Report Setup – Allows the user to select a report file and a report printing program
Report – Generates a report of the SVI parameters.

600

Status Tab
Reset Continuous Diagnostics - Resets the continuous diagnostic data (stroke count,
cycle count, time open, time closed, and time near closed) to 0. When reset, the
previous values are lost, thus the data should be recorded somewhere before being
reset is used.
Detach Trend – Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Diagnostics tab instructions.

Status Tab
From the Status tab you can see the internal status of the SVI. The tab is divided into four
separate sections for Operations, Communication, Firmware, and Circuitry.

Figure 19 Status Tab
Fields
Clear Faults

Clicking Clear Faults clears the status bits inside the SVI device.
This button is only available when the SVI is in manual or operating
mode.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:

601

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint) (indicator
yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration parameters
of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters of
the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests, step
response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless Transfer)
(indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe mode
until the user intervenes (indicator red).

Status Code List
POSITION_ERROR

The valve failed to go the requested position within the required time.

POSITION_SENSOR_ERROR The position sensor has failed or its connection is open.
PRESSURE_SENSOR_
ERROR

The pressure sensor has failed.

SIGNAL_SENSOR_ERROR

The input signal measurement sensor has failed.

REFERENCE_VOLTAGE_ERR The primary reference voltages inside the SVI is incorrect and all
OR, IP VOLTAGE ERROR
other measurements will likely be affected.
SYSTEM EEPROM FAULT

The SVI cannot write to EEPROM. This prevents the SVI from functioning.

WATCHDOG TIMER TIMEOUT

The watchdog timer was not reset by the SVI. This indicates a serious
failure in the SVI.

CIRCUIT TEMPERATURE
FAULT

he circuit board reached a temperature outside of its rated temperature.

BIAS_OUT_OF_RANGE

The signal to the I/P which causes no valve movement (called the
bias) has changed and is outside of the normal operating range.

SELF_CHECK_FAILURE

On startup, the SVI did not pass a self check.

HART_ERROR

An excessive number of HART transmission errors have occurred.

602

Menu -Status Tab
SOFTWARE_ERROR

An inconsistency has been detected within the SVI.

RESET_OCCURRED

A reset has occurred either because of a power interruption or
because of an external request for reset.

DATA_OVERRUN

The SVI is not processing acquired data.

INTERNAL_TEMP_ERROR

Internal temperature of the SVI is above or below the rated temperature.

EEPROM_WRITE_FAILED

A write to the SVI’s internal memory failed.

FIND_STOPS_FAILED

The calibration procedure for position failed to find reasonable values.

CALIBRATE FAILED

An attempt to run find stops or autotune failed.

STANDARD DIAGNOSTICS
FAILED

Running the standard diagnostic failed to complete.

Menu -Status Tab
Report Setup -Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report- Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend- Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help- Displays the help file at the Controller Monitor tab instructions.

603

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Check Tab
From the Check tab you can set and monitor some of basic parameters. This tab is used
primarily for troubleshooting.

Figure 20 Check Tab
Fields
Position

The current position of the valve in percent open. 0% is always closed
and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible (see Open Stop
Adjustment).

Raw Position

The A/D value measured from the position sensor. This is used for
troubleshooting purposes.

Pressure

The actuator pressure which can be reported in psi, bar, or kPa. You
can select the units from the “Configure Tab” on page 571.

Raw Pressure

The A/D value from the pressure sensor. This is used for troubleshooting purposes.

Current

The value of the input signal in milliamps.

604

Set I/P
Raw Signal

The A/D value measured from the signal sensor. This is used for
troubleshooting purposes.

Current (2nd)

The value of the auxiliary input signal in mA. The auxiliary signal is
used as the process variable input when the controller is on.

Raw Signal (2nd)

The A/D value from the auxiliary signal sensor. This is used for troubleshooting purposes.

Controller Output

When the controller is on, this value is the signal in percent sent to
the positioner from the process controller.

Board Temperature

The internal SVI temperature measured in degrees Celsius.

I/P

The current D/A value being sent to the I/P that controls the valve
position. This value is used for troubleshooting. The D/A value sent
to the I/P can be set directly for testing by using the Set I/P edit box
and menu command.

Set I/P
Setting the I/P removes the valve from normal control and sends a constant, user defined
signal to the I/P. This is useful for troubleshooting.
To set the I/P:
1. Enter a number between 1 and 5500 in the Set I/P edit box.
2. Right-click to pop up the context menu and select Set I/P. The indictor should appear
red.
To resume normal control, right-click to pop up the context menu and select UnSet I/P.

Menu-Check
When you right-click on the Check tab, a context menu appears.
Set l/P- Removes the valve from normal control and sends a constant signal (using
the value in the Set I/P edit box) to the SVI's I/P.
UnSet I/P- Turns off Set I//P and returns the valve to normal control.
Report Setup -Allows the user to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report- Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend- Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help- Displays the help file at the Check tab instructions.

605

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Controller Tab
From the Controller tab, you can see the basic functioning of the SVI process controller
including the process variable and the process setpoint. This tab allows you to change the
valve position (when in manual mode) by dragging the controller output indicator or to change
the process setpoint (in local mode) by dragging the process setpoint indicator.

Figure 21

Controller Tab

Fields
Local/Remote/Manual
Mode

Sets the mode of the controller.
Local- The process setpoint is set to a constant value
determined by the user It can be changed from the Setpoint
Indicator.
Remote- The setpoint is measured from the input signal on
the primary SVI input
Manual - The positioner is put in Manual mode and is not
controlled by the process controller. The valve position can be
changed from the Output Indicator from the Monitor tab.

606

Controller Tab
Controller Status

The alarm status indicates when the process variable is outside of
the user specified range of upper alarm limit and lower alarm limit.
The alarm can be specified as an absolute range or as a deviation
from setpoint.

Setpoint Indicator

The graphical display shows the process variable (bar) and the process setpoint (thumb). The process variable is measured from the
2nd input signal (auxiliary input signal) and scaled to engineering
units.
In remote mode, the process setpoint is measure from the
primary input signal and scaled to engineering units.
In local mode, the setpoint is set by the user and may be
changed by dragging the thumb or by right-clicking on the
thumb and typing a value.
In manual mode, the setpoint is ignored.

Remote Setpoint

The process controller setpoint is measured at the primary input
sensor and is scaled in engineering units according to the data
entered on the calibration tab. If ratio control is selected, the setpoint units may be different from the process variable. The remote
setpoint field shows the remote setpoint even when the controller
is in local mode or manual mode.

Scaled Setpoint

When ratio control is selected, the remote setpoint is linearly
scaled by user input parameters to calculate the scaled setpoint
for use by the process controller. The scaling can be used to
change to setpoint engineering units to match the process variable.

Setpoint

The setpoint of the process controller. When ratio control is
selected, this is the scaled value in the same units as the process
variable. In local setpoint mode, the setpoint can be changed by
dragging the thumb in the process setpoint indicator or by
right-clicking on the indicator and typing a value.

Process Variable

The process variable is the value in engineering units of the process being controlled and measured from the transmitter signal
attached to the 2nd signal input (auxiliary signal).

Controller Output

When the controller is on, this value is the signal in percent sent to
the positioner from the process controller.

Controller Output Indicator

The graphical display shows the output of the process controller
from 0% to 100% and the valve position (uncharacterized to match
the controller output). In manual mode, the thumb can be dragged
to change the valve position.

607

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint) (indicator
yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration parameters
of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters of
the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests, step
response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless Transfer)
(indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe mode
until the user intervenes (indicator red).

Menu - Controller
When you right-click on the Controller Monitor tab, a context menu appears (the items that
appear depend on the SVI mode):
Set Manual – Puts the valve in Manual mode.
Set Local – Puts the controller in Local mode with a constant, user defined setpoint.
Set Remote – Puts the controller in remote mode with the setpoint measured from the
signal input.
Set Output – In Manual mode, allows you to set the valve position. The valve moves to
where it would go if the controller output were set the entered value.
Report Setup – Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report – Generates a report of the SVI parameters.
Detach Trend – Removes the Trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate display.
Help – Displays the help file at the Controller Monitor tab instructions.

608

Controller Settings Tab

Controller Settings Tab
From the Controller Settings tab you can change the parameters that control the process
controller.

Figure 22

Controller Settings Tab

Fields
Derivative Source

Determines whether a change in process variable or a change in
error (setpoint- process variable) causes derivative action.

Setpoint Tracking

If setpoint tracking is selected, when the controller is changed from
the Manual mode to Local mode, the setpoint is set to equal the
current process variable. In that case the process is not upset by
the change from manual to local.

Freeze on Bad Value

If selected and if the process variable read from the auxiliary input
channel is not a valid reading, the controller output is not changed.

Alarm Status

The alarm status indicates when the process variable is outside of the
user specified range of upper alarm limit and lower alarm limit.
The alarm can be specified as an absolute range or as a deviation from
setpoint.

609

GE Oil & Gas
Alarm Type

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Determines whether the alarms will be absolute or deviation:
An absolute alarm appears when the process variable is not
between the low and high alarm values.
A deviation alarm appears when the process variable differs from
the setpoint by more than the low and high alarm values.

Controller Parameter List
The following parameters for the process controller can be changed whenever the process
controller is operating:
Proportional Gain (%)

P is the ratio of proportional action (part of controller output) to error.

Integral Time (sec)

Integral time or reset time, is the time constant of integral control.

Derivative Time (msec)

Derivative time or rate time is the time constant of derivative control.

Derivative Gain

Derivative gain is a parameter for derivative control. Typical range is
8 to 16.

Beta

This is nonlinear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is 0, the
controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of error.
The larger the beta, the smaller the gain for small error.

Setpoint Low and High
Limits

The setpoint is constrained to be between the low and high limits.
Both local and remote setpoints are limited. The limits are entered in
the same engineering units as the process variable.

Ratio Gain and Bias

In ratio control, the setpoint and process variable can be in different
engineering units or on different scales. The relationship between the
setpoint in process variable units and the raw setpoint is given by:
Setpoint (in process variable units)=Ratio Gain x Setpoint + Ratio Bias.
The setpoint in process variable units is used in the PID calculation to
compute error.

Low and High Alarm Limits Defines when the alarm lights on the controller view are lit. If absolute alarms are selected and the process variable is not between the
low and high alarm limit, the alarm light is on. If deviation alarms are
set and the difference between the setpoint and the process variable
is not between the low and high alarm limit, the alarm light is on. The
alarm limits are entered in the same units as the process variable.
Manual Reset Bias

Only applies to P or PD control. It is the process controller output at a
typical operating steady state. If the controller outputs range from
30 to 50% at normal operation, the Manual Reset Bias should be set
at 40% in order to minimize steady state error.

Output Rate Limit

Limits how fast the output can change. It is expressed as the percent
of full output range per second and can be between 1 and 200 percent.

610

Controller Settings Tab
Controller Dead Zone

When the difference between the setpoint and the process variable is less than the dead zone, the controller takes no action to
change the output.

Apply Settings

Sends the values on the tab to the SVI. Changes made on the settings tab are not made until the Apply Settings button is clicked.

Change Mode

The SVI can be in any of several operating modes:
Operating: In this mode the SVI responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual: In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal. Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position selected by the user (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Configure: In this mode you can set configuration
parameters of the positioner or controller (indicator yellow).
Calibrate: In this mode you can set calibration parameters
of the positioner (indicator yellow).
Diagnostic: In this mode you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures (indicator
yellow).
Bumpless transfer: This is a transition mode when you select
operating mode from manual mode (see Bumpless
Transfer) (indicator red).
Failsafe: When the SVI cannot operate correctly the device
goes to the failsafe position and remains in the failsafe
mode until the user intervenes (indicator red).

611

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu Bar and Footer Buttons
File Menu

Allows you to exit the level portion of the program to the device
selection list.

Exit Button

Exits the program.

Help Button

Displays the online help table of contents. Right-clicking on any tab
displays a menu that includes help – the menu help displays help for
the particular tab.

Help Menu

Allows you to view online help for the program or for the ValVue program. Software Revision: This value indicates which revision of software is used inside the unit. As software is updated, this value
changes. SVI and other software that must communicate with the
SVI use the software revision number to know how to correctly communicate with the device.

Mode

Displays the mode of the SVI – Operating, Manual, Configure, Calibrate, Diagnostic, or Failsafe.

Online/Offline

In the offline mode, SVI reads values for all of the variables from a file
(rather from a real SVI device). The offline mode can be used to
examine the variable values that have been saved with the Save SVI
Data command and is useful as a demo/learning tool.

612

ValVue SVI Software

ValVue SVI Software

613

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

Monitor Tab

Monitor Tab
Use the Monitor tab to view the basic functions of the SVI2 including tag and identification, input
signal, setpoint, position, and status. When in manual mode, you can use the bar indicator to
change the valve position by dragging the position indicator.
The Setup Wizard provides for rapid setup of the positioner in four easy steps.

Figure 1

Monitor Tab

Fields
Tag

A user-assigned name for the valve with a maximum of eight characters. The value appears in many views but can only be changed
from the “Configure Tab” on page 626 tab or with commands sent
from the Monitor tab.

Descriptor

A user-defined field with up to 16 characters. Use this field to
describe the user of the valve. The value appears in many views
but can only be changed from the “Configure Tab” on page 626 tab
or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

615

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Message

A user-defined field with up to 32 characters. Use this field for any
information. The value appears in many views but can only be
changed from the “Configure Tab” on page 626 tab or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

Date

Use the date field as needed. The preferred format is dd MMM yyyy
(e.g. 14 NOV 2001). The program also accepts dates formatted as dd/
mm/yy (e.g. 14/11/01). Years greater than 70 are assumed to be in
the 1900’s with years 70 or less assumed to be in the 2000’s. The day
precedes the month. Dates as dd/mm/yyyy are also accepted. The
value appears in many views but can only be changed from the“Configure Tab” on page 626 tab or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

Assembly Number

A user-assigned number between 0 and 16,777,215. The value
appears in many views, but can only be changed from the“Configure
Tab” on page 626 or with commands sent from the Monitor tab.

Status

The SVI2 tracks many errors and fault conditions. When there is
information on fault codes available in the SVI, this box contains
Additional Status Available.

Signal

The value of the input signal expressed as the position it indicates. It
is scaled in percent and is characterized if necessary.

Position

The current position of the valve in percent open. 0% is always closed
and 100% is open. Because the travel of a valve may exceed its nominal travel, positions greater than 100% are possible (see“Open Stop
Adjustment” on page 637).

Setpoint

When in operating mode, the setpoint is the position indicated by the
input signal (characterized if necessary). In manual mode, it is the
position to which the SVI2 is controlling the valve. Change the manual setpoint by dragging the lower thumb on the position indicator
when the positioner is in Manual mode.

Position Indicator

This indicator shows the valve position graphically. The indicator
consists of three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator that shows the value of
the signal. In Operating mode this is the position setpoint. In
manual mode, this is the position that the valve moves to if
operating mode is selected.
The center green bar shows the valve position with full left as
closed and full right as open. The numerical valve position is
shown in the center.

616

Monitor Tab
The lower part contains an indicator (thumb) that shows the
valve setpoint. In operating mode this is the same as the
signal. In manual mode it is the valve setpoint. Drag the
thumb to change the valve setpoint. While dragging, the
number in the center bar shows the manual setpoint
selected when you release the thumb.
You can also change the manual setpoint by right-clicking in the
indicator. A dialog box appears where to type the exact setpoint for
use.
Pressure

The SVI2 continuously monitors the actuator pressure. It is displayed in the user selected units (psi, bar, or kpa).

Send Command

Sends the selected HART command to the SVI, reads the results,
and displays them in the result box below.

Setup Wizard

From the Setup Wizard tab you can rapidly setup the SVI2 by configuring some basic parameters. By selecting the appropriate
check boxes you can set the device identification, select the air
action, perform a travel calibration, and an autotune. When the
selected tasks are started, ValVue displays a progress dialog.
Used primarily for rapid setup of standard valves, the Setup Wizard
can dramatically reduce commissioning time in the field.

Figure 2 Setup Wizard

617

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode. The SVI2 can be in
any of three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position is selected (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and configuration
parameters. Additionally you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures. (indicator
yellow).

Mode
The SVI2 can be in any of several operating modes
Operating - in this mode the SVI2 responds to the input signal and positions the valve
appropriately (indicator green).
Manual - in this mode the valve does not respond to the input signal. Instead it remains
stable in one position which is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position selected by you (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).
Setup - in this mode, the valve does not respond to the input signal and remains stable
unless moved by a command selected by you. In this mode, you can set calibration and
configuration parameters. Additionally, you can run response time tests, step response
tests, and positioner signatures (indicator yellow).
Bumpless transfer - this is a transition mode when you select Operating mode from
manual mode and the positioner has been configured for bumpless transfer. (indicator
red).
Failsafe - when the SVI2 cannot operate correctly the device goes to the failsafe
position and remains in the failsafe mode until you intervene (indicator red).

618

Command Result Display

Command Result Display
This box displays the SVI's response to HART commands. The following commands may be
sent to the SVI:
000 Read Identifier - Returns the unique identifier from the device including the
device ID, device type, and the manufacturers ID.
001 Read Primary Variable - Returns the position in percent open.
002 Read Current - Returns the input signal in mA.
003 Read All Variables - Returns the input signal and the position in percent open.
011 Read ID from Tag - Prompts you for a tag name. The tag name is sent in a HART
command and if received by a device with a matching tag name, the ID of the device
is returned. The format of the ID is the same as command 001 Read Identifier.
012 Read Message - Reads the message that was stored in the device when it was
configured.
013 Read Tag & Descriptor - Reads the tag name, date, and the descriptor that was
stored in the device when it was configured.
016 Read Assembly Number - Reads the final assembly number that was stored in
the device when it was configured.
017 Write Message - This command allows you to enter a message (up to 32
characters) for storage in the SVI2.
018 Write Tag & Descriptor - This command allows you to enter a tag name (up to 8
characters) and a descriptor (up to 16 characters) that are stored in the SVI2.
019 Write Final Assembly - This command allows you to enter an identifying number
(0 to 16 million) which is stored in the SVI2.
038 Reset Configuration Changed Flag - This command sets the HART configuration
changed bit back to 0. The bit is set whenever a value saved in the device is changed.
210 Read Configuration - Reads the configuration data from the device and displays
it in the response box. The data includes all of the data describing the device set on
the Configure tab including Air-To-Open/Air-To-Close, Tight Shutoff status, Software
Position Limit Stops, etc.
200 Read Option Config - Reads basic (hardware) configuration information about
the positioner.
212 Read Error Limits - Reads and displays the position range and time-outs
associated with position and pressure errors.
213 Read Calibration Data - Reads and displays the input signal that corresponds to
the open and closed position of the valve.
216 Read PID - Reads and displays the valve tuning parameters.
136 Read Status - Reads and displays the status flags. These flags describe error
conditions that have occurred since the last time they were cleared. See “Status Code
List” on page 653 for a complete list of possible codes.
138 Clear Status - Clears the status flags. See“Status Code List” on page 653.
137 Read Switches - Reads the status of the contact switches.

619

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
139 Read Continuous Diagnostic Data - Reads and displays the continuous diagnostic
data including number of full strokes the valve has made, the number of cycles
(direction changes), the time the valve has spent open, the time the valve has been
closed, and the time the valve has spent throttling near the seat.
191 Read Standard Diagnostic Data - Displays the valve response time open and
response time closed.
154 Read Setpoint - reads the manual setpoint of the positioner.
1093 Read Firmware Checksum - a non-standard HART command that returns the
checksum of the firmware - this identifies a specific build of the firmware.
141 Read Raw Data - Returns information from the SVI that is useful to Masoneilan
technicians for diagnostic purposes. The information includes the input current on the
auxiliary input channel, the A/D values from the pressure, signal, and position
measurements, the D/A value of the signal to the I/P, and the internal SVI temperature.
999 Hart Status - this command interprets the 2nd HART status byte returned with the
command set to read position and signal.

Setup Wizard
Wizard Step 1
When selected, you can modify the device Tag, Descriptor, and Message.

Wizard Step 2
When selected, you can modify the air action or return the device to factory default settings.

620

Setup Wizard
Wizard Step 3
When selected, you can perform a Travel Calibration. To determine valve position, the
positioner must measure the closed and open positions of the valve. The SVI2 first exhausts
the actuator and measure the position, then fills the actuator and measure the position.
From these measurements the valve position can be determined.

Wizard Step 4
When selected, you can perform an Autotune. The SVI2 positioner is PID servo control device
with special parameters unique to valve positioners. Because the SVI2 can be put on a wide
variety of valves, the values of the parameters must be changed to match each valve.
The SVI2 can determine a good set of parameters automatically. When the Auto Tune
procedure is run, the SVI2 performs a series of open and closed loop tests to determine
values for P, I, D, Padjust, Beta, Position Compensation, and DeadZone.
The values determined should give good general operation of the valve; however these
values are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVI2. You may
want performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID values
differently than determined by Auto Tune. This can be done on the “Calibrate Tab” on
page 634.
Additionally, you can enter the expected Supply Pressure.

Wizard Step 5
Click and when Setup Wizard completes a report of settings appears using the selection
made in Report Setup.

621

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Auto Tune
The SVI2 positioner is PID servo control device with special parameters unique to valve
positioners. Because the SVI2 can be put on a wide variety of valves, the values of the
parameters must be changed to match each valve.
The SVI2 can determine a good set of parameters automatically. When the Auto Tune
procedure is run, the SVI2 performs a series of open and closed loop tests to determine values
for P, I, D, Padjust, Beta, Position Compensation, and DeadZone. A progress dialog appears
while the autotune process is running.
The values determined should give good general operation of the valve; however, these values
are determined by a target set of performance criteria built into the SVI2. You may want
performance different than this set and may therefore want to set the PID values differently
than determined by Auto Tune. This is done on the “Calibrate Tab” on page 634.
Progress Dialog
Some processes that ValVue can start can be lengthy. These processes include find stops,
autotune, diagnostics, and the setup wizard. While these processes run, a dialog is provided to
show the progress and allow you to cancel the process early if necessary.

Figure 3 Progress

622

Read Status

Read Status
To retrieve the fault codes:
1. Select Read Status from the drop down list.
2. Click Send. The results appear in the lower left box. The fault codes also appear on the
Status page.
The status block also contains other status codes returned by HART. These include
Configuration Change, Device malfunction, and Variable out of limits.

Menu - Monitor
When you right-click on the Monitor tab, a context menu appears. The items that appear
depend on the SVI2 mode:
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P. This is available only in
manual or setup mode.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command work by taking the valve
out of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P. This is available
only in manual or setup mode.
Set to Fail Position - Moves the valve full open or full closed, whichever is the fail
position of the actuator.
Cancel Transfer - Returns the SVI2 to manual mode from the bumpless transfer
mode. Available during a bumpless transfer.
Reset - Selecting this issues a master reset to the device, causing it to go through its
startup routine and re-initializing all of its operating parameters from non-volatile
memory.
Report Setup - Allows you to select a report file and a report printing program.
Report - Generates a report of the SVI2 parameters.
Save SVI Data - Saves the SVI2 internal parameters to a disk file that can be read by
the ValVue.
Restore SVI Data - Reads data that has been saved with a Save SVI Data command
and sends HART commands to set the positioner to match the data that was read.
This can be used to clone an SVI into a new SVI. Note: items like tag, which should be
unique, and position calibrations which differ on each positioner are not cloned. This
command is available only in manual mode.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Monitor tab instructions.

623

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Trend Tab
Use the Trend tab to see the performance of the valve in real time as it operates.
These graphs are useful for tuning the PID parameters and monitoring valve performance by
showing valve position and setpoint as they change over time. The process trend graphs may be
zoomed only on the Y axis.
The process trend can be detached from the tabbed dialog so that it can be viewed while
performing calibration and diagnostic tasks. To detach the trend, right-click in any tab.
When in manual mode, change the valve position by dragging the position indicator.

Figure 4

Trend Tab

Fields
Position, Manual Setpoint,
Signal Setpoint and
Pressure

The display of any of the four curves on the Trend graph may be
turned on or off by checking or unchecking these boxes.

Y Low/ Y High

The Y axis (position) of the trend graph can be set by entering the values in these edit boxes. Enter a number and hit tab to set the scale.
The axis can be changed with the mouse by zooming and can be
returned to the original scale by right-clicking in the graph.

624

Trend Tab
Position Indicator

This indicator shows the valve position graphically. The indicator
consists of three parts:
The upper part contains an indicator that shows the value
of the signal. In Operating mode this is the position setpoint.
In manual mode, this is the position that the valve moves to
if operating mode is selected.
The center green bar shows the valve position with full left
as closed and full right as open. The numerical valve
position is shown in the center.
The lower part contains an indicator (thumb) that shows the
valve setpoint. In operating mode this is the same as the
signal. In manual mode it is the valve setpoint. Drag the
thumb to change the valve setpoint. While dragging, the
number in the center bar shows the manual setpoint
selected when you release the thumb.
You can also change the manual setpoint by right-clicking in the
indicator. A dialog box appears where to type the exact setpoint for
use.

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in
any of three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input
signal and positions the valve appropriately (indicator
green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position is selected (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and
configuration parameters. Additionally you can run
response time tests, step response tests, and positioner
signatures. (indicator yellow).

Capture to Clipboard

Clicking this button saves an image of the graph on the clipboard.
The image (a bitmap) may be pasted into another document (e.g.
into a Microsoft Word document).

Zooming
Any portion of a diagnostic graph may be examined more closely by entering the new X and
Y scales in the proper scale edit boxes or by dragging the mouse across an area of the
graph. If the mouse is dragged across an area, that area fills the graphic window. Right
button clicking on the graph restores the default scales.

625

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu - Trend
When you right-click on the Trend tab (but not in the graph area- see Zooming), a context
menu appears:
Refresh Graph - Restarts the sampling of the Trend graph.
Stop Graph - Stops the sampling of the trend graph. It can be restarted by selecting
Refresh Graph.
Open - Opens an Open Trend Data File dialog to open a previously saved trend (.tre file).
Save - Opens an Save Trend Data File dialog to save a trend (.tre file).
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Trend tab instructions.

Configure Tab
In the Setup mode, from the Configure tab, you can set the information that tells the SVI2
how the valve/actuator is configured. Following configuration, you must send the
configuration information to the SVI II by clicking on the Apply button or by returning to
the Manual or Operating mode.

Figure 5

Configure Tab

626

Configure Tab
Fields
Polling Address

HART can communicate with up to 15 devices on a single pair of
wires. These devices are distinguished by their polling address
which is a number from 0 to 15. If there is a device at polling
address 0, it must be the only device on the loop. There may be up
to 15 devices with non-zero polling addresses on the loop (subject
to power and intrinsic safety constraints). Devices which operate
4-20 mA are generally required to have polling address 0, however
with split range valve positioners, several 4-20 mA devices may be
wired in series. These devices should be set up with non-zero polling addresses.

Switches

The SVI2 contains as an option, an output switch that can opened
or closed in response to conditions that the SVI2 detects. These
conditions are:
Disabled - The switch is not controlled by the SVI2 and
remains in its default position.
Failsafe - The switch is activated when the SVI is in failsafe
mode.
Reset - The switch is activated whenever a reset has
occurred and the switch remains activated until the SVI2
status is cleared.
Position error - The switch is activated whenever a position
error has occurred and is deactivated when the position
recovers to the correct position.
Tight shutoff activated - The switch is activated whenever
the device is in tight shutoff. Tight shutoff is on and the
valve position is less than the tight shutoff position.
Position low limit - The switch is activated whenever the
valve position is less than the position setting of this switch
control.
Position upper limit - The switch is activated whenever the
valve position is greater than the position setting of this
switch control.
Manual mode - The switch is activated whenever the SVI2 is
in manual mode, configure mode, calibrate mode, or
diagnostic mode.
The switch can be configured to default as normally open
or normally closed.

Language

The SVI can display its menu in English or French. Use this list
box to choose a language. The ValVue program is not affected.

627

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Pressure Units

You can select the units in which the actuator pressure is reported.
Selections are psi, bar, or kpa.

Position Fault Limits

You can configure how position errors are handled. A position error
occurs when the valve position differs from the requested position
(from the input signal in normal operating mode or the manual setpoint in manual mode) by more than the Position Error Band for more
than the Position Error Time 1. When this occurs, a status flag is set
which is reported during the next HART message (only that a flag is
set is reported. You can send a Read Status message to find out the
cause of the status flag). If the error persists for Position Error Time 2,
the valve is put in failsafe position. This latter action may be disabled
by unchecking the Enable box next to the Time 2 entry.
For practical considerations, Time 2 (if enabled) must be larger than
Time 1 by at least 2 seconds. Time 1 should be at least as long as the
time required to open the valve fully or unnecessary position errors
are reported. The maximum time is 327 seconds.

Characterization

Control valves are often characterized to give a specific relationship between flow capacity (Cv) and percent opening of the valve.
The valve can be characterized with special purpose trim or with
the SVI positioner. Several characterizations are available:
Linear: Causes the valve to open proportionally with the
input signal. This option should be selected if non-linear trim
is used in the valve.
Equal Percentage (50) and Equal Percentage (30): Two equal
percentage characterizations are available, one with R=50
and the other with R=30.
Quick Opening: The quick opening characterization is the
inverse of the Equal Percentage (50) characterization
curve.
Custom Configuration: Selecting this option displays an
additional dialog where you can enter or draw a custom
characterization curve. The curve can have up to nine
points and points in between are linearly interpolated.

Air Action: Air-to-Open I
Air-to-Close

You must select whether the valve is an air to open valve or an air to
close valve. This selection determines whether an increasing signal
opens or closes the valve.

Actuator Type: Single/
Double

Selects the actuator type- single acting or double acting. This is
available only on SVI2 Version 1.2.2 and later.

628

Configure Tab
Button Lock

The SVI comes with an optional local display and buttons for data
entry. These buttons can be used to perform basic SVI setup without the need for ValVue or a handheld. It may, however, be desirable after initial setup to lock the buttons so that the SVI
parameters cannot be inadvertently changed from the buttons.
Several levels of locks are provided:
Allow Local Buttons (level 3): Buttons on the SVI are enabled.
Lock Out Local Cal. - Config. (level 2): You can use the
buttons to perform operations in normal operating mode
and manual mode, however they may not go to configure
or calibrate mode.
Lock Out Local Manual (level 1): You can examine variables
in normal operating mode but may not put the valve in
manual mode (and therefore cannot get to calibrate or
configure modes).
Lock Out All Buttons (level 0): The buttons are disabled.

Bumpless Transfer

This option provides a means to maintain smooth valve control
positioning when changing to Normal mode from Manual or Setup.
Without Bumpless Transfer, when changing to Normal mode, the
setpoint could vary in a manner that causes a significant process
disturbance. Bumpless Transfer moves the controller signal to
match the valve position so that smooth resumption of control
with little disturbance results.
When Bumpless Transfer is selected, returning to Normal mode
from Manual or Setup mode is deferred until the input signal
matches the current valve position. Either the input signal or the
valve position can be changed to match. If nothing is done, the system slowly changes the position until it matches the signal setpoint. The time taken to move to the position is determined by the
Transfer Time which is a number between 0 and 255 and is
approximately the number of seconds required to move the valve
100%.

Near Closed

The Near Closed value determines the value of position below
which the valve is considered near closed by the continuous diagnostic calculations.

Tight Shutoff

When selected, if the input signal of the valve would position the
valve below the tight shutoff value (entered in the edit box to the
right), full supply pressure or atmosphere pressure is supplied to
the actuator as needed to close the valve with full seating force.

629

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Position Limit Stops:
Position Lower Limit /
Position Upper Limit

The SVI2 allows you to establish software limit stops. If enabled, during correct operation of the SVI2, the control functions of the SVI will
not allow the valve position to be lower than the lower position limit
or above the upper position limit. Note, however, that this option does
not provide mechanical stops for the valve. In an electrical or air failure the valve goes to the fail safe position without regard to the software limit stops.
The full open and full closed buttons similarly ignores the settings of
the software limit stops.
Some of the diagnostic test cannot be performed with position limit
stops set.

Apply

Clicking Apply causes any changes made in the Configure or Calibrate tabs to be witten immediately to the SVI2.

Change Mode

When selected,you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in any of three
operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position is selected (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and configuration
parameters. Additionally you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures. (indicator
yellow).

Custom Characterization
A custom characterization defines the relationship between the input signal and the output
position of the valve. It may contain up to 9 XY pairs and the position is linearly interpolated
between the pairs. The first position must be 0,0 and the last position must be 100,100. Both
are in percent and neither count toward the nine points allowed.
Add points to the curve by clicking at the position where you want the point. Delete an existing
point by clicking on it with the right mouse button.
Move points by dragging them to their new position.
The characterization curve must be non-decreasing. The program will not allow a point to be
added or moved to a position that would create a decreasing segment.
To enter exact positions:
1. Enter a value in the edit boxes at the bottom of the tab.
2. Hit the TAB key. The point is entered and the graph updated.

630

Custom Characterization
3. Click OK saves the changes and returns to the Configuration tab. Clicking Cancel returns
to the Configuration tab without saving.

Figure 6

Custom Characterization

631

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Custom Linearization
When mounted on a reciprocating valve, a small non-linearity in the reported valve position
versus actual valve position may result from the linkage configuration. This non-linearity can
be corrected using a custom characterization that matches the specific linkage used. The
custom linearization procedure automatically generates this custom characterization.
Custom characterization must be the selected configuration option to use the generated
curve. This option is selected automatically when you click OK to accept the displayed curve.
Two types of linkages are modeled: simple and compound. Most Masoneilan linkages use the
compound linkage system.
Clicking Cancel on the Custom Linearization tab returns to the Configuration tab without changing
the characterization.

Figure 7 Custom Linearization
Linkage Parameters
Stroke Length - The distance of stem movement from 0% to 100% position.
Lever 1 Length - The length of the lever connected to the rotating element of the SVI2.
Position at horizontal - The valve position when Lever 1 is horizontal (for normally
positioned valves).
Lever 2 Length - The length of the 2nd lever in a compound lever. This lever connects
the 1st lever to the valve stem.
Offset - The horizontal distance from the connection between the two levers and the
connection of the 2nd lever to the stem.
Lever 2 Above/Below - Select above if Lever 2 points toward the open position and
below if it points toward the closed position.

632

Menu - Configure
Simple - Compound Linkage Configuration
SIMPLE LEVER
The simple lever has the pivot point (the potentiometer in the SVI) mounted a fixed distance
(L1) from the valve stem pickup point. To compute the proper correction curve:
1. Enter the stroke length, the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup point and
the valve position at horizontal.
2. Click Simple to compute the correction and display the curve.
COMPOUND LEVER
The compound linkage has two lever segments attached at one end to the pivot (the
potentiometer in the SVI) and the other end to the valve stem pickup point. To compute the
proper correction curve:
1. Enter the stroke length, first lever segment length (L1), second lever segment length (L2),
the distance from the pivot to the valve stem pickup (L3), the valve position at horizontal.
2. Click Compound to compute the correction and display the curve.
Most Masoneilan linkages use a linkage with L3 equal to L1, i.e. the second lever arm is
vertical when the first lever arm is horizontal. The correction computation correctly
computes the correction curve when L3 is not equal to L1, however L3 must be greater than
0 which requires that the valve stem pickup not be lined up with the pivot and that the
pickup be on the same side of the pivot as the link between the first and second lever
segments.

Menu - Configure
When you right-click on the Configure tab, a context menu appears:
Custom Linearization - Displays the Custom Linearization tab to allow correction for
linkage non-linearity. The Custom Linearization tab creates a custom
characterization that linearizes the valve movement with respect to the input signal.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Configure tab instructions

633

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Calibrate Tab
Use the Calibrate tab to calibrate the stop positions and the feedback control parameters (PID
tuning parameters).

Figure 8

Calibrate Tab

Fields
Signal - Low/High

The low and high signal defines at what input values the valve is fully
open or fully closed. The low signal value must always be lower than
the high signal value. The ValVue software identifies which value represents closed and which represents open from the configuration
data.
The values will typically be 4 and 20 mA but may be any values
between 3.8 and 22 mA. If the valve is to be split ranged, (low) values
of 3.8 to 14 and (high) values of 10 to 20.2 may be entered. There
must be at least 5 mA difference between the low and high values.
These entries are the proper method of split ranging the SVI (rather
than with a custom characterization curve).
Changing the signal low and high values is not allowed on an SVI2-1.

634

Calibrate Tab
P

Proportional gain P (%) is the ratio of proportional action (part of
controller output) to error. Common values for the positioner are 50
for small valves up to 4000 for large valves.

I

Integral time or reset time (0.1 sec), is the time constant of integral
control. Higher values of I cause less integral action, however a
value of 0 gives no integral action. Common values are 10 to 200.

D

Derivative time or rate time (msec) is the time constant of derivative control. Common values are 10 to 100.

PAdj

Valves often have significantly different response when filling
verses exhausting. The proportional gain is adjusted by adding
Padj (%) to P when the valve is exhausting.

DeadZone

When the valve position is within the setpoint +/- the dead zone, no
additional position control is performed. This value is normally 0%,
however for high friction valves (e.g. valves with graphite packing)
a higher dead zone (%) helps avoid limit cycling due to the stick/slip
action of the valve. In these cases the dead zone chosen might be
0.5% to 1%.

Beta

Beta is nonlinear gain factor, ranging from -9 to 9. When beta is 0,
the controller gain is linear. Otherwise the gain is the function of
error. The larger the beta, the smaller the gain for small error. Typical beta values fer a valve position controller is 7 or 8.

Position Compensation
Coefficient

The response of the valve is different when the valve is nearly
closed than when the valve is nearly open. The position compensation coefficient, which is a number between 0 and 9, allows you to
make adjustments to try to equalize the valve response. The normal value is 6.

Damping Coefficient

The valve response may be made slower for some applications.
In SVI2 version 1.1.4 and earlier, a value of 0 gives no damping, and
a value of 9 gives maximum damping of valve motion.
For SVI2 version 1.2.1 and later, the damping is specified as the
maximum valve movement in %/second. A value of 0 indicates no
damping. Allowed values are 1 to 200 %/s. The damping can be
applied in both directions or only in one direction.

Apply

Clicking Apply causes any changes made in the“Configure Tab” on
page 626 or “Calibrate Tab” on page 634 tabs to be witten immediately to the SVI2.

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in
any of three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input
signal and positions the valve appropriately (indicator
green).

635

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position is selected (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and configuration
parameters. Additionally you can run response time tests,
step response tests, and positioner signatures. (indicator
yellow).

Calibration Value
This value is used when recalibrating the signal or pressure measurement.
1. Set the source current or pressure to a known value.
2. Enter that value in the Calibration Value edit box.
3. Select Set Low Signal Cal, Set High Signal Cal, Set Low Pressure Cal, or Set High
Pressure Cal appropriately.
Signal Calibration Procedure
The Calibrate tab allows you to recalibrate the signal sensor in the SVI. The sensor is calibrated
at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog provides a
convenient method. The Reset to Factory button returns the calibrations to those that were set
before delivery of the SVI.
The currently measured value of the primary input is displayed and can be compared to
reference signals to see if recalibration is necessary. Calibrating the primary signal can be
done most easily with a variable current source.
The procedure for recalibration is:
Low Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 4 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 4.00 mA and click Set Low Signal.
High Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Signal button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 20 in the signal value field.
3. Set the current to 20.00 mA and click Set High Signal.

636

Calibrate Tab
Open Stop Adjustment
In some valves the stem travel exceeds the nominal valve travel. The SVI2 allows you to
compensate for this so that the valve position reads 100% at the nominal travel.
To make this correction:
1. Enter 100 in the Open Stop Adjustment edit box.
2. Select Find Stops from the context menu. This calibrates the position with the full travel
of the valve.
3. Return to Manual mode and adjust the valve to its nominal travel and note the position
reading.
4. Return to Calibrate mode, enter the position that was measured at nominal travel into
the Open Stop Adjustment edit box and select Open Stop Adjustment from the menu.
The valve now reads 100% at the nominal travel of the valve.
Zero Calibration
1. Click the Calib. Pressure button. A dialog appears.
2. Enter 0 in the pressure value field.
3. Turn the air off and click Set Low Pressure.
Pressure Calibration Procedure
The Calibrate tab allows you to recalibrate the pressure sensor in the SVI2. The sensor is
calibrated at the factory and does not usually require recalibration, but if needed, this dialog
provides a convenient method. The Reset to Factory menu returns the calibrations to those
that were set before delivery of the SVI2.
The currently measured value of pressure is displayed and can be compared to reference
pressures to see if recalibration is necessary. The procedure for recalibration is:
Gain calibration
1. Right-click and from the popup menu select Full Open (on an ATO valve).
2. Click the Calib. Pressure button. A dialog appears.
3. Enter the supply pressure in the pressure value field.
4. Click Set High Pressure.

637

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu - Calibrate
When you right-click on the Calibrate tab, a context menu appears:
Run Find Stops - Runs the automatic position calibration process. To determine valve
position, the positioner must measure and save the closed and open positions of the
valve. This can be done automatically by running the Find Stops procedure from the
Calibrate tab. The SVI2 first exhausts the actuator and measures the position, then fills
the actuator and measures the position. From these measurements the valve position
is determined. Correction can be made for nominal valve travel if it is less than full
travel (see Open Stop Adjustment). A progress dialog appears while the find stops
process is running.
Manual Find Stops - Allows you to set the position calibration by moving the valve full
closed and full open. On very large valves, the automatic find stops routine may
timeout before the valve has reached the end of travel. Manual find stops allows
calibration of these valves.
On some very large valves or valves with non-Masoneilan actuators, it is possible that
the automatic Find Stops procedure will not find the correct end positions of the travel.
A semi-automatic method of calibrating the stop positions is provided.
When Manual Find Stops is selected, the valve is moved to full closed and you are
asked to respond when the valve has reached the closed position. The valve is moved
to full open and you are asked to respond when the valve has reached the full open
position.
For some valves the open position stop exceeds the nominal travel of the valve. See
Open Stop Adjustment for details about how to make this adjustment.
Open Stop Adjustment - Recomputes the position scale so that at the value entered in
the open stop adjustment edit box as a percent of full stops, the position reads 100%.
Run Auto Tune - Automatically finds appropriate PID parameters for the valve.
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve out of
closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command work by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Set Valve Position - Allows you to set the valve to a specific position. This is
accomplished by momentarily returning to manual mode, repositioning the valve, and
returning to setup mode.
Reset to Factory Cal - Resets the signal calibration its their factory setting.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Calibrate tab instructions.

638

Diagnostics Tab

Diagnostics Tab
Use the Diagnostic tab to run response time tests, step response tests, actuator signatures,
and positioner signatures. The continuous diagnostics appear each time the tab is opened.

Figure 9
Continuous Diagnostic
Values: Strokes, Cycles,
Time Open, Time Closed,
Time Near Closed

Diagnostics Tab

Displays the continuous diagnostic data including number of full
strokes the valve has made, the number of cycles (direction
changes), the time the valve has spent open, the time the valve
has been closed, and the time the valve has spent throttling near
the seat.

Diagnostic Tests
Diagnostic Types:
Response Test, Step Test,
Positioner Sig.

The SVI2 allows four diagnostic tests to be performed: Response
Time Test (with Actuator Signature), Step Response Test, Positioner
Signature Test, and Extended Actuator Signature test. The test to be
performed is selected in this selection box.

Diagnostic Parameters:
Start Position, Stop Position, Time, Step Size

The parameters needed by the diagnostic tests are dependent
upon which test is selected:

639

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Response Time Test: If no pressure sensor is present, no
parameter is required. If a pressure sensor is present, an
actuator signature is measured and a speed must be entered.
A Response Time Test measures the time for the valve to go
from full closed to full open and the time for the valve to go
from full open to full closed.

Figure 10

Response Test

If the SVI2 contains a pressure sensor, an actuator signature is
also measured and friction, spring range, and supply pressure
are reported in the diagnostic results box.
Speed: A speed of four is typical for almost all valves. Very
large valves may require a speed greater than 4 (up to 10)
and very small valves may require a lower speed. The
lower the speed value, the slower the test is run.
Positioner Signature: The valve signal is slowly changed from
the starting current to the ending current and then back. The
number of points indicated are sampled equally spaced in
each direction):
Starting current (mA)
Ending current (mA)
Number of points to sample. This number often needs to
be 1 more than you might expect. e.g. to sample from 5
mA to 10 mA with a sample every 1 mA, you want samples
at 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, and 10 or 6 (not 5) samples.

640

Diagnostics Tab

Figure 11

Positioner Signature

A Positioner Signature produces an input signal vs. position graph
for both increasing and decreasing signal. The signal is a simulated
signal so linearity cannot be checked.
To run a Positioner Signature: Enter a starting current, an ending
current, and the number of samples that should be taken across
the interval specified by the starting and ending current.
The positioner is slowly moved from the starting position to the
ending position and back and the two curves (up and down) are
measured and displayed.
Step Profile: A series of step tests are performed starting
from the start position and moving toward the end position.
Each step test is a step whose length is specified in the step
parameter. Step tests are performed one after another until
the end position is reached. If two way is selected, step tests
are performed in the reverse direction as well. The time
parameter determines how long the valve position is
sampled at each step test.)
Starting position
Ending position
Sample time - Number of seconds to sample at each
step
Step length - The % position change at each step - 0
means to step the full distance from starting position to
ending position

641

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
One/two way - If two way is selected, the step tests are
performed both increasing position and decreasing
position.

Figure 12

Step Response Test

Extended Actuator Signature: An extended actuator signature
is like a standard actuator signature (pressure vs position
hysteresis curve) except that the starting and ending position
can be specified.
The Extended Actuator Signature slowly ramps the pressure to
the actuator up and down over a user selected position range
and measures the position vs pressure. The signature is useful
for determining valve friction and for identifying performance
problems at specific valve positions.
Starting Position
Ending Position
Speed (see description of speed in Response Time Test)

642

Diagnostics Tab

Figure 13 Extended Actuator Signature
Perform Diagnostics

Clicking Perform Diagnostics starts the selected diagnostic procedure. When finished, the results appear in a graph and/or the diagnostics results box. A progress tab appears while the diagnostic
process is running.

View Saved Diag.

Clicking View Saved Diag. allows you to view the results of a diagnostic test that had been saved earlier in a file. Actuator signatures
are saved when the SVI2 memory is saved (see the Monitor menu)
and all types of signature can be saved in a diagnostic file from the
Diagnostics menu.
Choose Signature Curve
Select Curve allows diagnostic graphs that have been saved previously to be displayed. Two graphs (plus the current graph if one
has just been run) may be displayed at once in order to compare
the results.
None - Removes the curve.
Current Signature - Displays the last run standard actuator
signature (note: the last run standard signature in the SVI is
lost if power to the SVI is lost).
Saved Signature - Displays the standard actuator signature
saved in the SVI (if any).
Baseline Signature - Displays the standard actuator
signature saved as the baseline signature in the SVI (if any).
Current Signature from dp1 File - Allows you to select a dp1
file for this or another SVI. The current standard actuator
signature from that file is displayed.

643

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80
Saved Signature from dp1 File - Allows you to select a dp1 file
for this or another SVI. The saved standard actuator signature
from that file is displayed.
Baseline Signature from dp1 File - Allows you to select a dp1
file for this or another SVI. The baseline standard actuator
signature from that file is displayed.
Signature from dgn File - Allows you to select a file that
contains saved diagnostic graphs from this or another SVI.
You can select any of the saved diagnostic graphs.

Figure 14

Choose Signature Curve

Clicking the Export button creates a comma separated value file
(.csv) of the diagnostic data being shown on the graph. CSV files can
be read directly into Excel where you can create graphs or perform
other analysis.
Show Data Points
Selecting this option shows a + at each data point on the graph.
Show Diagnostic Info
Clicking this button opens a window that shows the friction and
spring range of each standard actuator signature on the diagnostic
graph.

644

Diagnostics Tab

Figure 15

Show Diagnostic Information

Diagnostic Graph - XY Scale
You can change the X and/or Y scales by typing the desired scale
into the edit boxes. The actual scale displayed may be different - it
is adjusted to give reasonable values to the grid lines.
Results

The results of the Response Time Test are displayed in the results
box.

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in
any of three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input
signal and positions the valve appropriately (indicator
green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position is selected (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and
configuration parameters. Additionally you can run
response time tests, step response tests, and positioner
signatures. (indicator yellow).

645

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Diagnostic Reports
To create this report:
1. Right-click on the Diagnostic tab and select Diagnostic Report and a dialog appears.

Figure 16 Diagnostic Report Open
2. Select a .dgn file, click Open and the Pick Diagnostic Data dialog appears.

Figure 17

Pick Diagnostic Data

3. Select specific group data (up to three of the same type) for presentation on a report, click
OK and the report appears.

646

Diagnostic Reports

Figure 18 Diagnostic Report
This report can be printed or saved under a user designated name for later use.
Report Preferences
You must select the report template file which is either a text (.txt) or rich text (.rtf) or a
browser (.htm) file. A standard report comes installed with ValVue but you can create new
reports in other formats (see Creating Report Files).
To select the report file:
1. Click the browse button next to the report file edit box.
2. Select the proper report file.
The program that generates the reports can be NotePad, WordPad, or Microsoft Word for
text files. Rich text format (.rtf) files can be used with WordPad or Word to give better
formatting. HTML files can be used with Word or Internet explorer.
To select the program:
1. Click the browse button next to the program edit box.
647

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

2. Select the program to use.
NotePad and WordPad are often installed in the directory c:\Program Files\Accessories\ or in
c:\windows\. The actual location of these files or Miorosoft Word varies from computer to
computer.
Creating Report Files
You can create a custom SVI report by creating a text or rich text format file which is laid out
in the format of the desired report.
ValVue substitutes the values of SVI2 parameters into the text file where ever it finds a
parameter name that matches an SVI2 parameter. For example: Tag=$$Tag
ValVue substitutes the actual tag name from the SVI2 in place of the $$Tag in the report.
Any text can be used in a .txt file and printed with NotePad. With WordPad or Microsoft Word,
you can use an .rtf format file which can contain special formatting (fonts, sizes, tabs, etc.) and
can contain bitmaps. Some .rtf formatting is accepted in Word which is not available in
WordPad – you should check the documentation of these program to determine what options
are available (e.g. right align tabs is allowed in Word but not in WordPad). HTML files are also
allowed and can be displayed with a browser.
The allowed SVI Parameters are listed below. You are encouraged to list the report file
(report.rtf) shipped with the application for examples.
$$Tag - Tag Name
$$Descriptor - Descriptor
$$Date - Date
$$Message - Message
$$AssemblyNumber - Final Assembly Number
$$MfgID - Manufacturers ID (101 for Masoneilan)
$$DeviceType -DeviceType (200 for the SVI)
$$DeviceID - Hart DeviceID
$$HWRev - Hardware Revision
$$SWRev - Software Revision
$$CmdRev - The firmware command revision
$$PollingAddress - PollingAddress
$$Position - Position
$$Signal - Input signal

648

Diagnostic Reports
$$Pressure - Actuator pressure
$$IPOutput - The signal to the I/P in counts (0 - 65000)
$$Temperature - Circuit board temperature
$$LowTemperature - The lowest operating temperature that the device has encountered
$$HighTemperature - The highest operating temperature that the device has encountered
$$Output – Output - From the process controller
$$Mode - SVI mode
$$SignalPercent - Input signal as percent
$$AirAction - Air-to-open/Air-to-close
$$ActuatorType - Single/double acting actuator
$$PosErrorBand - Position error band
$$PosErrorTime - Time until position error
$$ PosErrorFailTime - Time until position error produces failsafe action
$$Charact - Characterization (linear, equal percentage, etc.)
$$CustomCharact - Displays the custom characterization constants (individual items of the
characterization curve may be selected by entering
$$CustomCharact[n] where n is a number between 0 and 17
$$ButtonLock - Button lock level
$$Bumpless - Bumpless Transfer on/off
$$BumplessSpeed - The time to move from manual to operating mode
$$TightShutoff - Tight shutoff on/off
$$TSValue - Tight shutoff value
$$ULimitStop - Upper position limit on/off
$$ULSValue - Upper position limit
$$LLimitStop - Lower position limit on/off
$$LLSValue - Lower position limit
$$NearClosed -Value below which is considered near closed
$$PosUnits - Position units of measure (always %)
$$PresUnits - the pressure units (psi, bar, or kpa)

649

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

$$SignalUnits - the signal units (always mA)
$$Language - SVI display language
$$LowSignal - Low calibration value
$$HighSignal - High calibration value
$$P - Proportional gain in positioner
$$Padjust - Adjustment to P when valve is exhausting
$$I - Integral action of positioner
$$Beta - Step size adjustment in positioner
$$D - Derivative action of positioner
$$PosComp - Position range compensation of positioner
$$DeadZone - Dead zone of positioner
$$Damping - Damping coefficient of positioner
$$Travel - Total strokes of the valve
$$Cycles - Total cycles of the valve
$$TimeOpen - Total time open of the valve
$$TimeClosed -Total time closed of the valve
$$TimeNearClosed - Amount of time valve was nearly closed
$$ResponseOpen - Time require to open valve
$$ResponseClosed - Time required to close valve
$$Switch1Type - The condition under which switch 1 operates
$$Switch1Value - The value at which switch 1 activates
$$Switch1Action - Switch is normally closed or normally open
$$RawSignal - The signal value in A/D counts
$$RawPosition - The position value in A/D counts
$$PositionStopLow - The position A/D counts at the lower stop
$$PositionStopHigh - The position A/D counts at the upper stop
$$OptionConfig - Data describing the hardware installed on the positioner
$$OptionConfigEx0, $$OptionConfigEx1, $$OptionConfigEx2, $$OptionConfigEx3 - Data
describing the hardware installed on the positioner

650

Menu - Diagnostics
$$Friction - The friction measured from a standard actuator signature
$$FLowerSpringRange - The lower spring range measured from a standard actuator
signature
$$FupperSpringRange - The upper spring range measured from a standard actuator
signature
$$LowPressureActual - The pressure when the actuator is exhausted
$$HighPressureActual - The supply pressure
$$Speed - The speed at which the last diagnostic test was run
$$SpeedSaved - The speed at which the saved standard signature was run
$$SpeedBaseline - The speed at which the baseline standard signature was run
$$LowerSpringRange, $$LowerSpringRangeSaved, $$LowerSpringRangeBaseline - The
lower spring range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature
$$UpperSpringRange, $$UpperSpringRangeSaved, $$UpperSpringRangeBaseline - The
upper spring range calculated from the current, saved, or baseline standard signature
$$Signature - The position/pressure pairs gathered during the standard signature test
$$SignatureSaved - The position/pressure pairs saved in the saved standard signature
$$SignatureBaseline - The position/pressure pairs saved in the baseline standard signature

Menu - Diagnostics
When you right-click on the Diagnostics tab, a context menu appears. The items depend
upon what diagnostics have been run:
View Diagnostic Graph - Views the data from the last run diagnostic procedure.
Save Diagnostic Data - Saves the data from the last run diagnostic into a disk file. The
disk file can be imported into spreadsheets or read with ValVue.
Diagnostic Report - Opens a dialog to select a .dgn file and specify specific group
data (up to three of the same type) for presentation on a diagnostic report.
Save Signature in SVI2 - Saves the current signature in the SVI2.
Save Signature as Baseline in SVI2 - Saves the current signature as the baseline
signature in the SVI.
Reset Continuous Diagnostics - Resets the continuous diagnostic data (stroke count,
cycle count, time open, time closed, and time near closed) to 0. When reset, the
previous values are lost, thus the data should be recorded somewhere before being
reset if it is to be used.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Diagnostics tab instructions.

651

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Status Tab
From the Status tab you can see at a glance the internal status of the SVI II. The tab is divided
into four separate sections for Operations, Communication, Firmware, and Circuitry. Green
indicates no faults, yellow indicate conditions that may exist or have existed that can occur in
normal operations, and red indicate a fault. Most faults do not prevent correct operation of
the device.

Figure 19 Status Tab
Fields
Clear Faults

Clicking Clear Faults resets the status bits in the SVI2.

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in
any of three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input signal
and positions the valve appropriately (indicator green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the input
signal Instead it remains stable in one position which is the
position that the valve was when manual mode was entered
or a new position is selected (see Setpoint) (indicator yellow).

652

Menu - Status
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and
configuration parameters. Additionally you can run
response time tests, step response tests, and positioner
signatures. (indicator yellow).
Status Code List
LOW POWER: Indicates that the signal is below 3.8 mA.
RESET_OCCURRED: A reset has occurred either because of a power interruption or
because of an external request for reset.
POSITION_ERROR: The valve failed to go the requested position within the required
time.
BIAS OUT OF RANGE: The integral term of the PID position control has reached its
limits without the valve reaching the proper position.
AUTOTUNE FAILED: The autotune process failed to find reasonable values for PID.
FIND_STOPS_FAILED: The calibration procedure for position failed to find reasonable
values.
CALIBRATE FAILED: The pressure or signal calibration failed because the values were
out of range.
STANDARD DIAGNOSTIC FAILED: The standard actuator signature failed to complete.
EXT DIAGNOSTIC FAILED: The extended actuator signature failed to complete.
CONFIGURATION CHANGED: You have changed one or more of the configuration or
calibration values since the last time this flag was cleared.
ACTUATOR ERROR1: Air pressure has been lost or the calibration of the valve position
endpoint has significantly changed.
SELF_CHECK_FAILURE: On startup, the SVI did not pass a self check.
SOFTWARE_ERROR: An inconsistency has been detected within the SVI.
DATA_OVERRUN: The SVI is not processing acquired data.
POSITION_SENSOR_ERROR: The position sensor has failed or its connection is open.
CURRENT_SENSOR_ERROR: The input signal measurement sensor has failed.
REFERENCE_VOLTAGE_ERROR: The primary reference voltage inside the SVI is
incorrect and all other measurements are likely affected.
INTERNAL_TEMP_ERROR: Internal temperature of the SVI is above or below the rated
temperature.
EEPROM_WRITE_FAILED: A write to the SVI’s internal memory failed.

Menu - Status
Help- Displays the help file at the Configure tab instructions.

653

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Check Tab
Use the Check tab to monitor some of the basic parameters. This tab is used primarily for
troubleshooting.

Figure 20 Check Tab
Fields
Current

The value of the input signal in milliamps.

Board Temperature

The internal SVI2 temperature measured in degrees Celsius. The SVI2 also
reports the lowest temperature and highest temperature in which it has
been operating.

I/P

The current D/A values being sent to the I/P that controls the valve
position. This value is used for troubleshooting. The D/A value sent to
the I/P can be set directly fer testing by using the Set I/P edit box and
menu command.

Raw Position

The A/D values measured from the position sensor. This is used for troubleshooting purposes.

654

Check Tab
Lower Stop/Upper Stop

A/D values measured from the position sensor at the full travel of
the valve. The raw position measurement must always be between
these two numbers. These numbers are useful for troubleshooting
problems.

Raw Signal

The A/D value measured from the signal sensor. This is used for
troubleshooting purposes.

Change Mode

When selected, you can change the SVI2 mode.The SVI2 can be in any of
three operating modes:
Operating- In this mode the SVI2 responds to the input
signal and positions the valve appropriately (indicator
green).
Manual- In this mode the valve does not respond to the
input signal Instead it remains stable in one position which
is the position that the valve was when manual mode was
entered or a new position is selected (see Setpoint)
(indicator yellow).
Setup- In this mode you can set calibration and
configuration parameters. Additionally you can run
response time tests, step response tests, and positioner
signatures. (indicator yellow.

Set I/P

Setting the I/P removes the valve from normal control and sends a
constant, user-defined signal to the I/P. This is useful for troubleshooting. This command is only available in Setup mode.

Set I/P
To set the I/P:
1. Enter a number between 1 and 55000 in the Set I/P edit box.
2. Right-click to pop up the context menu and select Set I/P (or use the Tools menu). The
indictor should appear red.
To resume normal control, right-click to open the context menu and select UnSet I/P.
Returning to Manual or Operating mode also returns the valve to control.

655

GE Oil & Gas

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

Menu - Check
When you right-click on the Check tab, a context menu appears:
Set I/P - Removes the valve from normal control and sends a constant signal (using the
value in the Set I/P edit box) to the SVI2’s I/P.
UnSet I/P - Turns off Set I/P and returns the valve to normal control.
Full Open - Moves the valve to full open. This command work by taking the valve out of
closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Full Closed - Moves the valve to full closed. This command work by taking the valve out
of closed loop control and send a high or low signal to the I/P.
Detach Trend - Removes the trend display from the tabbed dialog and creates a
separate trend display.
Help - Displays the help file at the Check tab instructions.

656

Menu Bar and Footer Buttons

Menu Bar and Footer Buttons
File Menu

Allows you to exit the level portion of the program to the device
selection list.

Exit Button

Exits the program.

Help Button

Displays the online help table of contents. Right-clicking on any tab
displays a menu that includes help – the menu help displays help
for the particular tab.

Help Menu

Allows you to view online help for the program or for the ValVue
program. Software Revision: This value indicates which revision of
software is used inside the unit. As software is updated, this value
changes. SVI and other software that must communicate with the
SVI use the software revision number to know how to correctly
communicate with the device.

Mode

Displays the mode of the SVI – Operating, Manual, Configure, Calibrate, Diagnostic, or Failsafe.

Online/Offline

In the offline mode, SVI reads values for all of the variables from a
file (rather from a real SVI device). The offline mode can be used to
examine the variable values that have been saved with the Save
SVI Data command and is useful as a demo/learning tool.

657

ValVue Digital Communications Software Ver. 2.80

This page intentionally left blank.

DIRECT SALES OFFICE LOCATIONS
BELGIUM
Phone:
Fax:

+32-2-344-0970
+32-2-344-1123

BRAZIL
Phone:
Fax:

+55-11-2146-3600
+55-11-2146-3610

CANADA
Ontario
Phone:
Fax:

+905-335-3529
+905-336-7628

MALAYSIA
Phone:
+60-3-2161-0322
Fax:
+60-3-2163-6312

UNITED ARAB EMIRATES
Phone:
+971-4-8991-777
Fax:
+971-4-8991-778

CHINA
Phone:
Fax:

+86-10-5689-3600
+86-10-5689-3800

MEXICO
Phone:
.

UNITED KINGDOM
Wooburn Green
Phone:
+44-1628-536300
Fax:
+44-1628-536319

FRANCE
Courbevoie
Phone:
+33-1-4904-9000
Fax:
+33-1-4904-9010
GERMANY
Viersen
Phone:
+49-2162-8170-0
Fax:
+49-2162-8170-280
INDIA
Mumbai
Phone:
Fax:

+81-43-297-9222
+81-43-299-1115

SOUTH & CENTRAL
AMERICA AND THE CARIBBEAN
Phone:
+55-12-2134-1201
Fax:
+55-12-2134-1238

KOREA
Phone:
Fax:

+82-2-2274-0748
+82-2-2274-0794

SPAIN
Phone:
Fax:

+91-22-8354790
+91-22-8354791

+39-081-7892-111
+39-081-7892-208

+52-55-3640-5060

THE NETHERLANDS
Phone:
+0031-15-3808666
Fax:
+0031-18-1641438
RUSSIA
Veliky Novgorod
Phone:
+7-8162-55-7898
Fax:
+7-8162-55-7921
Moscow
Phone:
Fax:

New Delhi
Phone:
+91-11-2-6164175
Fax:
+91-11-5-1659635
ITALY
Phone:
Fax:

JAPAN
Chiba
Phone:
Fax:

+7 495-585-1276
+7 495-585-1279

SAUDI ARABIA
Phone:
+966-3-341-0278
Fax:
+966-3-341-7624
SINGAPORE
Phone:
+65-6861-6100
Fax:
+65-6861-7172

+34-93-652-6430
+34-93-652-6444

UNITED STATES
Massachusetts
Phone:
+1-508-586-4600
Fax:
+1-508-427-8971
Corpus Christi, Texas
Phone:
+1-361-881-8182
Fax:
+1-361-881-8246
Deer Park, Texas
Phone:
+1-281-884-1000
Fax:
+1-281-884-1010
Houston, Texas
Phone:
+1-281-671-1640
Fax:
+1-281-671-1735
California
Phone:
Fax:

+1-562-941-7610
+1-562-941-7810

SOUTH AFRICA
Phone:
+27-11-452-1550
Fax:
+27-11-452-6542

*Masoneilan, ValVue, SVI69LDQG9(&725 are registered trademarks of the General Electric Company.
FOUNDATION Fieldbus is a trademark of the Fieldbus Foundation.
Other company names and product names used in this document are the registered trademarks
or trademarks of their respective owners.
© 2014 General Electric Company. All rights reserved.

GEA19790C 03/ 2014
.



---

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.6
Linearized                      : Yes
Author                          : 204062028
Create Date                     : 2014:03:03 13:59:05Z
Modify Date                     : 2014:09:03 18:02:05+02:00
XMP Toolkit                     : Adobe XMP Core 5.2-c001 63.139439, 2010/09/27-13:37:26
Creator Tool                    : FrameMaker 9.0
Metadata Date                   : 2014:09:03 18:02:05+02:00
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 10.1.9 (Windows)
Format                          : application/pdf
Title                           : ValVue 2.8 Instruc Man.book
Creator                         : 204062028
Document ID                     : uuid:ec1f1ced-7c32-4098-bdfa-037cfe02451b
Instance ID                     : uuid:a8ed3c54-142f-41e5-8246-be25e42ad9b0
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines
Page Count                      : 660

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools